HomeMy WebLinkAboutC-2478 - Warehouse, Wash Rack Cover, & Pavement at Corporation YardCITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK
P.O. BOX 1768, NEWPORT BEACH, CA 92658 -8915
(714) 644 -3005
May 22, 1987
NOW Construction Corporation
10031 S. Pioneer Blvd.
Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670
Subject: Surety: Fairmont Insurance Caq)any
Bonds No. FBO14261
Contract No.: C -2478
Project: Warehouse, Wash Rack Cover, and Pavement at
the Corporation Yard
The City Council of Newport Beach on April 27, 1987 accepted the
pork of subject project and authorized the City Clerk to file a
Notice of Capletion and to release the bonds 35 days after the
Notice has been recorded in accordance with applicable:sections of
the Civil Code.
The Notice was recorded by the Orange County Recorder on May 6,
1987, Reference No. 87- 254323.
Sincerely,
Wanda E. Raggio
City Clerk
WER:pm
cc: Public Works Department
3300 Newport Boulevard, Newport Beach
REWROINti
RvaLWAM Im
PLEASE RETURN TO:
City Clerk�','jj -�v
City of NewpYirt Bdach
3300 Newport Blvd.
Newport Beach, CA 92663 -3884
EXEMPT RECORDING REQUEST PER*
GOVERNMENT CODE 6103_
NOTICF. OF COMPLETI
1
87-
NO CONSIDERATION PUBLIC WORKS j
'I o All Laborers and Material Men and to Every Other Person Interest0`4
CITY OF
NEWP"T BEACH,
CALIF.
MAY 211987 rr
MCOVED
f !TV
YOU WILL PLEASE TAKE NOTICE.that on __.- ASw4-1-2d. .1997
the Public Works project consisting of Warehouse, Wash Rack Cover, and Pavement at _
Corporation Yard (C -2478)
on which NOW Construction Corporation, 10031 S. Pioneer Blvd., Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670
was the contractor, and Fairmont Insurance Company, 4111 W. Alameda Avenue, Burbank,
was the surety, was completed. CA 91505
VERIFICATION
I, the undersigned, say:
CITX OF NEWPORT BFACH
♦ . 44
Public Works Director
I am the Public Works Director of the City of Newport Beach; the foregoing
Notice of Completion is true of my own knowledge.
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.
Executed on April 29. 1987 at Newport Beach. California.
Public Yorks Director
VERIFICATION OF CITY CLERK
I, the undersigned, say:
I am the City Clerk of the City of Newport Beach; the City Council of said
City on April 27, 1987 accepted the above described work as
completed and ordered that a Notice of Completion be filed.
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.
Executed on April 29,1987
at Newport Beach, California.
City Clerk
RECORDED IN OFFICIAL RECORDS
OF ORANGE COUNTY. CALIFORNIA
-429 PM MAY 6'87
�Aj� C�IUNrf
RECORDER
i
T
0
CITYbF NEWPORT AACH
OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK
P.O. BOX 1768, NEWPORT BEACH, CA 92658 -8915
April 30, 1987
County Recorder's Office
P.O. Box 238
Santa Ana, California 92702
(714) 644 -3005
Enclosed is the following document for recordation and return
to the above -named office:
Notice of Completion for C -2478, C -2538, C -2613 and C -2615.
Sincerely,
3300 Newport Boulevard, Newport Beach
0
•
April 27, 1987
VY T "f a:''usd%1LCITY COUNCIL AGENDA
L ;1�ATEM NO. F -16
APR 27 1987
TO: CITY COUNCIL
APPROVED _
FROM: Public Works Department
SUBJECT: WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT THE CORPORATION YARD
(CONTRACT NO. 2478)
RECOMMENDATION:
1. Grant an extension of time of 60 calendar days, and waive any
liquidated damages.
2. Accept the work.
3. Authorize the City Clerk to file a notice of completion.
4. Authorize the City Clerk to release the bonds 35 days after Notice
of Completion has been recorded in accordance with applicable sec-
tions of the Civil Code.
DISCUSSION:
Contract No. 2624 for construction of a warehouse, wash rack cover,
and pavement at the Corporation Yard has been completed to the satisfaction of
the Public Works Department. The work was completed on April 10, 1987. The
contractor was NOW Construction Corp, of Santa Fe Springs.
The bid price was $769,469.00
Amount of unit price items constructed 764,092.63
Extra Work Orders 37,949.93
Total contract cost $802,042.56
Eleven change orders were issued, as follows:
C.O. No. Description Amount
1. Move location of 8 -inch water main
connection to avoid closing main
roadway. $ 1,171.12
2. Design and construct sprinkler
system in warehouse building. 19,869.00
3. Relocate gas and air lines. 1,848.90
4. Upsize gas line from 11 -inch to
2 -inch. 63.05
• •
April 27, 1987
Subject: Warehouse, Wash Rack Cover, and Pavement at the Corporation Yard
(Contract No. 2478)
Page 2
• 5. Reroute two electrical lines to
clear east wall of warehouse. 2,764.64
6. Replace 2 -inch upper water line
with 4 -inch ACP water line. 10,449.04
7. Provide 30 -amp circuit for hot
water heater. 145.40
8 Additional material for pile caps
and grade beams. 1,604.94
9. Substitute door hardware for un-
available type. - 536.94
10. Construct dry wall over plywood
outside of office. 983.90
11. Delete decorative exterior lights
and substitute surface - mounted
• lights for recessed lights in
offices. - 413.12
Total Change Orders $ 37,949.93
Funds were budgeted in the following accounts:
Fund
Water Fund
General Fund
General Fund
General Fund
Account No.
50- 92970179
02- 0797 -386
02- 3397 -290
02- 3397 -287
Total
Amount
$200,000.00
494,032.17
98,080.00
32,305.00
$824,417.17
Purpose
Warehouse
Warehouse
Pavement
Wash Rack Cover
The balance of the appropriations were used for incidental costs
including contract administration, soils testing, trailer rental for warehouse-
man, and moving warehouse stock to temporary warehouse and back.
Change orders represent 4.73% of the original contract. Change Order
•No. 2 is for a fire sprinkler system required because of the building's size and
type ofconstruction. Change Orders 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 were required because
existing underground utilities were not where they were supposed to be.
The contract was awarded on July 14, 1986, with a contract period of
210 calendar days from the date of award. The contract date of completion was
February 9, 1987. The date of substantial completion is April 10, 1987, 60
calendar days over the contract period. Four days were lost due to rain after
February 9, 1987.
April 27,
Subject:
isPage 3
0 0
1987
Warehouse, Wash Rack Cover, and Pavement at the Corporation Yard
(Contract No. 2478)
Recommendation that an extension of time be granted, and that any
liquidated damages be waived is based on the fact that the contractor experi-
enced delays in securing delivery of the prefabricated building, which did not
arrive until December 31, 1986. After the building arrived, the contractor pro-
secuted the work vigorously and finished in a timely manner. The City was not
seriously inconvenienced by the delay, and the warehouse stock cannot be put
into the new warehouse until new shelving is delivered.
The warehouse building contains 9,600 square feet on the main floor,
and 2,400 square feet on the mezzanine which will be used for records storage.
Other items in the contract include construction of a roof over the wash rack,
and paving the lower parking lot.
The plans for the warehouse were prepared by Ficker and Ruffing,
Architects; the plans for the wash rack cover were prepared by Robinson - Thompson
Associates; and the plans for the pavement were prepared by the Public Works
Zi The locations are shown on the attached sketch.
J.
• Benjamin B. Nolan
Public Works Director
KLP:jd
Att.
•
4
OBJECT... ........... .......... . . . .. .....................
CMD. DAIM. . .........
.................
•
•
Oil
H
Fri
tlGAs-
Li
54E
INDUSTRIAL. WAS(
teMMV-Aelt L&rATtW '
OF V'OuNouedd FUNWOO
6(t'l 50wow ae
BHECT NO. _..__.. -OF
im "M --
r-17T-1
ISM
&M
SHOP
ILI
CORPOR'amow Y4-\ZD
69 Z 13U?CRjOK AVE,
WP
c�� ART
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
V T OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK
e.
Cy��FOaN�* (714) 640 -2251
TO: FINANCE DIRECTOR
Public Works Department
FROM: CITY CLERK
DATE: August 11, 1986
SUBJECT: Contract No. C -2478
Description of Contract Warehouse, Wash Rack Cover, and
Pavement at Corporation Yard
Effective date of Contract August 11, 1986
Authorized by Minute Action, approved on July 14,.1986
Contract with NOW Construction Corporation
Address 10031 S. Pioneer Blvd.
Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670
Amount of Contract $769,469.00
Wanda E. Andersen
City Clerk
WEA:lr
attach.
City Hall • 3300 Newport Boulevard, Newport Beach, California 92663
CALLFR)#NIAEPIRELIMIoNAL_t NOTICE INIA
THIS IS NOT A LIEN, THIS IS NOT A REFLECTION ON THE INTEGRITY OF ANY CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR.
YOU ARE HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT . .
MS&-
L
E
N
D
E
R
E
C
0
P
Y
CONSTRUCTION LENDER or
Reputed Construction Lender, if any.
FTRTIFIED NO.23642
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
330 NEWPORT BLVD.
NEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA
92658
IN
Construction Lender For:
592 SUPERIOR, AVENUE
NEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA
FOLD HERE
OWNER or
or Reputed Owner
(on private work)
CERTIFIED NO.23642
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
330 NEWPORT BLVD.
,NEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA
122658
Construction loan no.
_J
PUBLIC AGENCY
(on public work)
MONTF COIIINS RACKHOE I EQPT =TJNC1
(name of person or firm furnishing labor, services, equipment
or material)
POST OFFICE BOX 697
(address of person or lum furnishing fabof, services,
LOS AtAmi n—, CALIFORNIA go790
equipment or material)
has furnished or will furnish labor, services, equipment or
materials of the following general description:
EQUIPMENT RENTAL OPERATED AND
(general description of the labor, services, equipment or
MAINTAINED ON AN HOURLY BASIS
material furnished or to be furnished)
for the building, structure or other work of improvement
located at: 592 SUPERIOR AVEN I
(address or description of job site sufficient
NEWPORT REACH, CALIFORNIA
for indent di<atwo7
The name of the person or firm who contracted for the
purchase of such labor, services, equipment or material is:
NOW CONSTRUCTION
(name and address of person or firm)
10031 SOUTH PIONEER
SANTA FE SPRINGS CALIFORNIA
An estimate of the total price of the labor, services,
equipment or materials furnished or to be furnished is:
APPROX. WORK TO BE DONE ON AN
$ 25000.00 HOURLY BASIS
(if known) (Dollar amount must be furnished to construction tender.
optional as to owner or contractor)
Trust Funds to which Supplemental Fringe Benefits are Payable.
(a) (names trust
(b)
name oTt rust
(c)
(name of trust
(d)
—
O�S 2 _.
(e)
(name of trust fund)
(Material men not required to furnish the above.)
FOLD HERE
ii iC ii jC,}%iy�if iE7f]. if lC]E'iC iC it i( * *a.�iL iE'JEfn n�iC 'ft�nit it k'.t'nit�
THIS NOTICE IS BEING RESENT DUE TO THE
INCREASE OF WORK
LAST NOTICE SENT 8/15/86
i u�1 >E',iiylif *%n'r'::iCiiiiiyn'if if iiyi *ay i<ii ii if ate *ny *%it kJY iii
ORIGINAL CONTRACTOR or Reputed Contractor, if any
CERTIFIED NO.23643
NOW CONSTRUCTION
10036 SOUTH PIONEER
SANTA FE SPRINGS, CALIFORNIA
=1
(address of trustee)
NOTICE TO PROPERTY OWNER
If bills are not fl-Ad in full for the labor, services, equipment,
or materials furnished or to be furnished, a mechanic's lien
leading to the loss, through court foreclosure proceedings, of
all or part of your property being so improved may be placed
against the property even though you have paid your con-
tractor in full. You may wish to protect yourself against this
consequence by (1) requiring your contractor to furnish a
signed release by the person or firm giving you this notice
before making payment to your contractor of (2) any other
method or device which is appropriate under the circumstances.
Gated: 0 23/86
Ai VICE PRIES,
signature (title)
Telephone
Number (2 13 _ 598-9721
AFFIDAVIT OF SERVICE
(SECTION 3097.1 CALIF. CIVIL CODE)
I, D. COLLINS /SLIMMER OF MONTE COLLINS BACKHOE & EQUIPMENT, INC. declare:
That I served copies of the above Preliminary Notice by first class registered /certirled mail, postage prepaid, on the tender, owner and /or reputed
owner, and original contractor at the above address, on 10/23/86
(DATE)
I declare, under penalty of perjury, that the foregoing is true and correct.
Executed on 10 /23/86 at
MATE)
Distributed by
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION, INC.
0
a,
CITY CLERK
' NOTICE INVITING BIDS
Sealed bids may be received at the office of the City Clerk,
3300 Newport Boulevard, P. 0. Box 1768, Newport Beach, CA 92658 -8915
until 11:00 A.M. on the 11th day of June 1986,
at whi time such bids AZT be opene an read for
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD
Title of Protect
2478
ontract No.
' $633,765
Engineer's Est imate
.0
o
' Approved by the City Council
this 12th day of May 1986.
Wanda E. Raggio —�
' City Clerk
Prospective bidders may obtain one set of bid documents at no cost
at the office of the Public Works Department, 3300 Newport Boulevard,
P. 0. Box 1768, Newport Beach, CA 92658 -8915.
For further information, call Kenneth L. Perry at 644 -3311.
'Project Manager
:7
i
•
1 I
1
i
I
1 '
' I
a >r i
C -2478 Addendum No. 1 2
4. Note No. 11 shall be
' constructed in order
shall be constructed
•
changed to: "New underground utility lines to be
to clear the site of the new warehouse building
by the Contractor as part of this Contract 2478."
Sheet A3
1. Portland cement concrete sidewalk shall be 4 inches thick.
2. The two Portland cement concrete driveway approaches at the south wall
shall be 6 inches thick.
3. The curb to the south of the warehouse shall have a zero curb face;
therefore, the two roof drains at the south wall shall discharge onto
the sidewalk.
' Sheets S1 to S4
' Note on Sheets S1 to S4 saying "By Others" refers to design of the struc-
tural members by the designer of the pre- engineered building. The General
Contractor is responsible for designing and furnishing the pre - engineered
metal building plus the steel beams and columns for the mezzanine.
' Sheet D2
' Details 8 and 12 have been deleted. The curb and gutter sections shall be
per City Standard Drawing 182 -L. The cross gutter detail is shown on
Drawing M- 5253 -5, Sheet 3.
' Sheet P2
The water service to the new warehouse shall be connected to the new 2 -inch
' copper domestic water line to be constructed by the Contractor under Bid
Item No. 4 of the Proposal.
Sheet E1
1. Note No. 3 shall be changed to: "Protect existing 1" conduit with 2 #6
copper wires to provide electrical service for Building "G" and the
gasoline station."
2. Note No. 4 shall be changed to: "Abandon 1" conduit."
3. The following shall be added to Note No. 6: "Construct No. 3# pullbox
for reconnecting existing electrical line to Building "G" and gas sta-
tion to existing line from main panel in automotive maintenance shop."
' Please si n and date this Addendum and attach it to our Pro osal. Your
roposa wi not be considered comp ete un ess the Addendum is signed, dated,
'and attached.
/ry Kenne O
Project Engineer
' June 10, 1986
Date
.1
SlM MMM 8. PetW"n.�ls�IIt
Authorized Signature/ Ti
• � �' .
1
1
i
I
1
1
June 5, 1986
• CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH •
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD
CONTRACT NO. 2478
ADDENDUM N0. 2
BIDDERS shall propose to complete Contract No. 2478 in accordance with the
Contract documents as modified by this Addendum No. 2.
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section 08700
Page 7 of Section 08700 of the Architectural Specifications shall be
amended to read as follows:
HW -2
Each door to have
3 Hinges
BB4104 -4 -1/2 in.
1
1 Lock
789L -L9923
18
1 Surface Closer
4040 -EDA
4
1 Threshold
Standard Building
1 Set Seal
755 Head & Jamb
6
Door No. 2 is a building standard door.
HW -3
Each
door to have
3 Hinges
664101 -4 -1/2
1
I. Lock
789L -L9520
18
1 Stop
F8063X Riser as Req.
5
HW -4
Each
door to have
3 Hinges
BB4101 -4 -1/2 in.
1
1 Lock
789L -L9923
18
1 Stop
F8063X Riser as Req.
5
HW -5
Each
door to have
1 Cylinder
For master keying
Balance of Hardware by Gate
Supplier.
END OF SECTION 08700
Please sign and date this Addendum
and attach it to your Proposal.
Your
Proposal will not be considered complete
unless the Addendum
is signed, dated,
and attached.
Date: June 10, 1986
Kenneth rry
Bidder NOW Construction
Corporation
p
Project Engineer
S /William G. Peterson, President
Authorized Signature /Title
• 0
,
I
I
I
1'
• CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH PR 1.1
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
PROPOSAL
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT THE CORPORATION YARD
To the Honorable City Council
City of Newport Beach
3300 Newport Boulevard
P. 0. Box 1768
Newport Beach, CA 92658 -8915
IGentlemen:
CONTRACT NO. 2478
The undersigned declares that he has carefully examined the location of the work, has read the
Instructions to Bidders, has examined the Plans and Special Provisions, and hereby proposes to
furnish all materials and do all the work required to complete this Contract No. 2478in accor-
dance with the Plans and Special Provisions, and will take in full payment therefor the
following unit price for the work, complete in place, to wit:
ITEM QUANTITY ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL
NO. AND UNIT UNIT PRICE WRITTEN IN WORDS PRICE PRICE
1. Lump Sum Provide construction staking and
layout, for the lump sum price of
Six Thousand Dollars
N and
No
Cents
2. Lump Sum Relocate gas meter and gas lines,
for the lump sum price of
One Thousand Seven Hundred Dollars
and
No Cents
3. Lump Sum Relocate 4" domestic water service,
including new vault, for the lump
sum price of
Seven Thousand Dollars
and
No Cents
4. Lump Sum Construct new water lines, including
fittings and thrust blocks, for the
lump sum price of
Eight Thousand Dollars
and
No Cents
$ 6,000.00
g 1,700.00
$ 7,000.00
$ 8,000.00 j
I
1 • • SP 1.2
�i
ITEM
QUANTITY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
UNIT
TOTAL
NO.
AND UNIT
UNIT PRICE WRITTEN IN WORDS
PRICE
PRICE
5.
Lump Sum
Enclose 2 bays of Building "G ",
for the lump sum price of
Nine Thousand Eight Hundred Dollars
and
No Cents
$
9,800.00
6.
Lump Sum
Demolish existing warehouse, for the
lump sum price of
!
Twenty -five Thousand Dollars
and
No Cents
$
25,000.00
7.
Lump Sum
Miscellaneous demolition and rough
grading, for the lump sum price of
Thirty -eight Thousand Dollars
and
No Cents
$
38,000.00
8.
Lump Sum
Construct new warehouse building, com-
plete in place, for the lump sum price of
Five Hundred Ninety Thousand Dollars
and
No Cents
$590,000.00
9.
Lump Sum
Modify wash rack and construct roof,
for the lump sum price of
Thirty -two Thousand Dollars
and
No Cents
$
32,000.00
10.
1,325
Furnish imported aggregate base, for
Tons
the unit sum price of
Fifteen Dollars
and
�.
Forty Cents
$ 15.40
$
20,405.00
Per ton
11.
1,550
Construct 8" thick P.C.0 drain gutter,
Square Feet
for the unit price of
Four Dollars
and
Fifty Cents
$ 4.50
$
6,975.00
Per square foot
i
I
i
•
•
i
1
1
t
i
t
1
1
1
t
f
1
j
■
•
•
PR 1.3
ITEM QUANTITY
ITEM DESCRIPTION
UNIT TOTAL
NO. AND UNIT
UNIT PRICE WRITTEN IN WORDS
PRICE PRICE
IH
I
I
I
12. 635 Furnish and construct 3" -thick A.C.
Tons pavement, for the unit price of
Thirty -six Dollars
and
Forty Cents $ 36.40 $ 23,114.00
Per ton
13. 295 Construct Type "E" A.C. curb per Std.
Linear Feet 183 -L, for the unit price of
Five Dollars
and
No Cents
IDEDUCTIVE BI
I
11
I
0 -1 Lump Sum Eliminate mezzanine construction
above first floor, including stair-
way, lift, vestibule walls, unit
heater, lights under mezzanine.
Deduct the lump sum price of
Fifty -one Thousand Dollars
and
No Cents
5.00 $ 1,475.00
S-51 OOO._OO ,
TOTAL PRICE WRITTEN IN WORDS
(Items 1 -13 inclusive)
Seven Hundred Sixty -nine Thousand Four Hundred
Sixtji -nine_ Dollars
and
No Cents $ 769,469.00
June 11, 1986 NOW Construction Corporation
Date Bidder
(213) 948 -3242 S /William G. Peterson, President
Bidder's Telephone Number Authorized Signature /Title
334218 Class B 10031 S. Pioneer Blvd., Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670
Contractor's License No. & C assification id er's Address
L
I
I
,I
I
• �
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2
The following contract documents shall be completed, executed and received
by the City Clerk in accordance with NOTICE INVITING BIDS.
1. PROPOSAL
2. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3. DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR(S)
4. BIDDER'S BOND (sum not less than 10% of total bid price)
5. NON - COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
6. TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE REFERENCES
except that cash, certified check or cashier's check (sum not less that 10% of
the total bid price) may be received in lieu of the Bidder's Bond. The title
of the project and the words SEALED BID shall be clearly marked on the outside
of the envelope containing the bid.
The City of Newport Beach will not permit a substitute format for the
contract documents listed above. Bidders are advised to review their content
with bonding and legal agents prior to submission of bid.
Bids shall not be received from bidders who are not licensed in accordance
with the provisions of Chapter 9, Division III of the Business and Professions'
Code. The low bidder shall also be required to possess a City of Newport Beach
business license prior to execution of contract.
The estimated quantities indicated in the PROPOSAL are approximate, and
are given solely to allow the comparison of bid totals.
Bids are to be computed upon the estimated quantities indicated in the
PROPOSAL multiplied by unit price submitted by the bidder. In the event of dis-
crepancy between wording and figures, bid wording shall prevail over bid figures.
In the event of error in the multiplication of estimated quantity by unit price,
the correct multiplication will be computed and the bids will be compared with
correctly multiplied totals. The City shall not be held responsible for bidder
errors and omissions in the PROPOSAL.
Contract documents shall bear signatures and titles of persons authorized
to sign on behalf of the bidder. For corporations, the signatures shall be of
the President or Vice President. For partnerships, the signatures shall be of
a general partner. For so e ownership, the signature shall be of the owner.
In accordance with the California Labor Code (Sections 1770 et seq.), the
Director of Industrial Relations has ascertained the general prevailing rate of
per diem wages in the locality in which the work is to be performed for each
craft, classification, or type of workman or mechanic needed to execute the con-
tract. A copy of said determination is available in the office of the City
Clerk. All parties to the contract shall be governed by all provisions of the
California Labor Code relating to prevailing wage rates (Sections 1770 -7981 in-
clusive). The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with Section
1777.5 of the California Labor Code for all apprenticeable occupations.
334218 Class B
Contr's Lic. No. & Classification
June 11, 1986
NOW Construction Corporation
Bidder
S /William G. Peterson, President
Authorized Signature /Title
•
• ,
`f
i
I
11
F
L,
fF
I
1
Fl
L
i
I
i
I
I
11'
i
•
•
Page 3
i
442 -3360
DESIGNATION
OF SUBCONTRACTOR(S)
The undersigned certifies
that he has used bid(s) of the
following listed
(213)
subcontractor(s) in making
up his bid,and that the subcontractor(s)
listed
Pre - engineered Bldg_
will be used for the work
for which they bid, subject to
the approval of the
Engineer and in accordance
with the applicable provisions
of the Specifications.
No change of subcontractor
may be made except with the prior
approval of the
Vertical Lifts
Engineer and as provided by State law.
(818)
969 -8745
Subcontract Work
Demolition and
Subcontractor
Address
Cobabe
1. Earthwork
Howard Contracting
(800) 446 -0101
13.
2. Driven Piles
Diversified Builders
(213) 633 -0161
634 -3706
Agg. Base and
14.
Rough Carpentry
Evergreen Construction
3. A.C. Paving
Vernon Paving
(714) 527 -8600
1 4
5.
6.
7. Unit Masonary So. Counties Masonary (714) 554 -6222
S /William G. Peterson, President
Authorized Signature Titer
LJ
I
I
8.
Metal Fabrication
Republic Iron
(818)
442 -3360
So. California
9.
Overhead Coiling Doors
Overhead Doors
(213)
686 -0052
10.
Pre - engineered Bldg_
ETCO
(213)
479 -1820
11.
Vertical Lifts
Hytrol
(818)
969 -8745
12.
Plumbing
Cobabe
(213)
328 -2880
13.
Electrical
Assured Electric
(714)
634 -3706
14.
Rough Carpentry
Evergreen Construction
(619)
758 -7611
NOW Construction
Corporation
Bidder
S /William G. Peterson, President
Authorized Signature Titer
LJ
I
I
• FOR ORIGINAL SEE CITY CLERK'J*E COPY
Page 4
BIDDER'S BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That we, NOW CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION as bidder,
and FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY as Surety, are held
and firmly bound unto the City of Newport Beach, Calfornia, in the sum of
Ten Percent of Amount Bid----------------------- - - - - -- Dollars ($---------- - - --),
' lawful money of the United States for the payment of which sum well and truly to
be made, we bind ourselves, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH,
That if the proposal of the above bounden bidder for the construction of
WAREHOUSE, WASHRACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD C2478
Title of Project Contract No.
in the City of Newport Beach, is accepted by the City Council of said City, and
if the above bounden bidder shall duly enter into and execute a contract for
such construction and shall execute and deliver to said City the "Payment" and
"Faithful Performance" contract bonds described in the Specifications within ten
(10) days (not including Saturday, Sunday, and Federal holidays) from the date of
the mailing of contract documents for execution to the above bounden bidder by
and from said City, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it
is and shall remain in full force and effect, and the amount specified herein
shall be forfeited to the said City.
In the event that any bidder above named executed this bond as an individual,
it is agreed that the death of any such bidder shall not exonerate the Surety
from its obligations under this bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we hereunto set our hands and seals this 5th day
of June , 1986
NOW Construction Corporation
(Attach acknowledgement of Bidder
' Attorney -in -Fact)
S /Isela M. Carrillo S /William G. Peterson, President
Notary Public Authorized Signature /Title
Commission Expires: June 9, 1989 FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY
Surety
By S /Mary Scheiner
tTitle Attorney -in -Fact
i
i
NON- COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
The bidder, by its officers and agents or representatives present at the time
of filing this bid, being duly sworn on their oaths, say that neither they nor
any of them have, in any way, directly or indirectly, entered into any arrange -
ment or agreement with any other bidder, or with any public officer of such
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH whereby such affiant or affiants or either of them, has
paid or is to pay to such bidder or public officer any sum of money, or has
I given or is to give to such other bidder or public officer anything of value
whatever; or such affiant or affiants or either of them has not directly or
indirectly, entered into any arrangement or agreement with any other bidder or
bidders, which tends to or does lessen or destroy free competition in the
letting of the contract sought for by the attached bids; that no bid has been
accepted from any subcontractor or materialman through any bid depository, the
bylaws, rules or regulations of which prohibit or prevent the bidder from con-
' sidering any bid from any subcontractor or materialman which is not processed
through said bid depository, or which prevent any subcontractor or materialman
from submitting bids to a bidder who does not use the facilities of or accept
bids from or through such bid depository; that no inducement of any form or
character other than that which appears upon the face of the bid will be sug-
gested, offered, paid or delivered to any person whomsoever to influence the
acceptance of the said bid or awarding of the contract; nor has the bidder
any agreement or understanding of any kind whatsoever with any person whomso-
ever to pay, deliver to, or share with any other person in any way or manner,
any of the proceeds of the contracts sought by this bid.
I
1J
Subscribed and sworn to before me
this 4th day of June ,
1986.
My commission expires:
' November 25, 1986
11
t
NOW Construction Corporation
Bidder
S /William G. Peterson, President
Authorized Signature /Title
S /Iris L. Babcock
Notary Public
Page 5
0
a • • Page 6
TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE REFERENCES
The undersigned submits herewith a statement of the work of similar character
to that proposed herein which he has performed and successfully completed.
Year
Completed
For Whom Performed
(Detail) Person to Contact Telephone No.
1983
Chevron Refinery
Concrete Docks Bill Scharpenburg (213) 694 -7758
0o ma er, Inc.
Warehouse Storage
1979
Jack -in -the -Box
Freezer and Erwin Rubenstein (619) 571 -8914
I
I
I
I
r
Offices
1986 City f Industry Office Snack Bar y y and Snack Bar Tom Loveday (818) 912 -2467
Facilities
NOW Construction Corporation
Bidder
S /William G. Petersognn President
ut orized Siature /Title
1 • •
I
I
I
I
The following are contract documents which shall be completed
and executed by the successful bidder after he receives a letter of
award from the City of Newport Beach:
PAYMENT BOND (pages 8 & 9)
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND (pages 10 & 11)
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE & ENDORSEMENTS (pages 12, 13, 14)
CONTRACT (pages 15 & 16)
The City of Newport Beach will not permit a substitute format for
these contract documents. Bidders are advised to review their content
with bonding, insuring and legal agents prior to submission of bid.
BONDING COMPANIES shall be acceptable as sureties in accordance
with the latest revision of Federal Register Circular 570.
INSURANCE COMPANIES shall be (1) licensed to conduct business in
California, and (2) assigned Policyholders' Rating A (or higher) and
Financial Size Category Class VIII (or larger) in accordance with the
latest edition of Best's Key Rating Guide: Property- Casualty.
Coverages shall be provided for all TYPES OF INSURANCE checked on the
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE.
All costs associated with the specifications of these contract
documents shall be absorbed in the bid. Such specifications shall
include those contained in (1) each contract document and (2) the
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (latest edition
adopted for use in the City of Newport Beach), except as supplemented
or modified by the Special Provisions for this project.
I
I
Page 7
NOTICE
The following are contract documents which shall be completed
and executed by the successful bidder after he receives a letter of
award from the City of Newport Beach:
PAYMENT BOND (pages 8 & 9)
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND (pages 10 & 11)
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE & ENDORSEMENTS (pages 12, 13, 14)
CONTRACT (pages 15 & 16)
The City of Newport Beach will not permit a substitute format for
these contract documents. Bidders are advised to review their content
with bonding, insuring and legal agents prior to submission of bid.
BONDING COMPANIES shall be acceptable as sureties in accordance
with the latest revision of Federal Register Circular 570.
INSURANCE COMPANIES shall be (1) licensed to conduct business in
California, and (2) assigned Policyholders' Rating A (or higher) and
Financial Size Category Class VIII (or larger) in accordance with the
latest edition of Best's Key Rating Guide: Property- Casualty.
Coverages shall be provided for all TYPES OF INSURANCE checked on the
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE.
All costs associated with the specifications of these contract
documents shall be absorbed in the bid. Such specifications shall
include those contained in (1) each contract document and (2) the
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (latest edition
adopted for use in the City of Newport Beach), except as supplemented
or modified by the Special Provisions for this project.
I
I
Page 7
WQ"TSD IN YOUR CWARTS
Page 10
BOND YYB014261 PMA$9544.00
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That
iWHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Newport Beach, State of California, by
' motion adopted July 14, 1986
has awarded to NOW Construction Corporation
' hereinafter designated as the "Principal ", a contract for
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COYER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD C-2478
in the City of Newport Beach, in strict conformity with the Drawings and Specifications
and other contract documents on file in the office of the City Clerk of the City of
Newport Beach;
WHEREAS, said Principal has executed or is about to execute said contract and the
terms thereof require the furnishing of a bond for the faithful performance of said
contract;
NOW, THEREFORE, We,
' NOW CONSTRUCTIO ?i COMRA ?ION
as Principal, and FAIRAONT INSURANCE CtlMANY
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Newport Beach, in the sum of
Seven hundred sixty -vino thousand four hundred sixty -nine Dollars ($ 769,469.00 �
' said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount of the contract, to be paid to
the said City or its certain attorney, its successors, and assigns; for which payment
well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators,
successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the above bounden Principal,
his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall in all
things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, con-
ditions, and agreements in the said contract and any alteration thereof made as therein
' provided on his or their part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner
therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and
shall indemnify and save harmless the City of Newport Beach, its officers and agents,
as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it
shall remain in full force and virtue.
And said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the contract or to the
work to be performed thereunder or to the specifications accompanying the same shall
in any wise affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice
I
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cl
i
i
1
1
1
1
1
I
[l
I1
I
1
I
1�
I
�i
LJ
I
• • Page 11
Faithful Performance Bond (Continued)
of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the
contract or to the work or to the specifications.
In the event that any principal above named executed this bond as an individual,
it is agreed that the death of any such principal shall not exonerate the Surety from
its obligations under this bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal and
Surety above named, on the 22nd day of July , 19 86
NOW CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION (Seal)
Name of Contractor Principal
Authorized Signature and Title
Authorized Signature and Title
FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY (Seal)
ame of Surety
4111 W. Alasada Avenue Bmr"A. CA._ 91509
Address of Surety
l�
Signature And Title of Authorized Agent
Mary Sc finer. Attorney —La -fact
911 Wllshlre Blvd. 0970 Los Angeles. CA 90017
Address of Agent
(213) 624 -2055
Telephone No. of Agent
i
I
[l
I1
I
1
I
1�
I
�i
LJ
I
• • Page 11
Faithful Performance Bond (Continued)
of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the
contract or to the work or to the specifications.
In the event that any principal above named executed this bond as an individual,
it is agreed that the death of any such principal shall not exonerate the Surety from
its obligations under this bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal and
Surety above named, on the 22nd day of July , 19 86
NOW CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION (Seal)
Name of Contractor Principal
Authorized Signature and Title
Authorized Signature and Title
FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY (Seal)
ame of Surety
4111 W. Alasada Avenue Bmr"A. CA._ 91509
Address of Surety
l�
Signature And Title of Authorized Agent
Mary Sc finer. Attorney —La -fact
911 Wllshlre Blvd. 0970 Los Angeles. CA 90017
Address of Agent
(213) 624 -2055
Telephone No. of Agent
n
LA
C
I
1
,I
1
1;
I
y
m
0
i w
` H z
�� pvnm
=c`rrr-
D
CmT.Z7f
Z �\
O
0
3 o R v
o ' �
J � a
T ?
er
N
o
�
O
d
o
� w
N �
n
c
0
0
N J
i
J O
o 4
w '
D °
J
o a
� o
O m m <
a o
0 °o
3 J
m F
T T
O O
T
m o'
c 3
� m
n -
N �
a �
R
m W
J a
o _
u � m
o T
J
S J O
m N
a e Jo
3 F
J
N 0
m m
nw
o o
J o'
? o
°
Io 3
�o
N
N
d
O
0
c.,
G
r
�G
0
�o
rn
o'
m
°
0
3
m
m
0
°
� � � � � . �
• � r
i;
5XRMED
I
BOND iF8014261
PAYMENT BOND
•
a.•
PRRMIUM! INCLUDED IN PEMRMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That
WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Newport Beach, State of California, by
rmotion adopted July 14, 1086
IJ
has awarded to NOW Constrac-Man 6sr-pontion
hereinafter designated as the "Principal ", a contract for
WAREHOUSE, MASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD C -2478
in the City of Newport Beach, in strict conformity with the Drawings and Specifications
and other contract documents on file in the office of the City Clerk of the City of
Newport Beach;
WHEREAS, said Principal has executed or is about to execute said contract and the
terms thereof require the furnishing of a bond with said contract, providing that if
said Principal or any of his or its subcontractors, shall fail to pay for any materials,
provisions, or other supplies used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the
work agreed to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of dny kind, the Surety on
this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth:
NOW, THEREFORE, We
NOW CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION
Ias Principal, and FAI`tA)NT INSURANCE COMPANY
as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the City of Newport Beach, in the sum of
Saveu hundred sixty -nine thousand four hundred slzty— n'"Oollars ($ 769.469.00 �
said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount payable by the City of Newport '
Beach under the terms of the contract; for which payment well and truly to be made, we
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly
and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the above bounden Principal or
his subcontractors, fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies,
used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or
for any other work or labor thereon of any kind or for amounts due under the Unemploy-
ment Insurance Code with respect to such work or labor, that the Surety or Sureties
will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in the bond, and
also, in case suit is brought upon the bond, a reasonable attorney's fee, to be fixed
by the Court as required by the provisions of Section 3250 of the Civil Code of the
State of California.
The bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies, and
corporations entitled to file claims under Section 3181 of the California Civil Code
so as to give a right of action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon
• • Page 9
IPayment Bond (Continued)
this bond, as required by the Provisions of Sections 3247 et. seq. of the Civil Code of
the State of California.
And said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the contract or to the
work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in
any wise affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any
such change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the contract
or to the work or to the specifications,
In the event that any principal above named executed this bond as an individual,
it is agreed that the death of any such principal shall not exonerate the Surety from
its obligations under this bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this nstrument has been dul��xecuted by the Princip�l6 and
Surety above named, on the day of y 19
NOW CONSTRUCTION CORPORATIOX -- ,` - (Seal}
Name of Contractor Principal l `
Authorized Signature Ud Title' ^
Authorized Signature and Title
I
FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY (Seal):
Name of Surety
4111 W. Alameda Avenue Busbaeks CA-91595,
t Address f Surec
Sr gluey R e n@r, Rtt0raeY- &n- gent
911 Wilshire Blvd. 0970 Los Angeles$ CA 90017
Address of Agent
(213) 624 -2055
Telephone No. of Agent
( .. <
• •
a
yi
�I
1
�I
m
o
_ o
w
m
3
o
0
o
�
m
s
�
u
m
a
m
_
°
o
N
�
'IAHI)IiF{N III1111IIIL
c
m
i�
V'TnDrn=
=f9
a
i�
D
m
lllilllil 11 111 11 if llllF.
�
� � ;.
m
a o ^-
O u
O
3 �
`D f
Er T
m
TJ
m 0
m
c 3
°
a �
°.
R
.e
S
v
o 0
3 o
O T
I \
S 7
1 \
m N
Q c
3
i
N
m
0
a
m
0
ry
a
H
k
LO
n
m
w
p
(D
�S
a
0
O
O
I
F
J
O
f
J
O
3
0
O
H
N
N
w
a
0
0
4
G
r
0
d
00
o+
m
O
m
m
m
0
7 0
0
ro
o;
�o
G)
to
r
t�
Ge[aid J. Sul Itvan S c, Inc
WIRMONT INSURANCE C &ANY
Burbank California
POWER OF ATTORNEY
' kNOW ALL RIEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
' That FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY, a California Corporation, does hereby make, constitute and
appoint
William R. Curtis, John W. Hirschmann,
Mary Scheiner, John Monroe
' as its true lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact, with full power and authority, for and on behalf of the Company as surety, to execute
and deliver and affix the seal of the Company thereto, if a seal is required, bonds, undertakings, recognizances, consents of
surety or other written obligations in the nature therof, as follows:
' Any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, consents of surety or other written obligations in the nature
thereof,
' and to bind FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY thereby, and all of the acts of said Attomey(s) -in -Fact,
pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed.
' This appointment is made under and by authority of the following Bylaws of the Company, which Bylaws
are now in full force and effect:
' ARTICLE IV, Section 13. ATTORNEYS -IN -FACT AND AGENTS. The chairman of the board, the president, the vice
president, the chiet financial officer, or the secrnary o the corporatron may appoint attomeys -in -fact or agents with power
and authority, as defined or limited in their respective powers of attorney, for and on behalf of the corporation to execute
and deliver, and affix the seal of the Corporation thereto, bonds, undertakings, recognizances, consents of surety or
other written obligations in the nature thereof and any of said oficers may remove any such attorney -in- fact or agent
' and revoke the power and authority given to him or her.
ARTICLE IV, Section 14. AUTHORITY TO BIND. Any bond, undertaking, recognizance, consent of surety or written
obligation in the nature thereof shall vat an binding upon the corporation when signed by the chairman of the
' board. the president, the vice president, the chief financial officer, or the secretary of the corporation and duly attested
and sealed, if a seat is required, by the secretary or assistant secretary. or shall be valid and binding upon the corporation
when duly executed and sealed, if a seal is required, by a duly authorized attomey -in- fact or agent, pursuant to and
within the limits of the authority granted by his or her power of attorney.
' This power of attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolu-
tion adopted by the Board of Directors of FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called
and held on the 4rd day of October, 1983:
RESOLVED that the signature of any officer authorized by the Bylaws, and the seal of the corporation, may be affixed
by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either given for the execution of
any bond, undertaking, recognizance consent of surety or other wntten obligation in the nature thereof; such signature
' and seal, when so used, being hereby adopted by the corporation as the on g nal signature of such officer and the original
seal of the corporation, to be valid and binding upon the corporation with the same force and effect as though manually
affixed. t
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed
' by its proper officer and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed this 22nd day of March of 1985
I
I` JI
nn mUSA
APR. 10
CAL F
a,
FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY
By
f
Signature Henry F. Wright, Vi� = resid'I
t
State of California ,
es.
County of Los Angeles _ '
Henry F. Wright Personally known to rlc, was by me duly sworn, and did depose and say: that
he /she resides in the State of California; that helshe is the duly elected Vice president of '
FAIRMONT INSURANCE COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above instru-
ment; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such cor-
porate seal; that it was so affixed by authority of his /her office under the Bylaws of seid corporation, and
that he/she signed his /her name thereto by like authority.
Subscribed and sworn to me this 22nd day of ttarch , 1985 '
OFFICIAL SEAL
HARRIET IAMBELL
NOTARY PUBLIC - CALIFORNIA
PRINCIPAL OFFICE IN
LOS ANGELES COUNTY
A Commission Eip"m Apr. 21,1911
Notary i��� ,
for said County and State. ,
F
CERTIFICATION
1, Tsude A. Tsujimoto the Assistant Secretary of FAIRMONT
INSURANCE COMPANY, certify that the foregoing power of attorney and the above quoted Sections 13.
and 14. of Article IV of the Bylaws have not been abridged or revoked and are now in full force and, '
Signed and Sealed at Burbank, California, this
APL 10
1970
If
22nd day of July 19 86
T ee: Assistant tary
i
Originated by: Date of Origin. August 13, 19 85
'Orety
• CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE •
amity of Newport Beach
3300 Newport Boulevard
Fewport Beach, CA 92663
NAME AND ADDRESS OF INSURED
Construction Corporation
10031 S. Pioneer Blvd.
Fe Sprinqs, CA 90670
INSURANCE COMPANIES AFFORDING
Page 12
GES
Company A AETNA CASUALTY & SURETY COMPANY
Letter
B BEAVER INSURANCE COMPANY
l
-e',, C
Letter
Company D
Letter
Company E
Letter
This is to certify that policies of insurance listed below have been issued to the insured named
a*ve and are in force at this time, including attached endorsement(s).
NOTICE: This certificate or verification of insurance is not an insurance policy and does not
amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed herein. Notwith-
standing any requirement, term, or condition of any contract or other document with
respect to which this certificate or verification of insurance may be issued or may
pertain, the insurance afforded by the policies described herein is subject to all
the terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies, including attached endorsements.
01
Policy
LIMITS OF LIABILITY
IN THOUSANDS
000
COMPANY
TYPES OF INSURANCE
Policy
Exp.
g, ro ucts
LITER
COVERAGE REQUIRED
No.
Date
Each
Completed
Occurrence
Operations
GENERAL LIABILITY
Bodily Injury
$
$
' A
x Comprehensive Form
83
411186
x Premises - Operations
CO030-
to
Property Damage
$
$
X Explosion & Collapse Hazard
783CCA
411187
x Underground Hazard
'
x Products /Completed Operations
Bodily Injury
Hazard
and Property
'
x Contractual Insurance
x Broad Form Property Damage
Damage Combined
$ 1,000,
$ 1,000,
x Independent Contractors
X Personal Injury
'
Marine
Personal Injury
$ INCL.
Aviation
'AUTOMOTIVE
LIABILITY
A
❑x Comprehensive Form
83
411186
Bodily Injury
$
FJ614-
to
(Each Person
'
❑x Owned
164
411187
$
bodily Injury
(Each Occurrence
❑x Hired
Property Dama e
bodily Injury and
'
❑x Non -owned
Property Damage
Combined
$1,000,
'EXCESS
LIABILITY
A
® Umbrella Form
83XS
411186
Bodily Injury
❑ Other than Umbrella Form
162382
wCA
to
411187
and Property
Damage Combined
$5,000,
$ 5,000,
WORKERS' COMPENSATION
Statutor
III
B
and
W000-
411186
(Each
EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
5983
to
$2,000,
Accident)
U
anc
NOTE:
The Comprehensive General Liability and Automotive Liability policies are endorsed
with the attached City of Newport Beach Endorsements.
C!, CELLATION: Should any of the above described policies be cancelled or coverage reduced
before the expiration date thereof, the•Insurance Company affording coverage
' shall provide 30 days' advance notice to the City of Newport Beach by
regisAiered: il, attention: Public Works Department.
By: Z,4c_ Agency: Gerald J. Sullivan & Associates, Inc.
Authori ed Re(lresentative
Date: July 23, 1986 Telephone: (714) 833 -2760
Description of operations /locations /vehicles: All operations performed for the City of Newport
Beach by or on behalf of the named insured in connection with the following designated contract:
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD C -2478
Project Title and Contract Number
NOTICE: This certificate or verification of insurance is not an insurance policy and does not
amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed herein. Notwith-
standing any requirement, term, or condition of any contract or other document with
respect to which this certificate or verification of insurance may be issued or may
pertain, the insurance afforded by the policies described herein is subject to all
the terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies, including attached endorsements.
01
Page 14
' CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH,
COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE ENDORSEMENT
It is agreed that:
'1. With respect to such insurance as is afforded by the policy for Comprehensive General
Liability, the City of Newport Beach, its officers and employees are additional in-
sureds but only with respect to liability arising out of operations performed by or on
' behalf of the named insured in connection with the contract designated below or acts
and omissions of the City of Newport Beach in connection with its general supervision
of such operations. The insurance afforded said additional insured shall apply as
primary insurance and no other insurance maintained by the City of Newport Beach will
' be called upon to contribute with insurance provided by this policy.
2. The policy includes the following provision:
"The insurance afforded by the policy applies separately to each insured against
whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the
Insurance Company's liability."
3. The insurance afforded by the policy for Contractual Liability Insurance (subject to
the terms, conditions and exclusions applicable to such insurance) includes liability
' assumed by the named insured under the indemnification or nold harmless provision con-
tained in the written contract, designated below, between the named insured and the
City of Newport Beach.
' 4. With respect to such insurance as is afforded by this policy, the exclusions, if any,
pertaining to the explosion hazard, collapse hazard and underground property hazard
(commonly referred to as "XCU "hazards) are deleted.
' 5. The limits of liability under this endorsement for the additional insured named in
paragraph I of this endorsement shall be the limits indicated below for either Multiple
' Limits or Single Limit, whichever is indicated by the letter X in the appropriate box.
( ) Multiple Limits
' Bodily Injury Liability $ each occurrence
' Property Damage Liability $ each occurrence
(x) Single Limit
' Bodily Injury Liability $ 1,000,000. each occurrence
and
Property Damage Liability
' Combined
The applicable limit of the Insurance Company's liability for the insurance afforded
' for contractual liability shall be reduced by any amount paid as damages under this
endorsement in behalf of the additional insureds.
The limits of liability as stated in this endorsement shall not increase the total
' liability of the Insurance Company for all damages as the result of any one occurrence
in excess of the limits of liability stated in the policy as applicable to Comprehen-
sive General Liability Insurance.
' 6. Should the policy be cancelled or coverage reduced before the expiration date thereof,
the Insurance Company shall provide 30 days' advance notice to the City of Newport
Beach by registered mail, Attention: Public Works Department
7. Designated Contract: WARE
This endorsement is effective
Policy No.83CO030783CCA
Named Insured
RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD C -2478
it le and Contract No.
July 23, 1986at 12:01 A.M. and forms a part of
Now Construction Corporation
Name of Insurance Company Aetna Casualty & surety CoBy
Endorsement/No. special
J Authorized Rerptes'entati ve
I
' • • Page 13
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
' AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE ENDORSEMENT
It is agreed that:
1. With respect to such insurance as is afforded by the policy for Bodily Injury and
Property Damage Liability, the City of Newport Beach, its officers and employees are
' additional insureds but only with respect to liability for damages arising out of
the ownership, maintenance or use of automobiles (or autos) used by or on behalf of
the named insured in connection with the contract designated below. The insurance
' extended by this endorsement to said additional insured does not apply to bodily
injury or property damage arising out of automobiles (1) owned by or registered in
the name of an additional insured, or (2) leased or rented by an additional insured,
or (3) operated by an additional insured. The insurance afforded the additional
' named insured(s) shall apply as primary insurance and no other insurance maintained
by the City of Newport Beach will be called upon to contribute with insurance
provided by this policy.
' 2. The policy includes the following provision: °
' "The insurance afforded by the policy applies separately to each insured
who is seeking coverage or against whom a claim is made or suit is brought,
except with respect to the limits of the Insurance Company's liability."
' 3. The limits of liability under this endorsement for the additional insureds named in
paragraph 1 of this endorsement shall be the limits indicated below for either Multi -
ple Limits or Single Limit, whichever is indicated by the letter X in the appropriate
' box.
( ) Multiple Limits
' Bodily Injury Liability $ each occurrence
Property Damage Liability $ each occurrence
( X) Single Limit
' Bodily Injury Liability $ 1,000,000. each occurrence
and
Property Damage Liability
' Combined
The limits of liability as stated in paragraph 3 of this endorsement shall not in-
crease the total liability of the Insurance Company for all damages as the result of
' any one accident or occurrence in excess of the limits of Liability stated in the
policy as applicable to Automobile Liability Insurance.
4. Should the policy be cancelled or coverage reduced before the expiration date thereof,
the Insurance Company shall provide 30 days' advance notice to the City of Newport
Beach by registered mail, Attention: Public Works Department.
I 5. Designated Contract: WAREHOUSE, WASHRACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD C -2478
Project Title and Contract No.).
'This endorsement is effective 7123186
Policy No. 63FJ614164
i
Named Insured Now construction corporation
at 12:01 A.M. and forms a part of
•
Name of Insurance Company Aetna casualty & surety co.
Endorsement No. /Ts
ve
• • Page 15
CONTRACT
THIS AGREEMENT, entered into this /a day of 19 ,
by and between the CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH, hereinafter "City," d
NOW Construction Corporation , hereinafter "Contract , "is made with
reference to the following facts:
(a) City has heretofore advertised for bids for the following
described public work:
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD 2478
Title of Project Contract No.
(b) Contractor has been determined by City to be the lowest responsi-
ble bidder on said public work, and Contractor's bid, and the compensation set
forth in this contract, is based upon a careful examination of all plans and
specifications by Contractor,
NOW, THEREFORE, the parties hereto agree as follows:
1. Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all of the work
for the construction of the following described public work:
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD 2478
Title of Project Contract No.
which project is more fully described in the contract documents. Contractor
shall perform and complete this work in a good and workmanlike manner, and in
accordance with all of the contract documents.
2. As full compensation for the performance and completion of this
work as prescribed above, City shall pay to Contractor the sum of Seven Hundred
Sixty -nine Thousand Four Hundred Sixty -nine Dollars and No /100 - -4$ 7fi9_4159_00- -�.
This compensation includes (1) any loss or damage arising from the nature of the
work; (2) any loss or damage arising from any unforeseen difficulties or obstruc-
tions in the performance of the work; (3) any expense incurred as a result of any
suspension or discontinuance of the work; but excludes any loss resulting from
earthquakes of a magnitude in excess of 3.5 on the Richter Scale and tidal waves,
and which loss or expense occurs prior to acceptance of the work by City.
3. All of the respective rights and obligations of City and Contractor
are set forth in the contract documents. The contract documents are incorporated
herein by reference as though set out in full and include the following:
(a) Notice Inviting Bids
(b) Instruction to Bidders and documents referenced therein
(c) Payment Bond
(d) Faithful Performance Bond
(e) Certificate of Insurance and endorsement(s)
• • Page 16
(f) Plans and Special Provisions for
iitie of Project Contract No.
(g) This Contract.
4. Contractor shall assume the defense of, and indemnify and hold
harmless, City and its officers, employees and representatives from all claims,
loss or damage, except such loss or damage proximiately caused by the sole
negligence of City or its officers, employees and representatives.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this contract to
be executed the day and year first above written.
I
J
1 ATTEST:
I
I
I
u
I
L
I
I
ax
y Attorney
NOW Construction Corporation
CITY
Name of iContractor (Pr'nci al)
Aut orized Signature and Title �(D
Authorized Signature and Title
L�
E
1
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER AND PAVEMENT AT THE CORPORATION YARD
CONTRACT NO. 2478
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
INDEX
SECTION
PAGE
I.
GENERAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 1
II.
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 1
III.
SCOPE OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 1
IV.
LOW BID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 3
V.
TIME OF CONTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 3
VI.
PERIOD OF FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 3
VII.
LIABILITY INSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 4
A. General Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 4
B. Automobile Liability . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 4
VIII.
GUARANTEES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 4
IX.
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 4
X.
PAYMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 5
A. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 5
B. Monthly Progress Payments . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 5
C. Individual Pay Items . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 5
XI.
MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 7
XII.
FIELD ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 8
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 8
B. Survey Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 8
XIII.
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 8
XIV.
SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 8
XV.
CONTRACTOR'S STAGING AREA . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 9
• • SPlof9
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FOR
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER AND PAVEMENT AT THE CORPORATION YARD
rCONTRACT NO. 2478
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS
The Standard Specifications of the City of Newport Beach shall govern
contractual relationships between the parties to this contract.
The parties to this contract are the City of Newport Beach and the
Contractor.
II. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
The Public Works Director of the City of Newport Beach shall administer this
contract for the City.
Any change order issued to the Contractor must be in writing and signed by
the Public Works Director.
III. SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work to be done under this contract consists of demolishing and
disposing of an existing warehouse building, loading dock,pavement and
other miscellaneous improvements; rearranging site utilities to clear new
construction; enclosing part of a shed for use as an interim warehouse;
constructing a warehouse building complete including including foundations
and mezzanine; modifying and constructing a roof over existing wash rack;
constructing curbs, gutters, sidewalks, driveway approaches and asphalt
concrete pavement; providing construction staking; and providing all
other labor, materials and transportation necessary to complete the
project.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing calculations and design
drawings for the pre- engineered building and for obtaining building per-
mits from the Building Department for the pre- engineered building. The
design of the pre- engineered building shall include design of the floor
beams for the mezzanine.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for field engineering to locate the
building and for construction staking of pavement and other site improve-
ments.
D. Contractor's Duties:
1. Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for-
a. Labor, materials and equipment.
1 • • SP 2 of 9
ab. Tools, materials and equipment.
C. Telephones.
d. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution
and completion of work.
2. Secure and pay for permits, government fees and licenses.
3. Give required notices.
4. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders and
other legal requirements of public authorities which bear on per-
formance of work.
5. Enforce strict discipline and good order among employees. Do
not employ on work persons unfit for work assigned.
E. The contract requires completion of all work in accordance with these
Special Provisions, the plans, the City's Standard Specifications and
Drawings for Public Works Construction, the City's Standard Specifications
(Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 1985 Edition and
1 1986 Supplement), the architectural specifications for the warehouse
building, and reference specifications.
1. Copies of the Standard Specifications may be purchased from Building
News, Inc., 3055 Overland Avenue, Los Angeles, California 90034,
telephone (213) 870 -9871. Copies of the City's Standard Special
Provisions and Standard Drawings may be purchased at the Public Works
Department for $5 apiece.
2. The architectural specifications for the warehouse buildings are
bound together with the contract documents and shall apply to
construction of the warehouse; to modifications to the wash rack; and
to a slab over the clarifier; and a pad for a future steam cleaner.
3. Asphalt concrete pavement curbs, gutters, driveway approaches,
portland cement concrete slabs on grade, site utilities and drainage
improvements will be constructed per the City's Standard
Specifications and Drawings for Public Works Construction.
4. The plans consist of the following drawings:
'
a. The warehouse building plans, Drawing No. B- 5114 -S, consisting of
21 sheets, prepared by Ficker and Ruffing, Architects.
b. The wash rack roof, Drawing No. B- 5111 -S, consisting of 3 sheets.
c. Pavement and site utilities, Drawing No. M- 5253 -S, consisting of
3 sheets.
F. Included in the scope of the contract is payment of all fees and the
securing of all permits normally charged by governing public agencies;
payment of all connection charges normally charged by serving utilities;
and furnishing all material, labor, and transportation necessary to
complete the construction, except that the following fees normally
charged by the City of Newport Beach will be waived:
1 • • SP3of9
1. Building excise tax fees.
2. Building and plan check fees normally charged for the amount of the
General Fund, including plumbing, electrical, and mechanical permits.
All other fees normally charged by the City must be paid by the
1 Contractor. Included among fees that must be paid are:
1 1. Business license fees.
2. Fee charged by the Southern California Gas Company to relocate the
existing gas meter.
G. 1. The City specifically reserves the right to increase or decrease by
more than 25% the number of tons of imported aggregate base to be
constructed under Item No. 10 of the Proposal.
2. The City specifically reserves the right to increase or decrease by
more than 25% the number of tons of asphalt concrete pavement to be
constructed under Item No. 12 of the proposal.
3. The City specifically reserves the right to eliminate the enclosure
of 2 bays of Building "G" by eliminating Bid Item No. 5 from the
award of contract.
t4. The City specifically reserves the right to delete construction of
the mezzanine by including deductive Bid Item No. D -1 in the award
of the contract.
5. If the City elects to decrease the number of units to be constructed
under Bid Items 10 or 12; to eliminate the enclosure of 2 bays of
Building "G "; or to eliminate construction of the mezzanine from the
contract, the resolution awarding the contract will
so state.
IV. LOW BID
A. The complete project consists of constructing all work listed in Items
1 -13, inclusive, of the Proposal. Each bidder must include a price for
each and every one of the items listed in the Proposal, including the
deductive Bid Item No. D -1.
B. The total price bid for Items 1 -13, inclusive, of the proposal shall be
used for the purpose of determining the lowest bid.
' V. TIME OF CONTRACT
' The date of the contract is the date the contract is awarded by the City
Council.
VI. PERIOD OF FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
The faithful performance bond for the contract shall remain in effect for the
duration of the one (1) year guarantee period measured from the date of
acceptance of the work by the City Council.
f
• • SP4of9
fVII. LIABILITY INSURANCE
Upon execution of the contract, the Contractor shall provide certificate of
insurance showing that he has liability insurance coverage. At the same
time, the Contractor shall provide the insurance endorsements on the forms
provided as part of the contract documents. The liability insurance coverage
shall include each of the following types of insurance.
A. General Liability
1. Comprehensive Form
2. Premises - Operations
3. Explosion and Collapse Hazard
4. Underground Hazard
5. Products /Completed Operations Hazard
6. Contractual insurance
7. Broad Form Property Damage
8. Independent Contractors
9. Personal Injury
B. Automobile Liability
1. Comprehensive Form
2. Owned
3. Hired
4. Non -owned
VIII. GUARANTEES
Besides guarantees required elsewhere, the Contractor shall and hereby does
guarantee all work for a period of one (1) year after the date of acceptance
of the work by the City, and shall repair and replace any and all such work,
together with any other work which may be displaced in so doing, that may
prove defective in workmanship and /or materials within the one (1) -year
period from date of acceptance, without any expense whatsoever to the City,
ordinary wear and tear and usual abuse or neglect excepted. In the event of
failure to comply with the above - mentioned conditions within a week after
being notified in writing, the City is hereby authorized to proceed to have
the defects repaired and made good at the expense of the Contractor, who
hereby agrees to pay the cost and charges therefor immediately on demand.
IX. SAFETY
In accordance with generally accepted construction practices, the Contractor
shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site,
including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work,
and the Contractor shall fully comply with all state, federal and other laws,
rules, regulations, and orders relating to safety of the public and workers.
The Contractor shall have at the work site copies or suitable extracts of
Construction Safety Orders and General Industrial Safety.
I
I
• • SP5of9
i
X. PAYMENT
A. General
1. The work to be done under this contract includes furnishing all
labor, equipment, transportation, materials, and services necessary
1
to complete the construction as shown on the plans and described in
the specifications.
2. The lump sum prices bid for construction shall be considered as full
compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, services, and all
other things necessary to complete the work in place, and no addi-
tional allowance will be made therefor.
3. Payment for all items of work not separately provided for in the
Proposal shall be included in the prices bid for other items of work
listed in the Proposal.
B. Monthly Progress Payments
The City will make monthly progress payments for work completed per
Section 9 of the Standard Specifications. For purposes of making
progress payments, the City's estimates of the amount of work completed
will be used.
C. Individual Pay Items
I
1. Bid Item No. 1. The lump sum price to be paid to provide construc-
tion staking and layout includes payment for furnishing horizontal
and vertical control for construction of the warehouse building, wash
rack improvements, utilities locations, curbs, gutters, sidewalk,
driveway approaches, ramp, stairways, asphalt, concrete pavement, and
any other miscellaneous item of work.
2. Bid Item No. 2. The lump sum price to be paid to relocate gas meter
and gas lines includes payment for arranging with the gas company to
'
relocate the existing gas meter; for paying the gas company an esti-
mated charge of $820.55 to move the existing meter; and for recon-
necting the relocated gas meter to the Corporation Yard gas
distribution system including furnishing and installing pipes and
fittings, trench backfill, and 3 inches of asphalt concrete pavement
over 6 inches of imported aggregate base over trenches.
3. Bid Item No. 3. The lump sum price to be paid to relocate a 4 -inch
domestic water service includes payment for relocating the existing
4 -inch domestic water service; furnishing and installing a new
concrete vault and cover; all pipe, fittings, valves, and thrust
blocks necessary to relocate the water service; and 3 inches of
asphalt concrete pavement over 6 inches imported aggregate base over
trenches.
I
1 • • SP6of9
LJ
I
I
11
i
I
LJ
6. Bid Item No. 6. The lump sum price to be paid to demolish the
existing warehouse includes payment for demolishing the attached
loading dock, office annex, foundations, trees, shrubbery, and
miscellaneous concrete curbs, slabs or pavement necessary in order to
construct the new warehouse and site improvements adjacent to the new
warehouse.
7. Bid Item No. 7. The lump sum price.to be paid for miscellaneous
emo d— ition and rough grading includes payment for removing any pave-
ment, concrete, or other miscellaneous improvement necessary to
complete the project, but which is not included in the lump sum price
to be paid for demolishing the existing warehouse.
8. Bid Item No. 8. The lump sum price to be paid to construct a new
warehouse building includes payment for:
a. Paying for the design and obtaining approval from the Building
Department of plans for a pre- engineered light - weight metal
building.
b. Furnishing and constructing a light- weight insulated metal
building, complete in place, including foundation, mezzanine,
interior partitions, mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems,
loading dock, dock leveller, lift, and all equipment and fit-
tings inside and adjacent to the building.
c. Exterior construction outside of the building, including curb,
gutter and sidewalk around the building, four feet wide P.C.C.
valley gutter crossing the roadway east of the warehouse
building; ramps and stairways, slab for the loading dock, pull
boxes adjacent to the building, and any other item of work
necessary to complete the work adjacent to the building.
d. The cost of any imported aggregate base used under the building
or under the concrete adjacent to the building shall be con-
sidered part of the lump sum price paid for Bid Item No. 8.
9. Bid Item No. 9.
a. The lump sum price to be paid to modify the wash rack and
construct a roof over the wash rack shall include payment for
sawcutting, removing slabs, replacing slab and wash rack drain,
4. Bid Item No. 4. The lump sum price to
be paid to construct new
water
lines includes payment for furnishing
tings, valves, valve covers, thrust blocks,
and installing all pipe,
trenching, trench
fit-
back -
fill, and 3 inches of asphalt concrete
pavement over 6 inches
of
aggregate base over trenches necessary
to complete the work.
5. Bid Item No. 5. The lump sum price to
be paid for enclosing
two bays
of Building "G" for interim warehouse
use shall include full
payment
for enclosing the westerly 60 feet of
Building "G" with 2 x 6
stud
'
walls, 3/8 inch exterior grade plywood
on the exterior; plus
two
5'0" x 10'0" -high exterior doors with
door knobs, hasps, and
hard-
ware; and all other miscellaneous items
necessary to complete
the
work.
LJ
I
I
11
i
I
LJ
6. Bid Item No. 6. The lump sum price to be paid to demolish the
existing warehouse includes payment for demolishing the attached
loading dock, office annex, foundations, trees, shrubbery, and
miscellaneous concrete curbs, slabs or pavement necessary in order to
construct the new warehouse and site improvements adjacent to the new
warehouse.
7. Bid Item No. 7. The lump sum price.to be paid for miscellaneous
emo d— ition and rough grading includes payment for removing any pave-
ment, concrete, or other miscellaneous improvement necessary to
complete the project, but which is not included in the lump sum price
to be paid for demolishing the existing warehouse.
8. Bid Item No. 8. The lump sum price to be paid to construct a new
warehouse building includes payment for:
a. Paying for the design and obtaining approval from the Building
Department of plans for a pre- engineered light - weight metal
building.
b. Furnishing and constructing a light- weight insulated metal
building, complete in place, including foundation, mezzanine,
interior partitions, mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems,
loading dock, dock leveller, lift, and all equipment and fit-
tings inside and adjacent to the building.
c. Exterior construction outside of the building, including curb,
gutter and sidewalk around the building, four feet wide P.C.C.
valley gutter crossing the roadway east of the warehouse
building; ramps and stairways, slab for the loading dock, pull
boxes adjacent to the building, and any other item of work
necessary to complete the work adjacent to the building.
d. The cost of any imported aggregate base used under the building
or under the concrete adjacent to the building shall be con-
sidered part of the lump sum price paid for Bid Item No. 8.
9. Bid Item No. 9.
a. The lump sum price to be paid to modify the wash rack and
construct a roof over the wash rack shall include payment for
sawcutting, removing slabs, replacing slab and wash rack drain,
• • SP7of9
re -using an existing manhole frame and cover, constructing the
roof including foundation and columns; constructing a Portland
cement concrete pad for a steam cleaner; constructing a slab over
the clarifier including new manhole frames and covers; and
adjusting edges of concrete slabs to grade with asphalt concrete
' join strips.
b. Compensation for any imported aggegate base used underneath
' concrete foundations and slabs or as backfill around the wash
rack drain shall be considered as part of the lump sum price paid
for Bid Item No. 9.
10. Bid Item No. 10.
a. The unit price to be paid to furnish and construct imported
aggregate base includes compensation for furnishing and
installing imported aggregate base underneath permanent asphalt
concrete pavement and P.C.C. gutters that are not part of the
warehouse or the wash rack construction.
b. Compensation for furnishing and constructing imported aggregate
base underneath the warehouse, and the site improvements
surrounding the warehouse shall be considered part of the lump
sum price paid to construct the warehouse.
c. Compensation for furnishing and constructing imported aggregate
base underneath the wash rack; wash rack drain, and attached
slabs shall be considered part of the lump sum price paid to
modify the wash rack and construct a roof over it.
11. Deductive Bid Item No. D -1
The work to be eliminated from the project if the City elects to
include Deductive Bid Item No. D -1 in the award of the contract
includes the mezzanine floor and supporting columns, the unit heater,
' the lights underneath the mezzanine, the stairway, and the
1,000 -pound lift. The foundation system will not be changed. The
pit for the 1,000 -pound lift will be constructed per plans and then
filled with Portland cement concrete.
XI. MATERIALS
A. Materials for the warehouse and the wash rack roof structure shall be as
specifed in the architectural specifications.
B. Materials and methods of construction for site work, including asphalt
concrete pavement, portland cement concrete curbs, gutters, sidewalks,
driveway approaches, slabs, drainage improvements, and site utilities
relocation shall be as specified in Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction.
1. Portland cement concrete including pavement, slabs, curbs, and gut -
ters: Class 520 -C -2500, 4 inches maximum slump.
f
i
1 • • SP8of9
2. Asphalt concrete pavement:
a. For top 1 inch of pavement, Type C2 -AR -4000.
b. For all other A.C. pavement, Type B2 -AR -4000.
3. Light gage metal for wash rack roof
a. Light gage steel shall be galvanized steel conforming to AISI
Specifications, ASTM A- 446 -75, Grade N -1.
b. Fasteners for light gage steel shall be No. 14 cadmium - plated,
self - tapping sheet metal screws with neoprene washers, 12 inches
center -to- center minimum spacing.
' c. All exposed steel surfaces except galvanized metal deck shall be
coated with one coat of metal primer and two coats of semi -gloss
enamel.
XII. FIELD ENGINEERING
A. General
1. The Contractor shall lay out the work from the drawings, the bench
marks and the column lines established by City, and shall establish
' all additional bench marks, monuments, lines and levels necessary for
the construction covered by this contract.
2. To lay out the work and to verify lines and elevations as the work
progresses, the Contractor shall employ an experienced and competent
Civil Engineer of Land Surveyor registered in the State of
California.
B. Survey Control Data
At locations shown on the drawings, coordinated control points and bench-
marks have been established by City at no cost to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall protect and preserve the bench markers and reference
points. Any costs in connection with resetting and /or reestablishing
bench marks shall be borne by the Contractor.
XIII, INSPECTION
The City will inspect all work. All items covered or all stages of work that
are not to remain observable must be inspected and approved before being
covered up. The Contractor shall provide timely notice to the City when such
inspection is needed.
XIV. SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Because of crowded working conditions and the need to maintain the
Corporation Yard in continuous operation, the contract work must be
constructed in stages. A general description of the phases are as
follows:
I
r
I
I
L
,1
r
I
�r
• • SP 9 of 9�
Phase 1 (5 weeks)
a. Execute contract documents (Contractor and City)
b. Rearrange site utilites (Contractor)
c. Prepare plans for steel building and obtain building permits
(Contractor)
d. Construct permanent pavement (Contractor)
Phase 2 (3 weeks)
a. Enclose westerly 2 bays of Building "G" for interim use as a
warehouse. (The enclosure of 2 bays of Building "G" shall not
commence until the lower parking lot is completed and in
service.)
Phase 3 (4 weeks)
a. Move warehousing division to Building "G" (City)
Phase 4 (16 weeks)
a. Construct warehouse (Contractor)
b. Modify wash rack and construct roof (Contractor)
Phase 5 (2 weeks)
a. Final cleanup (Contractor)
B. After acceptance of the work, the City will move into the new warehouse
and remove the temporary enclosure of Building "G ".
XV. CONTRACTOR'S STAGING AREA
During construction the Contractor may use the area between the new warehouse
and the masonry wall east of the Administration Building.
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION
YARD
CONTRACT NO. 2478
'
INDEX
DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
'
Section 01040 - Project Coordination
1
- 4
01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
1
- 4
01400 - Quality Control
1
- 5
01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
1
- 7
01720 - Project Record Documents
1
- 2
01730 Operations Maintenance Data
1
Only
- and
'
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
Section 02060 - Demolition
1
- 2
02200 - Earth Work
1
- 12
• '
02360 - Driven Piles
1
- 9
02513 - Asphalt Concrete Paving
1
- 6
'
02514 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving
1
- 7
'
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03310 - Concrete Work
1
- 11
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
'
Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Units
1
- 3
i
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
06190 - Prefabricated Wood Trusses
06200 - Finish Carpentry
06400 - Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07200 - Insulation
07900 - Sealants
DIVISION 8 -
Section 08210
08330
08700
08800
08905
ORS AND WINDOWS
Wood Doors
Overhead Coiling Doors
Finish Hardware
Glass and Glazing
Window Wall System- Prefinished
Steel
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall
09660 - Resilient Flooring
09900 - Painting
09950 - Wall Coverings
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10601 - Wire Mesh Partitions
10800 - Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
Section 11160 - Loading Dock Equipment
[Slag �.
1 - 6
1 - 3
1 - 4
1 - 5
1 - 2
1 - 5
1 - 4
1 - 5
1 - 7
1 - 5
1 - 4
1 - 5
1 - 5
1 - 9
1 - 2
1 - 3
1 - 3
1 - 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2 of 3
i
i
1
i
r
'i
r
I
4,
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3 of 3
Pages
DIVISION
13 -
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
- Pre- Engineered Building
1
- 13
Section
13120
DIVISION
14 -
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Section
14430
- Vertical Lift
1
- 5
DIVISION
15 -
MECHANICAL
- Plumbing
1
- 14
Section
15400
15800
- Heating, Ventilation and
Air
Conditioning
1
- 10
DIVISION
16 -
ELECTRICAL
Section
16000
- Electrical
1
- 20
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3 of 3
• • r
PART 1 - GENERAL M
1.01 GENERAL: '
The Standard Specifications of the City of Newport Beach
shall govern contractural relationships between the parties
to this contract.
The parties to this contract are the City of Newport Beach
and the Contractor. '
1.02 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT:
The Public Works Director of the City of Newport Beach ,
shall administer this contract for the City.
Any change orger issued to the Contractor must be in
writing and signed by the Public Works Director.
1.03 PAYMENT OF FEES: '
Included in the scope of the contract is the payment of all
fees and the securing of all permits normally charged by ,
governing public agencies; the payment of all connection
charges normally charged by serving utilities; and the
furnishing of all material, labor, and transportaiton
necessary to complete the construction, except that the
following fees normally charged by the City of Newport
Beach will be waived:
1. Building excise tax fees. '
2. Building and plan check fees normally charged for ,
the account of the General Fund, including
plumbing, electrical drywall, and plastering
permits.
All other fees normally charged by the City and Utility
Companies must be paid by the Contractor. Included among
fees that must be paid are:
1. Business license fees.
2. So. Calif. Gas Company relocation fee. '
Lj
00800 '
Page 1 of 4
Y
I
•
•
The date of the contract is the date the contract is
awarded by the City Council.
The Contractor must execute the contract and return it to
the City within twenty (20) calendar days after award of
the contract by the City.
' All work must be completed within two hundred ten (210)
consecutive calendar days after award of the contract by
the City Council.
1.05 LIABILITY INSURANCE:
Upon execution of the contract, the Contractor shall
provide a certificate(s) of insurance showing that he has
liability insurance coverage. At the same time, the
contractor shall provide the insurance endorsements on the
forms provided as part of the contract documents.
The liability insurance coverage shall include each of the
following types of insurance:
A. General Liability
1. Comprehensive Form
2. Premises- Operations
3. Explosion and Collapse Hazard
4. Underground Hazard
5. Products /Completed Operations Hazard
6. Contractual Insurance
' 7. Broad Form Property Damage
8. Independent Contractors
9. Personal Injury
' B. _Automobile Liahil_ity
I. Comprehensive Form
' 2. Owned
3. Hired
4. Non -Owned
' 1.06 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL:
I
1 5
At all times during the project, the buildings and site
shall be kept clean. All dirt, waste and rubbish shall
be removed frequently and not allowed to accumulate.
00800
Page 2 of 4
• •
B. Final Cleanup 1
In addition to keeping the building and site clean '
during construction, the Contractor must thoroughly
clean the inside of the building, including fixtures,
equipment, hardware, walls, ceilings, and doors. This
shall include thorough cleaning of window and opening '
ledges and sills, horizontal projecitons, exterior
steps and platforms, and other surfaces. Dust, dirt,
stains, handmarks, paint spots, plaster droppings, or
other foreign material shall be completely removed from ,
the surfaces.
C. Disposal ,
Under no circumstances shall rubbish or waste material
of any description be disposed of on the site. All
debris, rubbish, and waste or surplus material shall be
removed from the site.
Particular care shall be taken by the Contractor to see,
that no dumping or spillage of concrete, plaster, oil,
gas, cleaning fluids or other deleterious matter is ,
permitted in areas to be painted or where such matter
may drain or be carried into planting areas. Any soil
so contaminated shall be removed and replaced with
approved soil, compacted as required, at the ,
Contractor's expense.
1.07 GUARANTEES: '
Besides guarantees required elsewhere, the Contractor shall
and hereby does guarantee all work for a period of one (1) '
year after the date of acceptance of the work by the City
and shall repair and replace any and all such work,
together with any other work which may be displaced in so
doing, that may prove defective in workmanship and /or ,
materials within the (1) -year period from date of
acceptance, without any expense whatsoever to the City,
ordinary wear and tear and usual abuse or neglect excepted. ,
In the event of failure to comply with the above mentioned
conditions within a week after being notified in writing,
the City is hereby authorized to proceed to have the ,
defects repaired and made good at the expense of the
Contractor, who hereby agrees to pay the cost and charges
therefor immediately on demand.
1
00800
Page 3 of 4
�O '
1.08
1.09
1
7
In accordance with general accepted construction practices,
the Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible
for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all
persons and property during performance of the work, and
the Contractor shall fully comply with all state, federal
and other lawsr rules, regulations and orders relating to
safety of the public and workers.
The Contractor shall
suitable extracts of
Industrial Safety.
PAYMENT:
A. General
have at the worksite copies or
Construction Safety Orders and General
1. The work to be done under this contract includes
furnishing all labor, equipment, transportation,
materials, and services necessary to complete the
construction as shown on the plans and described in
the specifications, complete in place.
2. The lump sum prices bid for construction shall be
considered as full compensation for all labor,
equipment, materials, services, and all other
things necessary to complete the work in place, and
no additional allowance will be made therefor.
3. Payment for all items of work not separately
provided for in the proposal shall be included in
the lump sum price bid for construction of a new
warehouse.
v • ,
The City will make monthly progress payments for work
completed per Section 9 of the Standard Specificaitons.
For purposes of making progress payments, the City's
estimates of the amount of work completed will be used.
END OF SECTION 00800
00800
Page 4 of 4
• 1 1
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK I
PART 1 - GENERAL 1
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
,
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
,
1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A. Work in this contract covers demolition of existing
warehouse structure, foundations, paving and utilities.
Construction of a new warehouse (pre - engineered
building), foundations, paving, and utilities. Project
is located at 592 Superior Avenue, Newport Beach, CA.
B. Contractor's Duties:
r
1. Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for:
'
a. Labor, materials, and equipment.
b. Tools, construction equipment, and machinery.
c. Telephones.
d. Other facilities and services necessary for
proper execution and completion of work.
2. Secure and pay for as necessary for proper
execution and completion of work, as are applicable
at time of receipt of bids, all permits, government
fees, and licenses.
3. Give required notices.
4. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations,
orders, and other legal requirements of public
authorities which bear on performance of work.
5. Enforce strict discipline and good order among
employees. Do not employ on work persons unfit for
work assigned.
1.03 �l]j�TRACTS
Construct work under single lump -sum contract.
t
r'
01010
Page 1 of 3
9
01010
Page 2 of 3
1 g
1.04 CONTRACTOR
USE OF PREMISES:
A.
Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or
equipment.
B.
Do not load structure with weight that will endanger
structure.
C.
Assume full responsibility for protection and
'
safekeeping of products stored on premises.
D.
Move any stored products which interfere with
operations of Owner.
E.
Obtain and pay for use of additional storage, work
area, or parking needed for operations or employees.
F.
Use of Site: Exclusive and complete, for execution of
work, except:
1. Allow Owner access to maintain and operate other
existing facilities.
'
2. Permit unimpeded access by fire fighting or rescue
equipment.
3. Access to and egress from construction site shall
be in strict conformance to prearranged routes
approved by the Owner, with the understanding that
curtailment of traffic or revision of access routes
may be required on short notice if operations
mandate such changes because of excessive noise, or
problems with safety, service, or supply.
1.05 INTERRUPTION
OF SERVICES:
A.
Requests for supply or shutdown, power outages and
utility shutdowns shall be made to the Owner in writing
one (1) week before the proposed time. Actual down
time shall be held to a minimum.
B.
Cutoff of services shall be done as directed by the
Owner in all cases, after it has been ascertained that
'
the Contractor has the materials, manpower, and
equipment to complete the work within a minimum of
delay.
'
01010
Page 2 of 3
1 g
• •
,
C. Owner may require that any system and utility
shutdowns, power outages and interruption of services
by performed on weekends or off hours, with no increase
'
in contract costs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- Not Applicable.
,
PART 3 - EXECUTION -- Not Applicable.
,
01010
1
END OF SECTION
1
01010
Page 3 of 3
'
�p
, I
1 • •
1.01
' 1.02
1
1.03
1
116AIJ -4-'-
Drawings and general provisions of
General Conditions and Division -1
apply to work of this section.
Contract, including
Specification sections,
A. The Contractor shall employ for the life of the
Contract, a Superintendent of construction who shall
spend full time coordinating the work of the various
trades including structural, mechanical, and electrical
work.
B. The Contractor's Superintendent shall bring into order
and relate the work to avoid interference or delay;
establish and preserve clearances between related parts
of the work; and maintain compliance with the drawings
and the requirements of the specifications.
C. Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements
necessary for coordination of work on the project
include but are not necessarily limited to the
following:
Coordination and meetings.
General installation provisions.
Cleaning and protection.
C0 0 *1403VIN0991M.10
A. General: Prepare a written memorandum on required
coordination activities. Include such items as
required notices, reports and attendance at meetings.
Distribute this memorandum to each entity performing
work at the project site. Prepare similar memorandum
for separate contractors where interfacing of their
work is required.
B. Coordination Drawings; Prepare coordination drawings
where work by separate entities requires that materials
must accurately interface. Coordination drawings shall
indicate how work shown by separate shop drawings will
interface, and shall indicate sequence for
installation. Comply with all requirements of the
"Submittals" section.
01040
Page 1 of 4
) o�
i •
1. Interface of mechanical, plumbing and electrical in
,
the first floor corridors, i.e. ductowrk, piping,
bus ducts, lighting and cable trays.
'
C. Coordination Meetings: Hold general project
'
coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times
convenient for all parties involved. These meetings
'
are in addition to specific meetings held for other
purposes, such as regular project meetings and special
,
preinstallation meetings. Request representation at
each meeting by every party currently involved in
,
coordination or planning for the work of the entire
'
project. Conduct meetings in a manner which will
resolve coordination problems. Record results of the
,
meeting and distribute copies to everyone in attendance
'
and to others affected by decisions or actions
resulting from each meeting.
'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS:
'
A. PrA- Installation Conferences% Hold a pre - installation
meeting at the project site well before installation of
each unit of work which requires coordination with
other work. Installer and representatives of the
,
manufacturers and fabricators who are involved in or
affected by that unit of work, and with its
coordination or integration with other work that has
'
preceded or will follow shall attend this meeting.
Advise the Owner of scheduled meeting dates.
'
At each meeting review progress of other work and
preparations for the particular work under
consideration.
'
Record significant discussions of each conference, and
record agreements and disagreements, along with the
final plan of action. Distribute the record of meeting
promptly to everyone concerned, including the Owner.
Do not proceed with the work if the pre - installation '
conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments
to performance of the work and reconvene '
pre - installation conference at the earliest feasible
date.
01040 ,
Page 2 of 4
C
manner acceptable to the Installer.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations
'
B. Installer's
Inspection of Conditions:
Require the
manufacturer's applicable instructions and
Installer of
each major unit of work
to inspect the
substrate to
receive work and conditions
under which
'
the work is
to be performed. The Installer
shall
report all unsatisfactory
conditions
in writing to the
Contractor.
Do not proceed with the
work until
unsatisfactory
conditions have been
corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Installer.
01040
Page 3 of 4
1 13
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations
'
include manufactured products, comply with the
manufacturer's applicable instructions and
'
recommendations for installation, to the extent that
these instructions and recommendations are more
explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated
in the contract documents.
D.
Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately
prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective
titems.
E.
Provide attachment and connection devices and methods
'
for securing work. Secure work true to line and level,
and within recognized industry tolerances. Allow
expansion and building movement. Provide uniform joint
width in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work
to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable
'
visual- effect choices to the Owner for final decision.
F.
Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an
'
integral step of starting each installation.
G.
Install each unit -of -work during weather conditions and
project status which will ensure the best possible
results in coordination with the entire work. Isolate
each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary
to prevent deterioration.
H.
Coordinate enclosure of the work with required
inspections and tests, so as to minimize the necessity
'
of uncovering work for that purpose.
I.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not
indicated, mount individual units of work at industry
recognized standard mounting heights for the particular
application indicated. Refer questionable mounting
'
height choices to the Owner for final decision.
01040
Page 3 of 4
1 13
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION; '
A. General: During handling and installation of work at '
the project site, clean and protect work in progress
and adjoining work on the basis of continuous
maintenance. Apply protective covering on installed
work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage '
or deterioration at time of substantial completion. ,
Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as ,
frequently as necessary through the remainder of the
construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging ,
effects.
B. Limiting
Exposures of Work: To the extent possible
through
reasonable control and protection
methods,
supervise
performance of the work in such
a manner and
'
by such
means which will ensure that none
of the work,
whether
completed or in progress, will be
subjected to
'
harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
1
END OF SECTION 01040 ,
11
01040 ,
Page 4 of 4
iq 1
' • •
1 SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING
1 1.01
1.04 MONUMENT SETTING:
The Contractor shall furnish and set monuments at the
locations shown on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- Not Applicable.
' PART 3 - EXECUTION -- Not Applicable.
END OF SECTION 01050
01050
Page 1 of 1
1 1s
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Contractor shall lay out the work from the
drawings, the bench marks and the column lines
established by the Owner, and shall establish all
additional bench marks, monuments, lines, and levels
necessary for the construction covered by this
Contract.
B. To lay out the work and to verify lines and elevations
as the work progresses, the Contractor shall employ an
experienced and competent Civil Engineer or Land
Surveyor registered in the State of California.
1.03 SURVEY CONTROL DATA;
At locations shown on the drawings coordinated control
points and bench marks have been established by the Owner
1
at no cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall protect
and preserve the bench markers and reference points. Any
costs in connection with resetting and /or reestablishing
bench marks shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.04 MONUMENT SETTING:
The Contractor shall furnish and set monuments at the
locations shown on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- Not Applicable.
' PART 3 - EXECUTION -- Not Applicable.
END OF SECTION 01050
01050
Page 1 of 1
1 1s
• ,
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: ,
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including ,
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REOUIREMENTS:
A. Submit for review of Architect shop drawings, product
data, and samples required by specification sections.
(See also Article 27 - General Conditions.)
B. Prepare and submit, with Construction Schedule, a
separate schedule listing dates for submission and
dates reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples
will be needed for each product.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS: ,
A. The requirements of the article on shop drawings in the
General Conditions of the contract shall include the
following additional requirements.
1. Transmittals: Submittal of shop drawings to the
Architect shall be made by the Contractor with a
dated transmittal form or letter; (not by
subcontractor or suppliers) at least 15 days before
dates reviewed submittals will be needed.
2. Transparency and Method of Review: With initial
submittal of two copies, include an ozalid
transparency of the shop drawings. Comments will
be noted on the transparency and returned to the
Contractor, who shall revise the original and
resubmit in the same manner. When reviewed, the
transparency will be stamped and returned to the
Contractor, who shall make distribution of copies ,
as specified hereinafter.
3. Information Copy: For each submittal and
resubmittal, deliver one copy of shop drawings and '
a copy of the letter of transmittal therefore to
the Owner for information, at same time as
Architect's copy.
11
01340
Page 1 of 4
�� 1
01340
Page 2 of 4
17
4. Number of Copies: Contractor shall submit copies
and make distribution as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Transparency and two copies
to the Architect, one copy to the Owner.
b. Resubmittals: Transparency of revised original
and two copies to the Architect; one copy to
the Owner.
c. Final Distribution: Two copies to the
Architect, two copies to the Owner, and copies
'
to those concerned.
B. Additional Requirements for Shop Drawings and
Schedules:
1. Drawings and schedules shall be certified by the
Contractor that they have been checked by him and
conform to the Contract requirements.
2. No changes are to be made to resubmitted drawings
and schedules in excess of those corrections noted
by the Architect unless the resubmitted drawings
•
are accompanied by a separate written notice from
-
the Contractor precisely setting forth such
additional changes and stating his assumption of
costs as specified for deviations; and /or such
changes as are reviewed by the Architect.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA:
A. A bound list of products is to be used in the work
shall be submitted according to the following
procedure:
1. within 35 days after agreement between Owner and
Contractor is recorded, submit bound copies, 2
copies to the Architect and 1 copy to the Owner.
2. The Architect will notify the Contractor in writing
of any disapproved items. within 15 days after
receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall submit
proposed substitutions for disapproved items,
number of copies, and distribution the same as
initial submittal for each resubmittal until
approval is obtained for proposed substitutions.
01340
Page 2 of 4
17
• • ,
i8 1
Resubmittals need not be bound, but the transmittal
shall identify each disapproved item and the
proposed substitute therefor. The Architect will
notify the Contractor in writing of approved
substitutions.
5. The Contractor shall provide those items included
'
in the approved lists, without deviation, unless
subsequently revised by change order procedure.
B. The items shall be submitted in the following manner:
1. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings:
a. Modify drawings to delete information which is
not applicable to project.
b. Supplement standard information to provide
additional information applicable to project.
2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams,
schedules, performance charts, illustrations, and
other standard descriptive data.
,
a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent
materials, products, or models.
b. Show dimensions and clearances required.
c. Show performance characteristics and
,
capacities.
d. Show wiring diagrams and controls.
3. All items shall be neatly bound in a loose -leaf
binder with a proper project identification label
and a table of contents.
1.05 SAMPLES:
Submittal of samples, where specified or directed, shall be
made by the Contractor with a dated transmittal form or
letter, and not by subcontractor or suppliers. Samples of
manufactured or process materials and equipment will be
submitted within 15 -days after receipt of reviewed material
list. Samples of field applied paint materials and colors
shall be submitted not less than 30 days prior to start of
field painting work. Unless otherwise specified, samples
shall be submitted in triplicate; two to the Architect and
one to the Owner with copy of letter of transmittal.
01340
Page 3 of 4
,
i8 1
1
� �
A. Label or tag each sample or set of samples identifying
the manufacturer's name and address, brand name,.
'
catalog number, project title, and intended use.
B. For items required to be of selected and reviewed
colors, patterns, textures or other finish sufficient
samples to show the range of shades, tones, values,
patterns, textures, or other features corresponding to
the instructions, shall be submitted. Submit color
samples of field - applied paint materials as specified
for painting work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- Not Applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION -- Not Applicable.
END OF SECTION 01340
1
i
I
1
P
[1
I
' 01340
Page 4 of 4
11 1 C1
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL 1
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS; 1
Drawings
and general provisions of Contract, including
General
Conditions and other Division -1 Specification
sections,
apply to work of this section. In the event of
conflict
between this section and General Conditions,
General
Conditions shall govern.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
This Section
covers general requirements for quality
1
control
of the Work, including testing and inspection
procedures.
A. Recru
This
rements In Section:
1.
Testing laboratory or agency.
,
2.
Geotechnical (Soils or Foundation) Engineer.
3.
Coordination of tests and inspections.
4.
Test costs and reports.
,
5.
inspections, continuous and special, and inspection
costs.
6. Contractor- furnished assistance.
7. Verification of conditions.
B. Requirements Not In This Section:
1. Specific test procedures to be performed in
accordance with this Section.
2. Testing of mechanical and electrical work. ,
3. Testing of conveying systems.
4. Testing of materials specified to be tested by ,
other agencies under other Sections.
I
01400 '
Page 1 of 5
'20 1
• •
1.03 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS:
A. General Teat Requirements: Materials to be furnished
under the Contract are subject to testing and inspection
for compliance with requirements of Drawings and
Specifications.
B. Testing Laboratory or Agency shall be the licensed
Testing Laboratory or Agency meeting requirements of
ASTM D3666, E329, E543, and E548 as applicable to the
Work and approved by the Owner, and referred to here-
after as the Testing Laboratory. Perform all testing
under supervision and control of a California registered
professional engineer employed by the Testing Laboratory.
1 C. Geotechnical Engineer will be the registered profes-
sional Geotechnical Engineer employed and paid by
Owner.
D. Disqualified Material: Any material shipped or
delivered to the site by the Contractor from the source of
supply prior to having satisfactorily passed the required
testing and inspection, or prior to the receipt of a notice
from the Architect that such testing and inspection will
not be required, shall not be incorporated in the Work.
' 1.04 COORDINATION OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:
Contractor shall initiate and coordinate testing and
inspections required by Contract Documents and public
authorities having jurisdiction of the Work.
Notification: Contractor shall notify the Owner a
sufficient time in advance of the manufacture of material
to be supplied by him which, by requirements of the Con-
tract Documents, must be tested at the source of supply in
order that the Owner may arrange for the testing.
1.05 TEST SAMPLES AND PROCEDURES:
A. Test Samples: Furnish and deliver Samples of materials
to be tested at no extra cost to Owner. Test samples
will be selected by the Architect, Inspector, or
Testing Laboratory and not by the Contractor.
01400
Page 2 of 5
B. Test Procedures:
Testing
Laboratory shall perform
'
tests according
to ASTM or
other methods of test
specified for the
various
materials under other Sections.
If no procedure
shall conform to
or test method
material
is specified, testing
specification referenced
01400
Page 2 of 5
1.06
,2.;.
• • 1
unless otherwise directed by Owner. The Testing
Laboratory shall tag, seal, label, record, or otherwise
suitably identify the materials for testing and no such
materials shall be used in the Work until the test
result reports are submitted and approved, excepting
only the materials specified to be placed or installed
prior to testing.
C.
Test Repeating: Repeat applicable tests at specified
intervals, whenever the source of supply is changed, or
whenever the characteristics of the materials change or
vary in the opinion of Owner.
D.
Test Costs; Owner will pay for testing performed by
Testing Laboratory except Contractor shall reimburse
the Owner for retesting costs caused by failure of
materials to pass initial tests. Contractor shall
arrange and pay for all the concrete mix designs and
for materials conformance testing.
E.
Test Reports: Furnish copies of each test result
report, signed and certified by the Testing Laboratory
supervising engineer, shall be furnished as follows:
Copies:
Owner 1
e
Contractor 2
Building Department 1
INSPECTIONS,
CONTINUOUS AND SPECIAL:
A. Inspections, continuous and special, shall be performed
by Registered Deputy or Special Inspectors (hereinafter
referred to as the Inspector) as required by the
Contract Documents and Building Code. During course of
Work under inspection, each Inspector shall submit
detailed reports relative to progress and condition of
Work including variances from the Contract Documents,
and stipulating dates, hours, and locations of the
inspections.
B. Inspection Costs: Owner will employ Inspector and pay
for required continuous and special inspections.
C. Reimbursement of Inspection Costs: The Contractor ,
shall reimburse to the Owner all or any part, as the
Owner may deem just and proper, of the actual excessive
inspection costs due to any or all of the following:
01400
Page 3 of 5
1. Contractor's failure to complete the Work within
the Contract Time and any previously authorized
extension thereof.
2. Claims between separate contractors.
3. Covering of any of the Work before the required
observations, inspections or tests are performed.
4. Extra inspections required for Contractor's
correction of defective Work.
5. Overtime costs for acceleration of Work done for
Contractor's convenience.
E. A— n_provals Required by Others: If the laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations, or orders of any public agency
having jurisdiction require any of the Work to be
1 specifically inspected, tested, or approved by some
authority other than the Owner, Architect, or Con-
tractor, the Contractor shall give all required notices
and make all arrangements, shall deliver to the Owner
the certificates of inspection, testing, or appr.oval.of
such public agency, and shall pay all costs therefore
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
1.07 CONTRACTOR- FURNISHED ASSISTANCE:
Whenever requested, Contractor shall furnish access,
facilities, and labor assistance as necessary for duties to
be performed at the site by Testing Laboratory and Inspec-
tor including furnishing ladders, hoisting, temporary
lighting and water supply, and like services.
11PUTIMMATUTCON 0 EIRK01 •u• •�
Prior to installation of any portion of the Work, the
installing Contractor, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor
shall arrange for correction of defects in existing work-
manship, material, or conditions that may adversely affect
the Work to be installed. Installation of materials on
Work in place constitutes acceptance by the installing
Contractor, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor of such
Work in place as being in proper condition to receive
the materials to be applied and waiver of claim that Work
in place is defective as pertains to warranty requirements,
excluding unascertainable or concealed conditions. Where
the Specifications require a material to be installed under
supervision of the material manufacturer or his representa-
tive, manufacturer or his representative also shall inspect
the Work in place and issue a letter of approval to Owner.
01400
Page 4 of 5
.23
• •
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TEST AND INSPECTIONS: r
Contractor will pay for the following testing and
inspections except as stated otherwise for specific items.
A. Structural Steel:
1. Conformance testing of materials; costs paid by
Contractor.
2. Inspector for high - strength bolting, groove welding,
and field welding.
3. Inspector for shop fabrication of structural steel '
unless shop is approved by the Building Department;
costs paid by Contractor.
4. Inspector to verify grouting under column base.
5. Ultrasonic inspection of groove welds and lamination ,
check of materials.
B, Metal Deckina• ,
1. Inspector for installation and welding.
2. Inspector for shear stud installation.
C. Tests and inspection To Be Paid For By Owner:
Site Work: Tests and inspections by the Soils Engineer
of record for the foundation report.
Foundations, compaction, and fill and backfill ,
inspection and testing, driven precast pile inspection.
END OF SECTION 01400
01400
Page 5 of 5
I
I
• •
f
1 1.01
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Furnish and install all temporary facilities complete
as specified.
B. Comply with all controls as specified.
PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION
.
Provide temporary electric power as necessary for execution
of work. Distribution service point for electric power
will be arranged with utility company, with Owner's final
concurrence. Contractor shall provide submeters, necessary
wiring, switches, receptacles, etc., and make connections
to distribution points.
2.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING:
Provide lighting and outlets in temporary structures and
wherever necessary for proper performance and inspection of
work. If operations are performed during hours of darkness
and whenever natural lighting is deemed insufficient by
Owner, provide adequate floodlights, clusters, and sport
illumination. Make arrangements with subcontractors for
electric services and lighting as necessary in performance
of their work.
2.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION:
A. Provide heat, fuel, and services to protect the work
against injury from dampness and cold until final
acceptance of all work of the Contract.
01500
Page 1 of 7
2
2.04
2.05
2.06
;26
1. For not less than 7 days prior drywall during
application, setting and curing thereof, sufficient
heat to maintain building temperature of not less
than 55 °F while maintaining adequate ventilation
for drying.
2. Before casework is delivered to the building, for
not less than 5 days prior to installing wood
finish, and throughout placing of this finish and
other finishing operations, such as painting and
laying of resilient floor covering sufficient heat
to maintain building temperature at 65 F.
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES:
The Owner will provide and pay for water at existing mains
as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide
meter and service lines to site. Temporary service lines
shall be installed and removed by the Contractor, who shall
pay all charges for making the connections, running the
temporary lines, installing meter, removing same at the
completion of the work, and disconnecting the services.
An approved double check valve shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor at the connection to the main.
All relocations required to clear work of others shall be
,
performed when requested by the Owner. The Owner reserves
the right to make connections to the temporary lines by
themselves or by other Contractors. In the event the
Contractor used the water in a wasteful manner, the
Contractor will be billed Owner's costs for the wasted
water.
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES:
Provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities for
duration of operation. Properly proportion number of
fixtures for number of workers employed, including flushing
water closets, urinals, and wash sinks with cleaning
compound, paper towels in dispensers, and tissue on
holders. Provide weathertight and floored structures as
specified for offices, maintained in clean and sanitary
condition acceptable to Owner. A temporary tie -in to an
existing sewer shall be provided; chemical toilets shall be
used in the interim only.
UTILITY COSTS FOR SUBCONTRACTORS:
Distribution of temporary utility services to
subcontractors shall be Contractor's responsibility and
cost.
01500
Page 2 of 7
I2.07 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
' A. The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to
guard against and eliminate fire hazards and to prevent
damage to construction work, building materials,
equipment, temporary field offices, storage sheds, and
public and private property. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing, maintaining, and enforcing
the following conditions and requirements during the
entire construction period.
1. Fire Inspection. The Contractor's superintendent
shall inspect the entire project at least once each
week to make certain that the conditions and
requirements are being adhered to.
' 2. Bose. The number of outlets, supply of hose, and
proper hose size to protect the construction area
1 shall be determined by the local Fire Marshal and
provided by the Contractor.
3. Fires. Employees shall not be allowed to start
fires with gasoline or kerosene or other highly
flammable materials. No open fires shall be
allowed.
4. Flammable Building Materials. Only a reasonable
working supply of flammable building material shall
be located inside of, or on the roof oft any
storage facilities.
5. Combustible Waste Materials. Oil soaked rags,
papers, and other highly combustible materials must
be stored in closed metal containers at all times
and shall be removed from the site at the close of
each day's work, and more often where necessary,
and placed in metal containers with tight hinged
lids.
6. Gasoline and other flammable or polluting
liquids /materials shall not be poured into sewers,
manholes, or traps, but shall be disposed of,
together with flammable or waste material subject
to spontaneous combustion, in a safe manner meeting
all applicable laws and ordinances. Make
appropriate arrangements for storing these
materials outside of the building.
01500
Page 3 of 7
�7
• •
7. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers during
construction, conveniently located for proper
protection, one fire extinguisher for each 5,000
square feet of floor area or less, but not less
than four extinguishers. Fire extinguishers shall
be ten -pound ABC type. Extinguishers shall meet
approval of Underwriters' Laboratory, and shall be
inspected at regular intervals and recharged as
necessary.
8. Obtain Welding Permit from Owners Office before
doing any welding on project.
B. All self - propelled construction equipment, except light
service trucks, panels, pickups, station wagons,
crawler type cranes, power shovels and draglines,
whether moving alone or in combination, shall be
equipped with a reverse signal alarm (Hub -Cap type).
C. Conduct trenching and excavation operations with
regards to the following:
1. Pursuant to Labor Code 6707, the Contractor shall
include in his base bid all costs incident to the
provision of adequate sheeting, shoring, bracing,
or equivalent method for the protection of life or
limb, which shall conform to applicable Federal and
State safety orders.
2. Before beginning any excavation five feet or more
in depth, the Contractor shall submit to the
owner a detailed plan showing the design of
shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to
be made for worker protection from the hazard of
caving ground during the excavation. The proposed
plan shall comply with the standards established by
the State of California Construction Safety Orders
and Title 24 of the California Administrative Code.
If the detailed plan varies from such shoring
system standards, it shall be prepared by a regis-
tered civil or structural engineer whose name and
registration number shall be indicated on the
drawing. If a dispute arises as to whether the
plan must be prepared by a registered civil or
structural engineer, the engineer's determination
of the matter shall be deemed to have been included
in the amount bid for the work as stated in the
Agreement.
01500
Page 4 of 7
M
Provide and maintain for duration of work, in accordance
with CAL -OSHA and applicable laws and ordinances, all
required temporary standing scaffolding, and temporary
stairs, ladders, ramps, runways and hoists for use of all
trades, unless otherwise specified in Contract Documents.
2.10 TEMPORARY GUARDS, BARRICADES. AND LIGHTS:
Provide construction canopies, barricades, fences, guards,
railings, lights, and warning signs necessary and required
by law, and take necessary precautions required to avoid
injury or damage to any and all persons and property.
01500
Page 5 of 7
d29 .
3. Neither the review nor approval of any plan showing
the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other
provisions of worker protection, shall relieve the
Contractor from his obligation to comply with
Construction Safety Order Standards and Title 24 CAC
for the design and construction of such protective
work, and the Contractor shall indemnify the Owner
and the Architect from any and all claims,
liability, costs, actions, and causes of action
arising out of or related to the failure of such
protective systems. The Contractor shall defend
the Owner, its officers, employees, and agents and
'
the Architect in any litigation or proceeding
brought with respect to the failure of such
protective systems.
2.08 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES:
Prior to starting work, provide and maintain for duration
of operations, in location as directed, separate temporary
office facilities as required for Contractor's,
administration) likewise, all necessary sheds and
facilities for proper storage of tools, materials, and
equipment employed in performance of work. The office
structures shall be conveniently located, substantially and
neatly constructed, weathertight, well lighted, and neatly
painted inside and out. The offices shall be heated and
cooled. They shall have doors which are separately keyed,
two or more windows on opposite sides, and provided with
drinking water and janitor service. The
Owner's /Architect's office shall be equipped with a three
foot wide counter, a minimum of 8 feet long, shall have a
minimum of 16 lineal feet of 2 -foot wide shelving, upon
which to store samples and shall be no less than 400 square
feet in size. Costs of the field offices shall be borne by
1
the Contractor.
2.09 TEMPORARY SCAFFOLDING. STAIRS AND HOISTS:
Provide and maintain for duration of work, in accordance
with CAL -OSHA and applicable laws and ordinances, all
required temporary standing scaffolding, and temporary
stairs, ladders, ramps, runways and hoists for use of all
trades, unless otherwise specified in Contract Documents.
2.10 TEMPORARY GUARDS, BARRICADES. AND LIGHTS:
Provide construction canopies, barricades, fences, guards,
railings, lights, and warning signs necessary and required
by law, and take necessary precautions required to avoid
injury or damage to any and all persons and property.
01500
Page 5 of 7
d29 .
2.11
2.12
30
• •
Provide and /or maintain such protective fences and
barricades as shown on drawings and as Contractor may deem
necessary to protect construction yard, storage areas and
work in place, subject to approval as to type and
appearance. Hogwire fencing is not acceptable. The
Contractor will be responsible for removal of all fences
and barricades upon project completion.
A. The Contractor shall protect all adjacent property,
roads, streets, curbs, shrubbery, lawns, erosion
control materials and planting during construction
operations. All damaged material. shall be replaced
and /or repaired at the expense of the Contractor.
B. It is the intention that, upon completion, the entire
work shall be delivered to the Owner in proper, whole
and unblemished condition.
Parts of work in place that are subject to injury,
because of operations being carried on adjacent
thereto, shall be covered, boarded up, or substantially
enclosed with adequate protection
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing the
overloading of any part of the facilities beyond their
safe calculated carrying capacity by the placing of
materials and /or equipment, tools, machinery, or any
other items thereon.
D. The Owner may provide such watchman services deemed
necessary to protect the Owner's interest, but any
protection so provided by the Owner shall not relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety and
condition of the work and material until the completion
and acceptance thereof. The Contractor shall employ
such watchman services as he may deem necessary to
properly protect and safeguard the work and material.
A. The Contractor shall make his own investigation of the
condition of available public thoroughfares, and of the
clearances, restrictions, bridge load limits, and other
limitations affecting transportation, and shall not load
vehicles beyond the capacity recommended by the
manufacturer of the vehicles or prescribed by any
applicable State or Local Law or regulation.
01500 ,
Page 6 of 7
Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be
permitted to accumulate in excavations or under the
structures. Should such conditions develop or be
encountered, the water or other fluid shall be controlled
and suitable disposed of by means of temporary pumps,
piping, drainage lines and ditches, dams or other methods
approved by the Owner.
2.16 CONTRACTOR PARKING:
Contractor shall not park his equipment nor allow his
1 personnel to park on the site other than in the areas
indicated by the Owner.
2.17 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION:
Remove temporary office facilities, toilets, storage sheds,
fences, and other construction of temporary nature from
site as soon as progress of work permits. Recondition and
restore portions of site occupied by same to a condition
acceptable to Owner.
END OF SECTION 01500
01500
Page 7 of 7
31
2.13 SPECIAL CONTROLS:
A. Use Of Powder- Driven Fasteners: The use of powder set
(cartridge type) anchors or lugs for attaching of any
work is STRICTLY PROHIBITED ON THIS PROJECT unless
approved in writing by Qtr..
B. Use of Explosives: Blasting will not be permitted
unless approved in writing by the Owner.
2.14 DUST CONTROL:
Throughout the entire Contract period, the Contractor shall
effectively dust - palliate the working area, roads, and
storage areas constructed under this Contract, and involved
portions of the site, except during such periods that other
Contractors may be performing work of separate contracts in
these areas. Such application shall consist of
intermittent watering and sprinkling of such frequency as
will satisfactorily allay the dust during all hours that
work is being performed. At no time shall the Contractor
allow water to pond or puddle. Ponds and puddles shall be
removed immediately and steps taken to remove or dry the
mud resulting from the ponds or puddles.
`
2.15 WATER CONTROL:
Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be
permitted to accumulate in excavations or under the
structures. Should such conditions develop or be
encountered, the water or other fluid shall be controlled
and suitable disposed of by means of temporary pumps,
piping, drainage lines and ditches, dams or other methods
approved by the Owner.
2.16 CONTRACTOR PARKING:
Contractor shall not park his equipment nor allow his
1 personnel to park on the site other than in the areas
indicated by the Owner.
2.17 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION:
Remove temporary office facilities, toilets, storage sheds,
fences, and other construction of temporary nature from
site as soon as progress of work permits. Recondition and
restore portions of site occupied by same to a condition
acceptable to Owner.
END OF SECTION 01500
01500
Page 7 of 7
31
• •
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS:
A. Maintain at job site, one copy of:
1. Contract Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Reviewed and Approved Shop and Erection Drawings.
5. Bulletins.
6. Field Orders.
7. Change Orders.
8. Field Test Records.
9. Project Correspondence and Transmittals.
10. Other Like Documents Relevant to the Work.
B. Store documents in temporary field office, apart from
documents used for construction.
C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
D. File documents in accordance with Project Filing Format
of Uniform Construction Index (CSI Standard).
E. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition.
F. Do not: use record documents for construction purposes.
G. Make documents available at all times for inspection.
01720
Page 1 of 2
-3-2-
a 1.03
I
r�
L,
E
I
i
I
1
1
L
I
1
1 33
Record drawings are required for 311 construction.
"As- Builts" and /or record drawings shall conform to the
following requirements:
A. The Contractor shall maintain, and keep up to date, a
complete record set of blue line prints which shall be
corrected daily to show every change from the original
contract drawings. In addition, the prints shall be
marked to show the precise horizontal and vertical
location of concealed work and equipment, including
concealed or embedded piping and conduit. Prints for
this purpose shall be obtained from the Owner at no
cost to the Contractor for original issue. This shall
not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to
make changes in the layout work without definite
instructions in each case.
END OF SECTION 01720
01120
Page 2 of 2
•
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Contractor shall deliver to Owner all manufacturers'
operation and maintenance literature that may accompany any
materials or equipment in proper time for processing and
initial utilization.
END OF SECTION 01730
3y
01730
Page 1 of 1
• •
SECTION 02060 - DEMOLITION
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work specified in this section.
1 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of building demolition work is shown on
drawings.
B. Demoliton of existing A.C. paving shall be coordinated
with City Engineer so as not to impede traffic flow
around site.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Schedule: Submit proposed methods and operations of
demolition to Owner for review prior to start of
work. Include in schedule coordination for shut -off,
capping and continuation of utility services as required.
1. Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and
removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of
Owner's on -site operations.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS:
C'
A. Exnlosivea: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
B. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of
debris to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
C. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around
area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent
injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facili-
ties and persons.
02060
Page 1 of 2
35-
36
• • '
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust,
dirt and debris caused by demolition operations, as
directed by Owner or governing authorities. Return
adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of
work.
B. Demolish building as indicated on drawings and remove
1. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing or
support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse
of adjacent facilities to remain.
D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent
facilities by demolition operations at no cost to
Owner.
E. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities
indicated to remain, keep in service and protect
against damage during demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving
occupied or used facilities, except when authorized
t
in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide temporary services during interruptions to
existing utilities, as acceptable to governing
authorities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- Not Applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION•
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust,
dirt and debris caused by demolition operations, as
directed by Owner or governing authorities. Return
adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of
work.
B. Demolish building as indicated on drawings and remove
from site. Use such methods as required to complete
work within limitations of governing regulations.
3.02 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:
A. General: Remove from site debris, rubbish and other
materials resulting from demolition operations.
1. Burning of removed materials from demolition
operations will not be permitted on site.
2. Transport materials removed from demolition
operations and dispose of off site.
END OF SECTION 02060
t
02060
Page 2 of 2
1 • •
•� �� d.0:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract_, including
General Conditions and other Division -1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings.
A. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks,
and pavements is included as part of this work.
B. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is
included as part of this work.
C. Excavation for Mechanical /Electrical Work: Excavation
and backfill required in conjunction with underground
mechanical and electrical utilities, and buried
mechanical and electrical appurtenances is included as
work of this section.
D. Definition: "Excavation" consists of removal of
material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated
and subsequent disposal of materials removed.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in
compliance with applicable requirements of governing
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and InsRection Service: Refer to Section 01400
Quality Control.
1.04 SOILS ENGINEERING AND ENGINEERING GEOLOGIC INVESTIGATION:
A. The following records of soil and subsurface
investigations are available as a reference for the
Contractor: (Specifically list all known relevant
references to soil and subsurface data about site.)
02200
Page 1 of 12
37
• •
examinations as the contractor deem
to satisfy the contractor as to the
conditoins to be encountered in the
of the work.
s necessary
subsurface
performance
"(2) Will not relieve the contractor from the risk of
unanticipated soil or subsurface conditions or
from properly fulfilling the terms of the
contract at the proposal price.
If soil or subsurface conditions are encountered which
require, in the opinion of the Architect, design
details which differ from those design details shown in
the contract documents and the Architect finds that
such revised design details will cause an increase or
decrease in the cost of, or the time required for
performance of the contract, the Architect will, after
approval by the Owner, modify the contract terms in
02200
Page 2 of 12
I
1
I
I
I
39 1
Preliminary soils investigation for proposed Warehouse
site, Corporation Yard, 592 Superior Avenue, Newport
Beach, California. For the City of Newport Beach,
dated June 4, 19851 by Lieghton & Associates, 1151
Duryea Avenue, Irvine, Califonria 92714. Telephone
(714) 250 -1421.
,
B. "The records of investigations of soil or subsurface
conditions and logs of test borings which are made
available by the Owner are not part of the contract and
are solely for the conveinence of the bidder or
contractor. It is expressly understood and agreed that
the Owner assumes no responsibility whatsoever in
respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of the
investigations thus made, the records thereof, or of
the interpretations set forth therein, and there is no
warranty or guaranty, either express or implied, that
the conditions indicated by such investigations or
records are representative of those existing throughout
such areas or any part thereof, or that unanticipated
developments may not occur, or that materials other
than, or in proportions different from those indicated,
may not be encountered.
"The availability or use of the records of
investigations of soil or subsurface conditions and /or
logs of test borings:
"(1) Shall not be construted as a waiver of the
contractor's duty to examine the site of the work
,
contemplated and the contractor is cautioned to
make such independent investigations and
examinations as the contractor deem
to satisfy the contractor as to the
conditoins to be encountered in the
of the work.
s necessary
subsurface
performance
"(2) Will not relieve the contractor from the risk of
unanticipated soil or subsurface conditions or
from properly fulfilling the terms of the
contract at the proposal price.
If soil or subsurface conditions are encountered which
require, in the opinion of the Architect, design
details which differ from those design details shown in
the contract documents and the Architect finds that
such revised design details will cause an increase or
decrease in the cost of, or the time required for
performance of the contract, the Architect will, after
approval by the Owner, modify the contract terms in
02200
Page 2 of 12
I
1
I
I
I
39 1
writing to provide for the change in design details and
to provide for an adjustment in cost and /or time of
performance as permitted in General Conditions Article
39."
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
Test Reports- Excavating: Submit following reports directly
to Owner from the testing services, with copy to
Contractor:
' A. Test reports on borrow material.
B. Verification of each footing subgrade.
C. One optimum moisture - maximum density curve for each
type of soil encountered.
D. Field density test reports.
E. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and /or
results of bearing tests of each strata tested.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface
conditions are not intended as representations or
warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil
borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will
not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions
drawn therefrom by Contractor. Additional test borings
and other exploratory operations may be made by Contrac-
tor at no cost to Owner.
B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground
utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to
remain in place, provide adequate means of protection
during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or
incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult utility owner
immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner
and utility companies in keeping respective services
and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities
to satisfaction of utility owner.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities
occupied and used by Owner or others, except when
permitted in writing by Owner and then only after
acceptable temporary utility services have been
provided. Demolish and completely remove from site
02200
Page 3 of 12
39
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS:
A. Definitions: i
1.
Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those
existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
off of services if lines are active.
C. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open
excavations occurring as part of this work and post
A -2 -5, and A -3.
with warning lights. Operate warning lights as
2.
recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements,
,
and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout
and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
other highly organic soils.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS:
A. Definitions: i
1.
Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those
complying with American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
M1451 soil classification Groups A -1, A -2 -4,
A -2 -5, and A -3.
2.
Unsatisfactory soil materials are those defined in
AASHTO M145 soil classification Groups A -2 -6,
A -2 -7, A -4, A -5, A -6, and A -7; also, peat and
other highly organic soils.
3.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded
'
mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed .sand.
4.
Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of
crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with
1008 passing a 1 -1/2" sieve and not more than 58
■
passing a No. 4 sieve
Ba k ;il and Fill Materialqt Satisfactory soil
materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than
2" in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetables and
other deleterious matter.
02200
Page 4 of 12
1/0
J
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 3.01 EXCAVATION:
Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material
encountered when establishing required finish grade
elevations.
A. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of
pavements and other obstructions visible on ground
surface, underground structures and utilities
indicated to be demolished and removed, material of
any classification indicated in data on subsurface
conditions, and other materials encountered that
are not classified as unauthorized excavation.
B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of
materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or
dimensions without specific direction of Architect.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's
expense. Under footings, foundation bases, or
retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by
extending indicated bottom elevation of footing
or base to excavation bottom, without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be
used to bring elevations to proper position, when
acceptable to Architect.
C. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached
required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who
will make an inspection of conditions. If
unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at
required subgrade elevations, carry excavations
1 deeper and replace excavated material as directed
by Architect. Removal of unsuitable material and
its replacement as directed will be paid on basis
of contract conditions relative to changes in work.
D. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations
to comply with local codes and ordinances having
jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not
possible because of space restrictions or stability of
material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of
excavations in safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
I
02200
Page 5 of 12
• • '
E. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and
bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and
cross - braces, in good serviceable condition.
Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing
to comply with local codes and authorities having '
jurisdiction. Maintain shoring and bracing in
excavations regardless of time period excavations will
be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation
progresses.
F. Dewaterina: Prevent surface water and subsurface or
ground water from flowing ,into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not
allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove
water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms,
undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and
maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and
discharge lines, and other dewatering system
components necessary to convey water away from
,
excavations. Convey water removed from excavations
and rain water to collecting or run -off areas.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and
other diversions outside excavation limits for each
structure. Do not use trench excavations as
temporary drainage ditches.
G. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated
materials where directed, until required for backfill
or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for
proper drainage. Locate and retain soil materials
away from edge of excavations. Dispose of excess soil
material and waste materials as herein specified.
H. Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and
dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus
0.10', and extending a sufficient distance from
footings and foundations to permit placing and removal
of concrete formwork, installation of services, other
construction, and for inspection. In excavating for
footings and foundations, take care not to disturb
bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade
just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim
,
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid
base to receive other work.
I. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements
to comply with cross - sections, elevations and grades
as shown.
02200 ,
Page 6 of 12
• •
J. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform
width required for particular item to be installed,
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room.
Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required.
Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish
indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Grade
bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe
bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.
Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations
pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which
are carried below bottom of such footings, or which
pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of
bottom of adjacent footing. (Concrete is specified in
Division -3.) Do not backfill trenches until tests and
inspections have been made and backfilling authorized
by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage
or displacement of pipe systems.
3.02 COMPACTION•
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction
providing minimum percentage of density specified for
each area classification.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Reguirements: Compact
soil to not less than the following percentages of
maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well -
defined moisture density relationship determined in
accordance with ASTM D 1557 -78; and not less than the
following percentages of relative density, determined
in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will
not exhibit a well- defined moisture - density relationship.
1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each
layer of backfill or fill material at 958 maximum
dry density or 908 relative dry density.
2. 1g Slahs and Steps: Compact top 12" of
subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material at 958 maximum dry density or 908
relatively dry density.
3. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each
layer of backfill or fill material at 958
maximum dry density or 908 relatively dry density.
4. Pavements: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each
layer of backfill or fill material at 958 maximum
dry density or 908 relative dry density for
cohesive soil material.
02200
Page 7 of 12
' y3
3.03
yy
•
n
C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil
material must be moisture conditioned before compaction,
uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer
of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on
surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil
material that is too wet to permit compaction to
specified density.
1. Soil material that has been removed because it is
too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or
spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by
discing, harrowing or pulvarizing until moisture
content is reduced to a satisfactory value.
BACRFILL AND FILL:
A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to
required subgrade elevations, for each area classi-
fication listed below.
1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or ,
borrow material.
2. Under walks, use subbase material, or satisfactory
excavated or borrow material, or combination of
both.
3. Under steps, use subbase material.
4. Under building slabs, use sandfill over vapor
barrier.
5. Under piping and conduit, use subbase material
where subbase is indicted under piping or conduit;
shape to fit bottom 90 of cylinder.
B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but
not until completion of the following:
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade
including, where applicable, dampproofing, water-
proofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording
locations of underground utilities.
3. Removal of concrete formwork.
02200
Page 8 of 12
I
f02200
Page 9 of 12
� ys
4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of
voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off
temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of
structures and remove in manner to prevent
settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave
in place if required.
C.
Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris,
unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface prior to
placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break -up sloped
surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so
that fill material will bond with existing surface.
'
When existing ground surface has a density less than
that specified under "Compaction" for particular area
classification, break up ground surface, pulverize,
moisture - condition to optimum moisture content, and
compact to required depth and percentage of maximum
density.
D.
Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill
materials in layers not more than S" in loose depth
for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment,
and not more than 4" in loose depth for material
compacted by hand - operated tampers. Before compaction,
moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide
optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to
required percentage of maximum dry density or relative
dry density for each area classification. Place
backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to
structures, to required elevations. Take care to
prevent wedging action of backfill against structures
by carrying material uniformly around structure to
approximately same elevation in each lift.
3.04 GRADING:
A.
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of
grading under this section, including adjacent transition
areas. Smooth finished surface within specified
tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes
between points where elevations are shown, or between
such points and existing grades.
B.
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent
to building lines to drain away from structures and to
prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular
surface changes, and as follows:
I
f02200
Page 9 of 12
� ys
3.05
3.06
116
• • ,
1. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, ,
grade and cross - section, with finish surface not
more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade
elevation.
2. Pavements: Shape surface of areas
to line, grade and cross - section,
surface not more than 1/2" above o
subgrade elevation.
under pavement
with finish
r below required
C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade
smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified,
and to required elevation. Provide final grades within
a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10' straightedge.
D. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces
to the depth and percentage of maximum density for
each area classification. .
I
I
LI
A. General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase
material, in layers of specified thickness, over
subgrade surface to support a pavement base course.
See other Division -2 sections for paving specifica-
tions. s
B. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines
and grades including crown and cross -slope of subbase
course.
C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase
course to prevent lateral movement. Construct '
shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such
quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase
course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12" width
of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling
of each layer of subbase course.
D. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared
subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to
indicated cross - section and thickness. Maintain
optimum moisture content for compacting subbase mater-
ial during placement operations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow
testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and
fill layers before further construction work is
02200
Page 10 of 12
performed. Perform field density tests in accordance
with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167
(rubber balloon method), as applicable.
! 1. Footing Subgrade; For each strata of soil on which
footings will be placed, conduct at least one test
to verify required design bearing capacities.
subsequent verification and approval of each .
' footing subgrade may be based on a visual compari-
son of each subgrade with related tested strata,
when acceptable to Architect.
2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at
least one field density test of subgrade for every
2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but
in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted
fill layer, make one field density test for every,
2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved
area, but in no case less than 3 tests.
3. Foundation Wall Backfill: Take at least 2 field
density tests, at locations and elevations as
directed.
If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service
reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have
been placed are below specified density, provide
additional compaction and testing at no additional
expense.
3.07 MAINTENANCE:
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas
from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and
debris. Repair and re- establish grades in settled,
1 eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed
compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construc-
tion operations or adverse weather, scarify surface,
re- shape, and compact to required density prior to
further construction.
C. settling: Where settling is measurable or observable
at excavated areas during general project warranty
period, remove surface (pavement. lawn or other
finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace
surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and
condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest
extent possible.
02200
Page 11 of 12
1 'Y7
/ • •
3.08
A. Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Property:
Transport acceptable excess excavated material to
designated soil storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile soil or spread as directed by
Architect /Engineer.
B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials,
including unacceptable excavated material, trash and
debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02200
W1,
02200
Page.12 of 12
' If units are produced at locations other than precast
concrete fabricating plants, maintain procedures 'and
conditions for quality control which are equivalent to
plant production.
Comply with PCI MNL - 116 "Manual for Quality Control"
for production of precast concrete units:
E. Allowable Tolerance: Fabricate precast concrete piles
to dimensional tolerances recommended by PCI.
' 02360
Page 1 of 9
A191
SECTION 02360 - DRIVEN PILES
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including
'
General and Supplementary conditions and Divison -1
Specification sections apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of driven piles is shown on drawings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Perform all work in compliance
with applicable requirements of the appropriate
division of the agency or agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: Comply with pertinent
provisions of Section 01400.
..
C. Fabricator Qualifications: Only a firm which has had a
minimum of 5 years successful experience in the
fabrication of precast concrete units similar to the
units required for this project will be acceptable.
Fabricator must have sufficient production capacity to
produce the required units without causing any delay in
the work.
1. Fabricator must be an active member of the
Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) and
participate in its Plant Certification Program.
D. Fabrication Oualifications: Produce precast concrete
piles at a fabricating plant engaged primarily in the
manufacturing of similar unitsf unless plant
fabrication or delivery to project site is impractical.
' If units are produced at locations other than precast
concrete fabricating plants, maintain procedures 'and
conditions for quality control which are equivalent to
plant production.
Comply with PCI MNL - 116 "Manual for Quality Control"
for production of precast concrete units:
E. Allowable Tolerance: Fabricate precast concrete piles
to dimensional tolerances recommended by PCI.
' 02360
Page 1 of 9
A191
1.04
1.05
1.06
Sd
F. Welder Oualifications: Qualify welders, welding
processes and procedures in accordance with AWS
"Structural Welding Code ".
A. Load - bearing Test Reports: Submit copies of test
reports for each load - bearing test within 2 days after
completion of tests.
B. Driving_ Records: Submit copies of driving record of
each pile to Owner not later than 2 days after driving.
Include project name and number, name of Contractor,
pile location and number, computed pile capacity, type
and size of hammer used, type of pile driving cap used,
rate or operation of pile driving equipment, pile
dimensions, elevation of point, elevation of butt
before and after cut -off, ground elevation, continuous
record of number of blows for each foot of penetration,
pile deviation, pile uplift and reaction, and any
unusual occurrences during pile driving.
Submit records which have been compiled and attested to
by a registered professional engineer.
Except for piles to be used for test purposes, materials
ordered or delivered to project site prior to verification
of assumed pile length, will be at Contractor's risk.
1
I
I
I
After pile lengths are verified, deliver materials to
project site in such quantities and at such time to assure
continuity of pile driving operations to project schedule.
Store piles in orderly groups above ground and blocked r
during storage to minimize possible distortion of members.
Piles exhibiting variations beyond tolerance limits will be ,
considered distorted and may not be used in the work.
• • 1
A. Foundation Engineering Services: A Soils Investigation
Report has been prepared for this project and may be
identified as follows:
Leighton and Associates, Geotechnical Engineering
documents noted below.
Preliminary Soils Survey 1850623 -01 June 4, 1985
02360
Page 2 of 9
E. Environmental: Comply with all restrictions and
limitations imposed upon the work of this section by
all agencies having jurisdiction with regard to noise
1 generated or any other environmental concerns.
' PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
' 2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
A. Formwork: Use form facing materials of metal or other
heavy -duty material that is non - reactive with concrete
and will produce acceptable finish surfaces and
required profile.
B. Chamfer corners of square piles at least 3/4" or round
to 1" radius, unless otherwise indicated.
' 02360
Page 3 of 9
1 5/
This report is available at the Owner's office for
inspection by the bidders and General Contractor.
B. Site information: Data on indicated subsurface
conditions are not intended as representations or
warranties of continuity of such conditions. It is
expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible
for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by
Contractor. The data are made available for
convenience of Contractor.
Additional test borings and other exploratory
operations may be made by Contractor at no additional
cost to Owner.
C. Protection: Protect structures, underground utilities
and other construction from damage caused by pile
driving operations. Pre- excavate for piles if
required, as herein specified. Obtain Soils Engineer's
recommendations regarding pre- excavation and pile
driving.
D. Provide surveyed elevation bench marks on structures
where directed by Owner before commencing work, when
structures are adjacent to pile driving operations.
Record and report elevation of each bench mark after
driving each pile and at least twice a day while pile
driving is in progress. Should bench mark readings
indicate displacement, halt driving operations until
corrective action has been provided and is acceptable
to Owner.
E. Environmental: Comply with all restrictions and
limitations imposed upon the work of this section by
all agencies having jurisdiction with regard to noise
1 generated or any other environmental concerns.
' PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
' 2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
A. Formwork: Use form facing materials of metal or other
heavy -duty material that is non - reactive with concrete
and will produce acceptable finish surfaces and
required profile.
B. Chamfer corners of square piles at least 3/4" or round
to 1" radius, unless otherwise indicated.
' 02360
Page 3 of 9
1 5/
•
•
C. Steel Reinforcing: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed bars
and ASTM A 82 plain cold -drawn steel wire.
D. Prestressing Tendons: ASTM A 416, Grade 270, ,
seven -wire, uncoated, stress - relieved steel strand.
E. Concrete: ASTM C 94, and as follows: '
Compressive strength: as noted on plans at 28 days
Maximum aggregate size: 3/4"
Minimum cement content: 658 lbs. per cu. yd. concrete
Slump at point of discharge: 3" maximum
Total air content: not less than 48 nor more than 68
F. Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for climatic conditions prevailing at tim�
of placement.
G. For precast, prestressed units, comply with
manufacturing and testing procedures, quality control
recommendations, and dimensional tolerance of
Prestressed Concrete Institute "Manual for Quality
Control" (MNL -116).
I
2.02 DRIVING EQUIPMENT:
A. General: Provide pile driving equipment of type
generally used in standard pile driving practice, ,
operated at manufacturer's specified rate, to develop
required rated energy pre -blow.
B. jammer: Provide pile driving hammers of sufficient '
capacity, size and type able to deliver consistently
effective dynamic energy, suitable to piles to be
driven and to subgrade material into which they are to
be driven, when operating at not less than 758
efficiency of rated driving energy.
C. Driving CaDB: Equip hammer with cast steel or
structural steel driving cap, with grooved base
conforming to pile shape. Keep bearing surfaces of
grooves true and smooth. '
D. Leads: Use fixed or rigid type pile driver leads that
will hold pile firmly in position and alignment! and
axial alignment with hammer. Extend leads to within
ft. of elevation at which the pile enter ground.
02360 1
Page 4 of 9
•
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-
DRIVING WORK:
A.
Site Conditions: Do not drive piles until earthwork in
area which piles are to occupy has been completed, as
follows:
B.
Excavations: Earth excavation will be stopped at an
elevation of 6" to 12" above bottom of footing before
piles are driven. Final excavation of required
elevation of footing bottoms will be done as part of
earthwork for buildings, after piles have been driven
and tested.
C.
Fills: Fills will be constructed and compacted to
elevation of grade indicated.
D.
Pile Length Markings: Mark each piles' length with a
horizontal line, at 1' -0" intervals, and the number of
feet from pile point at 5' -0" intervals.
E.
Sr) ices: Contact Owner in the event splices are
required. Splices shall develop adequate strength in
compression, tension, shear, torsion and moment, as
required, both during installation and in service.
F.
Build -Uns: If it is determined during driving
operations that a pile length will not be sufficient to
meet final cut -off elevation, fabricate cast -in -place
reinforced concrete build -up to required elevation when
directed by Owner.
Minimum compressive concrete strength not less than as
noted on plans at 28 days.
Payment for build -ups will be made in accordance with
contract provisions for changes in work.
3.02 DRIVING
PILES:
A.
General: Continuously drive piles at locations
indicated, to required point elevation and driving
resistance established by driving and loading of test
piles.
Carefully maintain center of gravity for each group or
cluster of piles to conform to locations shown on
drawings.
02360
Page 5 of 9
• •
1
Carefully plumb leads and pile before driving. Take
care during driving to prevent and to correct any ,
tendency of piles to twist or rotate.
When handling and driving long piles, take special
precautions to ensure against overstress or leading
away from a true position when driving. When
high- resistant strata lying near the surface must be
penetrated. spud piles may be used, when authorized by
Architect /Engineer, to minimize hard driving of long
piles during early stages of driving operations.
B. Driving Tolerances: Drive piles within following
maximum tolerances:
C. Location: 3" from location indicated for center of
gravity of each single pile or pile groups; 1" for
piles under walls.
D. Plumbness:
maximum of
in leads.
Maintain 1" in 10' -0" from vertical, or a
4 ", measured when the pile is above ground,
E. Batter Angle: Maximum 1" in 10' -0" from required
angle; measured when pile is above ground, in leads.
F. Pre - Excavating (Carina): Provide pre- excavated holes
for .piles as directed by Soils Engineer. Drill holes
with a diameter slightly less than largest
cross - section dimension; exact size and depth as
required to produce satisfactory driving results.
Backfill voids between pile and pre- excavated hole,
using satisfactory soil materials.
G. Jetting: Water jetting is not permitted.
H. Heaved Piles: Provide recorded instrument observations
made during pile driving to determine whether driven
pile has lifted from its original seat during driving
of adjacent piles. If uplift occurs, redrive affected
piles to point elevation at least as deep as original
point elevation with a driving resistance at least as
great as original driving resistance.
I. Damaged or Misd iven Pita; Damaged piles, and piles
driven outside required driving tolerances will not be
accepted.
Withdraw piles rejected after driving, and replace with
new piles.
02360
Page 6 of 9
5'`/
I
1
Li
n
�I
u
I
1J
I
1
Drive additional pile or piles where centerline
deviation exceeds 3" and redesign indicated load on any
pile exceeding 1108 of design load.
Piles rejected after driving may be abandoned and
cut -off, and additional piles driven to replace rejected
units at designated locations.
Solidly fill spaces left by withdrawn piles, that will
not be filled by new piles, using cohesionless soil
material such as gravel, broken stone, and gravel -sand
mixtures. Place and compact throughout length of
space.
J. Cutting -Off: Cut -off tops of driven piles, square with
pile axis and at elevations indicated. Dispose of
excess materials off site.
3.03 FIELD OUALITy CONTROL:
Test piles, furnished and driven by Contractor.to determine
lengths of piles, may be located, cut off, and become part
of foundation system provided they conform to contract
requirements.
A. Test Piles Required;
Provide 4 single test piles located as directed by
Soils Engineer.
B. Driving Test Piles: Use test piles of same weight and
section as required, and drive with identical pile
driving equipment operating at rated driving energy to
be used in driving permanent piles.
Drive test piles at location s indicated to a point
elevation below final cut -off elevation equal to pile
'
length specified as basis of bid, or to refusal,
whichever occurs first. Piles will be considered as
driven to refusal when 5 blows of hammer are required
to produce a total penetration of 1/4" or less.
C. Pile Design Load: Design load per pile is shown on
drawings.
D. Test Loads: Load single test piles to.twice.required
design load for each type pile.
E. Pile Load Testing: Load and test piles which have been
in place not less than 48 hours, to determine the
load - settlement relationship of test piles under a
vertical axial load, complying with ASTM D 1143.
02360
Page 7 of 9
5S
• •
Apply loads in increments not exceeding 258 of ,
allowable pile load.
Apply test loads either by use of hydraulic jacks or by
static loading. Use certified, calibrated jacks to
develop the required test loads, maintain them, and
release them in continuous operations. Drive anchor
piles not closer than 5 ft. from any test pile. ,
Apply test loads so that allowable load is reached in
not less than 8 hours from start of load application.
Maintain this load until no measurable settlement is
observed in a period of 16 hours, or longer as may be
required by local codes having jurisdiction. Do not
apply subsequent loads until pile settlement becomes
negligible.
After satisfactory allowable load testing, apply
additional loads so that total test load is reached in
not less than 8 hours. Maintain total load until no
measurable settlement is observed in a period of 16 '
hours, or longer as may be required by local codes
having jurisdiction.
Measure and record settlement immediately before and ,
after each increment of test load is applied, and
immediately before and 24 hours after total load is
removed.
The test pile will be considered as acceptable for
stipulated bearing capacity if total net settlement, '
after deducting rebound, does not exceed 0.01" per ton
of test load.
F. Test Reports: Prepare reports for each test pile, to
include: Date of driving; test pile location;
designation and dimensions of pile; pile point
reinforcement and description, if any; total
penetration; starting and finishing times, and total
driving time; number of blows required for each foot of
penetration, total number of blows, and resistance in
blows per inch for the last 6" of driving.
Include with test pile reports a record of driving
equipment used, to include: Hammer make and model ,
number, stroke, weight of ram, and rated driving
energy; driving cap weight and description; actual rate
of operation of hammer during test pile driving. I
i
02360
56 Page 8 of 9 '
3.04 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT:
A. Basis for Bids; Bids will be based on number,
dimensions of piles indicated, from point to cut -off
plus not less than 1 ft. of overlength for cutting
piles at required cut -off elevations.
B. Basis for Payment: From the data obtained as a result
of driving and loading test piles, calculate actual
total net length of piles used. Contract price per
linear foot included labor, materials, tools,
' equipment, and incidentals, and for performing work for
furnishing, driving, cutting -off and capping piles,
This includes splicing and disposal of cut -offs.
Measurements will be based on effective length of piles
in place, with fractional lengths measured to nearest
foot. Payment for linear footage in excess of that
indicated on drawings, and credit for linear footage
less than that indicated on drawings, shall be made at
unit prices stated in the contract, based on net
' addition or deduction.
Test piles that become part of completed foundation
system will be considered as an integral part of work.
No payment will be made for rejected piles, including
piles driven out of place, imperfect piles, or piles
damaged in driving or handling.
1
�i
'r
;r
r
�r
END OF SECTION 02360
02360
Page 9 of 9
SECTION 02513 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING '
PART 1 - GENERAL ,
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS; I
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, ,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: '
A. Extent of asphalt concrete paving work is shown
on drawings. '
B. Pregared aggregate subbase is specified in earthwork
sections.
1.03 STANDARDS: ,
Standard specifications, State of California, Department of '
Public Works, Division of Highways, current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Material Certificates: Provide copies of materials
certificates signed by material producer and Contractor,
certifying that each material item complies with, or '
exceeds specified requirements.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS '
A. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when
ambient temperature is above 50 F. (10 C), and when
temperature has not been below 35 F. (1 C) for 12
hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply
when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture.
Construct asphalt concrete surface course only when '
atmospheric temperature is above 40 F. (4 C), and
when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air,
temperature is above 30 F. ( -1 C) and rising.
B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines
and elevations.
I
02513 '
Page 1 of 6
50
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
' 2.01 MATERIALS-
A. General: Use locally available materials and
gradations which exhibit a satisfactory record of
previous installations.
' B. Soil Sterilization: Treat areas to be surfaced with
asphalt concrete with soil sterilizing agent.
' 1. Material and Application: Use either of the
following as approved:
a. Sodium arsenite solution (weed poison) applied
at the rate of ten (10) gallons diluted with
40 gallons of water every 1000 square feet of.
surface to be treated.
' b. "Poly -Bor- Chlorate" as manufactured by Pacific
Coast Borax Company applied in solution of
' one (1) pound chemical to one (1) gallon of
water at the rate of 25 square feet per gallon.
c. "Borascu" concentrated type, manufactured by
Pacific Coast Borax Company, applied dry at
rate of 5 -1/2 pounds per 100 square feet of
area.
d. Or equal.
2. Approved products of other manufacturers are
acceptable provided they are applied in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions and are non -flam-
mable type.
3. Protection Against Sterilizing Agents: Contractor
shall provide necessary protection to prevent
injury to persons, animals, adjacent plant life and
property by application of soil sterilizer and
shall be responsible for personal injury or property
damage caused by its application or storage.
C. Base Course Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone,
Class II material in accordance with Section 26 of
referenced "Standard Specifications ".
D. Surface Course AggrPg_ate: Crushed stone, crushed gravel,
crushed slag, and sharp -edged natural sand.
02513
Page 2 of 6
1 59
• • '
E. Asphalt Cement: Comply with AASHTO M 226 (ASTM D
3881).
F. Prime Coat: Cut -back asphalt type; MC -30, MC -70 or ,
MC -250.
G. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, SS -1, SS-1h, CSS -1 or
CSS -1h, diluted with one part water to one part
emulsified asphalt.
H. Lane Marking Paint: Chlorinated rubber -alkyd type, ,
FS TT -P -115, Type III.
2.02 ASPHALT- AGGREGATE MIXTURE: '
Plant -mix asphalt concrete, Type A having a minimum
cohesiometer reading of 400 and Type A mineral aggregates ,
as specified in Section 39 of referenced standard.
Compacted thickness shall be 3 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION ,
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION: '
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface '
immediately before applying prime coat. Proof roll
prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and
areas requiring additional compaction. Notify Contractor '
of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work
until deficient subbase areas have been corrected and are
ready to receive paving. '
A. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent
in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommended
dosages and application instructions. Apply to ,
compacted, dry subbase prior to application of prime
coat.
B. Prime Coat: Apply at rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gal. per '
sq. yd., over compacted subgrade. Apply material to
penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and
dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and '
evaporation of volatile.
II
02513
Page 3 of 6
60 1
C. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously
constructed asphalt or Portland cement concrete and
' surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete
pavement. Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per
sq. yd. of surface. Allow to dry until at proper
condition to receive paving.
3.02 PLACING MIX :
A. General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared
surface, spread and strike -off. Spread mixture at
minimum temperature of 225 F. (107 C). Place
' inaccessible and small areas by hand. Place each
course to required grade, cross - section, and compacted
thickness.
'
B.
Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than 10' wide
unless otherwise acceptable to Owner. After first
strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding
strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips.
Complete base course for a section before placing
surface course.
C.
Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or
between successive days' work, to ensure continuous
bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to
'
have same texture, density and smoothness as other
sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact
surfaces and apply tack coat.
3.03 ROLLING:
A.
General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller
weight without excessive displacement. Compact mixture
.
with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in
areas inaccessible to rollers.
B.
Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial
rolling immediately following rolling of joints and
outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling,
and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling,
if required, with hot material. Roller shall be 8 -10
ton class.
C.
Second Rollina: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as
possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second
rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.
Roller to be 10 -12 ton class.
02513
Page 4 of 6
1 61
• • 1
D. Finish Rollina: Perform finish rolling while mixture '
is still warm enough for removal of roller marks.
Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and ,
course has attained maximum density.
E. Patchina: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with
foreign materials and defective areas. Cut -out such ,
areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete.
Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and
smoothness. ,
F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit
vehicular traffic on pavement until it has,cooled and
hardened. ,
G. FrPct barricades to protect paving from traffic until
mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. '
A. Cleaning: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose '
material and dust.
B. Striping: Use chlorinated- rubber base traffic lane- '
marking paint, factory- mixed, quick- drying, and non -
bleeding.
Color: White. '
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce
uniform straight edges. Apply in 2 coats at manu-
facturer's recommended rates.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: ,
A. General: Test in -place asphalt concrete courses for
compliance with requirements for thickness and surface '
smoothness. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable
paving as directed by Architect.
B. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness will not be ,
acceptable if exceeding following allowable variation
from required thickness.
Base Course: 1/2 ", plus or minus.
Surface ourag: 1/4 ", plus or minus.
02513
Page 5 of 6
i
[1
1
C. Surface Smoothness:
Test finished surface of each
asphalt concrete
course for smoothness, using 10'
straightedge
applied parallel with, and at right angles
'
to centerline
of paved area. Surfaces will not be
acceptable if
exceeding the following tolerances for
smoothness.
".
Base Course Surface:
1/4
Wearinc_Course
Surface: 1/8 ".
Check surface
areas at intervals as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION 02513
1
i
1
1
1
1
'
02513
Page 6 of 6
163
•
f �. , •� y.
•
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
i IN i . • • 0111
A. Extent of portland cement concrete paving is shown on
drawings, including curbs, gutters, walkways, stairs
and pavement.
B. Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" section.
C. Concrete and related materials are specified in
Division 3.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing
regulations if more stringent than herein specified
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Furnish samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports,
and materials' certifications as required in referenced
sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers.
2.01 MATERIALS•
A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size
and strength to resist movement during concrete
placement and to retain horizontal and vertical
alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of
distortion and defects.
Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards
to form radius bends as required.
02514
Page 1 of 7
6-1
r
�
�
"r
Coat forms with
a non - staining form release agent that
will not discolor
or deface surface of concrete.
B. Welded Wire Mesh:
Welded plain cold -drawn steel wire
fabric, ASTM A
185.
Furnish in
flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise
acceptable
to Architect.
C. Reinforcing Bars:
Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615,
Grade 40.
' D. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of
applicable Division -3 sections for concrete materials,
admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and
others as required.
E. Liquid- Membrane Forming Curing Compound: Complying
with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type
' acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss not more than
0.055 gr. /sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft. /gal.
F. Bonding Compound; Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base,
rewettable type.
2.02 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING:
Comply with requirements of applicable Division -3 sections
for concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality
control, and as herein specified.
Design mix to product normal - weight concrete consisting of
portland cement, aggregate, water- reducing or high -range
water - reducing admixture (super - plasticizer),
air - entraining admixture and water to produce the following
' properties:
Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless
otherwise indicated.
rSlump Range: 6" for concrete containing HRWR admixture
(super- plasticizer); 3" for other concrete.
r
i
V5-
02514
Page 2 of 7
• • ,
PART 3 - EXECUTION ,
3.01
SURFACE PREPARATION:
'
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface
immediately before placing concrete.
Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable
areas and need for additional compaction. Do not begin
paving work until such conditions have been corrected and
'
are ready to receive paving.
3.02
FORM CONSTRUCTION:
Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and
secured. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow
continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in
place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to
following tolerances:
Top of forms not more than 1/8" in 10'.
,
Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4"
in 10'.
Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release
agent as often as required to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.03
REINFORCEMENT:
'
Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in
Division -3 sections, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04
CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
A. General: Comply with requirements of Division -3 ,
sections for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein
specified.
B. Do not glace concrete until subbase and forms have been
checked for line and grade. moisten subbase if
required to provide a uniform dampened condition at
time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around
manholes or other structures until they are at required
finish elevation and alignment.
02514 '
Page 3 of 7
• I
C. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation
of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and
' adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator.
Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies,
reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced
' shovels for hand - spreading and consolidation.
Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of
reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is
placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete
surfaces.
' Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation
between transverse joints, as far as possible. If
interrupted for more than 1/2 -hour, place a
construction joint.
' D. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be.used for
curb and gutter placement at Contractor's option. If
machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix
design and laboratory test results which meet or.exceed
minimums specified. Machine placement must produce
curbs and gutters to required cross - section, lines,
grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed
' concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and
replace with formed concrete as specified.
3.05 JOINTS:
A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane
(contraction), and construction joints true -to -line
with face perpendicular to surface of concrete.
Construct transverse joints at right angles to the
centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
When joining existing structures, place transverse
joints to align with previously placed joints, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide
weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct
weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4
concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Tooted Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh
concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended
cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
' 02514
Page 4 of 7
t� 7
3.06
•
•
C. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end
of placements and at locations where placement
operations are stopped for a period of more than
1/2 -hour, except where such placements terminate at
expansion joints.
1. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use
standard metal keyway- section forms.
2. Where load transfer -slip dowel devices are used,
install so that one end of each dowel bar is free
to move.
D. E, Ransion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for
expansion joints, abutting concrete curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other
fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated.
Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and
not less than 1/2" or more than 1" below finished
surface where joint sealer is indicated. if no joint
sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished
concrete surface.
Furnish joint fillers in one -piece lengths for full
width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than
one length is required, lace or clip joint filler
sections together.
Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete
placement with a metal cap or other temporary material.
Remove protection after concrete has been placed on
both sides of joint.
C. Fillers and Sealants: Comply with requirements of
applicable Division -7 sections for preparation of
joints, materials, installation, and performance.
After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth
surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only
where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating
to compact surface and produce uniform texture.
After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10'
straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove
surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to
provide a continuous smooth finish.
02514
Page 5 of 7
Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and
formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2"
' radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks
on concrete surface.
r02514
Page 6 of 7
6i
After completion of floating and troweling when excess
moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface
finishing, as follows:
Finish "C -11: Broom finish, by drawing a fine -hair broom
across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic.
Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture
'
acceptable to Architect.
1. Walks: Soft Broom.
2. Pavement: Coarse Broom.
3. Stairs: Coarse Broom.
inclined
On slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip
finish by scoring surface with a stiff - bristled broom,
perpendicular to line of traffic.
Burlap finish, by dragging a seamless strip of damp
.
burlap across concrete, perpendicular to line of
,
traffic. Repeat operation to provide a gritty texture
acceptable to Owner.
'
3.07 CURING:
Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with
applicable requirements of Division -3 sections. Use
membrane - forming curing and sealing compound or approved
moist - curing methods.
'
3.08 =AIRS AND PROTECTIONS;
A. Reoair or replace broken or defective concrete, as
'
directed by Architect.
B. grill test cores where directed by Owner, when
necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective
areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory
pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to
pavement with epoxy adhesive.
r02514
Page 6 of 7
6i
•
•
C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work.
Exclude traffic form pavement for at least 14 days
after placement. When construction traffic is
permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as
they occur.
Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains,
discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just
prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION 02514
70
02514
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 03310 - CONCRETE WORK
' 1.01
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division =l'
Specification sections apply to work specified in this
section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
' The extent of concrete work shown on drawings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
' Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following
codes, specifications and standards, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified:
' ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings ".
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard
Practice ".
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test
reports or concrete materials and mix design test as
specified.
' B. Material Certificates: Provide materials certificates
in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when
permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be
signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that
' each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified
requirements.
' 2.01
A. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete
' surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure
' 03310
Page 1 of 11
7/
• •
with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable ,
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges
and one side for tight fit. ,
B. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation
form - coating compounds that will not bond with, stain
nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not '
impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS:
'
A. Reinforcing Bars:
ASTM A 615, Grade 40 and Grade 60,
deformed.
'
B. Welded Wire Fabric:
ASTM A 185, welded steel wire
fabric.
,
C. Supports for
Reinforcement: Provide supports for
reinforcement
including bolsters, charis, spacers and
other devices
for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing bars
and welded wire fabric in place. Use
'
wire bar type
supports complying with CRSI
recommendations,
unless otherwise acceptable.
,
For slab -on-
grade, use supports with sand plates or
horizontal runners
where base material will not support
chair legs.
For exposed -to
-view concrete surfaces, where legs of
supports are
in contact with forms, provide support
with legs which
are plastic protected, stainless steel
'
protected, or
special stainless complying with CRSI
Classes C, D,
or E, respectively.
'
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS:
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II unless otherwise '
acceptable to Architect.
B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein
specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for
exposed concrete. Local aggregates not complying with
ASTM C: 33 but which have shown by special test or
actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength '
and durability may be used when acceptable to the
Architect.
C. Water: Potable '
03310 '
Page 2 of 11
7°L 1
2.04 RELATED MATERIALS:
' All Other Concrete: Not less than 1" and not more than
4 ".
2.06 CONCRETE MIXING-
Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,
and as herein specified. Delete references for allowing
additional water to be added to batch for material with
insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will
not be permitted. During hot weather, or under conditions
1
' 03310
Page 3 of 11
1 73
A.
Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over
'
prepared base material where indicated. Use only
materials which are resistant to decay when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
Polyethyeleng sheet not less than 6 mils thick.
'
2.05 PROPORTIONING
AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
A.
Submit written reports to Owner of each proposed
mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior
'
to start of work. Do not begin concrete production
until mixes have been reviewed by Owner.
'
B.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the
following properties, as indicated on drawings and
schedules:
Compressive indicated
strength as on Plans.
C.
AAdiustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments
'
may be requested by Contractor when characteristics
of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to
Owner and as accepted by Owner. Laboratory test
data for revised mix design and strength results must
be submitted to and accepted by Owner before
using in work.
D.
Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result
'
in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:
Ramos and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3 ".
Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and
not more than 3 ".
' All Other Concrete: Not less than 1" and not more than
4 ".
2.06 CONCRETE MIXING-
Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,
and as herein specified. Delete references for allowing
additional water to be added to batch for material with
insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will
not be permitted. During hot weather, or under conditions
1
' 03310
Page 3 of 11
1 73
contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter ,
mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required.
When air temperature is between 85 F (30 C) and 90 F (32 ,
C), educe mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75
minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 F (32 C),
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. ,
•
3.01 FORMS:
1
A. Desion, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork ,
to support vertical and laterial loads that might be
applied until such loads can be supported by concrete '
structure. Construct formwork so concrete members
and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,
elevation and position.
B. Design Formwork to
shock or damage to
adjacent materials.
be readily removable without impact, '
cast -in -place concrete surfaces and
C. Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to sizes,
shapes., lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain
accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb
work in finished structures. Provide for openings,
offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, reglets,
chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and
inserts, and other features required in work. Use
selected materials to obtain required finishes.
Solidly butt joints and provide back -up at joints to
prevent leakage of cement paste.
D. Fabricate o m for asy removal without hammering or
prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete
with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent
swelling and for easy removal.
E. Form Tiaa: Factory- fabricated, adjustable - length,
removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to
prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling
concrete surfaces upon removal.
03310
Page 4 of 11
1
l
1
1
1
1
1
n
1
u
�y 1
F. Provisoins for Other Trades: Provide openings in
' concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades.
Determine size and location of openings, recesses and
Chases from trades providing such items. Accurately
place and securely support items built into forms.
G. Cleaning and Tightgntina: Thoroughly clean forms and
adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips
wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before
concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after
concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:
Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's
recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars ", for
details and methods of reinforcement placement and
supports, and as herein specified.
A. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,
earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy
bond with concrete.
B. Accurately position# support and secure reinforcement
against displacement by formwork, construction, or
concrete placement operations. Locate and support
reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters,
spacers, and hangers, as required.
C. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum cover-
' ages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and
securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforce-
ment in position during concrete placement operations.
Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not
' toward exposed concrete surfaces.
D. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as
' practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in
adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either
' directions.
3.03 JOINTS:
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction
joints, which are not shown on drawings, so as not to
impair strength and appearance of the structure, as
' acceptable to Architect.
' 03310
Page 5 of .11
7S
3.04
3.05
3.06
76
•
•
B. Provide keyways at least 1 -1/2" deep in construction
joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings;
accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be
used for slabs.
11
I�
C. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main '
reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construc-
tion joints.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: '
A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and
other embedded items required for other work that is '
attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete.
Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and
directions provided by suppliers of items to be ,
attached thereto.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Stri2s for Slabs: Set edge forms
or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs
,
to obtain required elevations and contours in finished
slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently
strong to support types of screed strips by use of
,
strike -off templates or accepted compacting type
screeds.
PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES:
,
Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form - coating compound
before reinforcement is placed. Thin form - coating.
'
compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount,
and under conditions of form - coating compound
manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess
'
form- coating material to accumulate in forms or to come
into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh
concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with
'
manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT: ,
A. PreRlacement Inspection: Before placing concrete,
inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing
steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify '
other crafts to permit installation of their work;
cooperate with other trades in setting such work.
Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete ,
where form coatings are not used.
B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and ,
moisture barriers with placement of forms and
reinforcing steel.
03310 '
Page 6 of 11
r
' G. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate
concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits
of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or
' section is completed.
H. Consolidate concrete dring placing operations so that
concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and
' other embedded items and into corners.
I. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge
' and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth
surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operation.
' J. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete
placement operations.
03310
Page 7 of 11
C.
Generale Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such
thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete
which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation
of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be
'
placed continuously, provide construction joints as,
herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as
practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.
D.
Placing_ Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms
in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where
placement consists of several layers, place each layer
while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold
'
joints.
E.
Consolidate Rlaced concrete by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplimented by hand - spading, rodding or
'
tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI
recommended practices.
'
F.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside
forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible
'
effectiveness of maching. Place vibrators to rapidly
penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding
layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion
limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing
'
segregation of mix.
' G. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate
concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits
of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or
' section is completed.
H. Consolidate concrete dring placing operations so that
concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and
' other embedded items and into corners.
I. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge
' and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth
surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operation.
' J. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete
placement operations.
03310
Page 7 of 11
rm
3.07
•
K. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist
that would seriously impair quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and
as herein specified.
L. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete
temperature at time of placement below 90 F (32C).
Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be
used to control temperature provided water equivalent
of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing.
F]
I
M.
Cover reinforcing steel with water- soaked burlap if it
becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not
exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
,
embedment in concrete.
N.
yet forms thouroughly before placing concrete.
'
O.
Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise
accepted in mix designs.
'
FINISH
A.
OF FORMED SURFACES:
Rouch Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not
'
exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other
construction, unless otherwise indicated. This concrete
surface shall have texture imparted by form facing
,
material used, with tie holes and defective areas
repaired and patched and fins and other projections
exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off.
,
B.
Related Uniformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,
horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a
'
texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue
final surface treatment of formed surfaces.uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise
'
indicated.
C.
Exposed Surfaces Receiving "Paint" Finish: Smooth and
free of form marks and other defects, and in uniform
,
planes true to line. In addition to the above
finishing operations, all exposed to -view concrete
surfaces and surfaces to be painted shall receive the
'
following smooth finish:
03310 '
Page 8 of 11
1) Grouting and Rubbing: Wet the surface and then
' brush -coat with cement grout consisting of 1 part
light colored portland cement to 2 parts fine
aggregate, mixed with water to consistency of thick
paint. Cork or wood float grout to fill pits, air
' bubbles and surface holes. Scrape off excess grout
with a trowel, and rub the surface with burlap to
remove any visible grout film.
' 3.08 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
' A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monlithic slab
surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as
hereinafter specified. After screening and consolidating
concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for
' floating. Begin floating when surface water has
disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently
to permit operation of power- driven floats, or both.
' Consolidate surface with power- driven floats, or by
hand - floating if area is small or inaccessible to power
units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance
not exceeding 1/4" in 10' when tested with a 10'
straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after
leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
i
B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab
surfaces to be exposed -to -view, and slab surfaces to be
covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin
film finish coating system. After floating, begin
' first trowel finish operation using a power- driven
trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a
ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consoli-
date concrete surface by final hand - troweling operation,
' free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance,
and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8"
in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind
smooth surface defects which would telegraph through
applied floor covering system.
3.09 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from pre-
mature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
' Start initial curing as soon as free water has dis-
appeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist
' for not less than 72 hours. Begin final curing proce-
dures immediately following initial curing and before
concrete has dried.
I03310
Page 9 of 11
' 79
• • 1
Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance '
with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of
final curing period.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist
curing, by moisture - retaining cover curing, by membrane '
curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
C. Provide moisture curing by following methods: ,
Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with
water.
Continuous water -fog spray.
Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive
cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and
,
keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to
provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with
4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
,
D. Provide moisture -cover curina as follows:
Apply membrane- forming curing compound to concrete
surfaces as soon as final finishing operations are
complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in
continuous operation by power -spray or roller in
accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after
initial application. Maintain continuity of coating
and repair damage during curing period. Do not use
membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be
covered with coating material applied directly to
concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing,
'
damproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and
other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise
acceptable to Architect.
E. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, '
including undersides of beams, supported slabs and
other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms
inplace for full curing period or until formes are
rmeoved. If forms are removed, continue curing by '
methods specified above, as applicable.
F. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such '
as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by
application of appropriate curing compound. Final cure
concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or
finish flooring by use of moisture - retaining cover, ,
unless otherwise directed.
03310
Page 10 of 11
80
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS:
A. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after
placement, only if shores and other vertical supports
have been arranged to permit removal of form facing
material without loosening or disturbing shores and
supports.
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
A. Filling-In. Fill -in holes and openings left in
concrete structures for passage of work by other
trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work
of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure
concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete
filling shown or required to complete work.
END OF SECTION 03310
P
I
I
I
11
03310
Page 11 of 11
i i Bi
SECTION 04200 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of masonry work is indicated on the drawings.
B. Work includes: '
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Setting and attaching all bolts, anchors, inserts,
etc., as furnished by others.
3. Reinforcing steel.
4. Grout and mortar.
5. Cement slurry coat.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,
2.01 MATERIALS• '
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90 Grade A, standard
units 8" x 8" x 16" with minimum face shell thickness
of 1 -1/4 ".
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II Low Alkali.
C. Mortar Sand: ASTM C144.
D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
E. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 40.
F. Watpr: Potable.
I
04200
Page 1 of 3
s2- 1
' • •
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT:
Shall be in accordance with Concrete Masonry Association's
Standard Specifications, 1964 Edition.
3.01 DELIVERY AND PROTECTION:
Masonry materials shall be packed in a manner to prevent
damage from transportation and weather. Cement and lime to
be delivered to the job in the original unopened
containers. Handle masonry material in a manner to prevent
chipping, spalling, cracking or other injury. Store off
i ground and protect from the weather. Dampening of masonry
units to reduce suction is prohibited.
I�
04200
Page 2 of 3
f B3
A. Materials shall be adequately and accurately measured
in suitable calibrated boxes. Shovel measurements will
not be allowed.
B. Sand, cement and water shall be placed in the mixer in
that order. Mix for at least two (2) minutes. Add
lime and continue mixing to a uniform mass, but in no
case less than ten (10) minutes.
C. Use mixers of at least one (1) sack capacity. Batches
requiring fractional sacks will not be permitted.
D. Mortar unused within one (1) hour after initial mixing
shall be discarded and disposed of.
E. Grout: Use two (2) parts pea gravel in mix.
F. Admixture: "Suconem GA" (Grout Aid) Type 2, as
manufactured by Super Concrete Emulsions, Ltd., Los
Angeles, California, or approved equal, and used in
strict accordance with manufacturer's latest printed
recommendations.
2.03 REINFORCING STEEL:
Accurately set and place reinforcing steel and ties in
accordance with the drawings and notes thereon.
Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 40.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY AND PROTECTION:
Masonry materials shall be packed in a manner to prevent
damage from transportation and weather. Cement and lime to
be delivered to the job in the original unopened
containers. Handle masonry material in a manner to prevent
chipping, spalling, cracking or other injury. Store off
i ground and protect from the weather. Dampening of masonry
units to reduce suction is prohibited.
I�
04200
Page 2 of 3
f B3
•
3.02 CURING:
L�
water loss shall be controlled by moistening of masonry
units prior to laying. No water shall be applied to wall
after tooling mortar joints.
3.03 LAYING:
Lay units plumb and true. Carefully cut where necessary to
fit around adjoining construction, inserts, etc. Fit all
angles and corners square and true. All joints shall be
carefully tooled with a flat tool to produce a dense flush
surface, well bonded to block on all edges.
A mixture of cement, sand and water brushed or troweled
over all exposed concrete block walls to coceal C.M.U. and
provide for a level and smooth monolithic appearance.
END OF SECTION 04200
ey
04200
Page 3 of 3
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and other Division -1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
Provide miscellaneous metal fabrications as indicated,
specified and required.
A. Work In This Sections Principal items include:
'
1.
Stairway steel handrails.
2.
Steel ladders.
3.
Miscellaneous framing and supports.
4.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
5.
Steel pipe railings and supports.
6.
Metal Framing System
7.
8.
Sleeve inserts.
Prefabricated steel stairs.
9.
All other miscellaneous metal fabrications
required to complete the work.
Work Not In This Section:
B. Related
1.
Finish Painting.
2.
Setting of anchor bolts and inserts in concrete.
3.
Pre - Engineered structure.
1.03 OUAL_ITY
ASSURANCE:
A. Rpfgrance
Standards: Conform to the following as
applicable:
1.
ArSC Standardat Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges; Specification for
the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings; and Steel Construction Manual.
2.
AWS Standards: AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
I
I
1 es
05500
Page 1 of 8
•
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Refer to Section 01340 for procedures.
A. ShoF Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings fully detailing
all Work of this Section, including accessories,
fastenings, and welding. Include minor connections
and fastenings not indicated or specified to meet
required conditions; indicate in detail on Shop Drawings.
• ► ;� :��►
Protect materials from damage during shipping, handling
and storage. Work showing dents, creases, deformations,
weathering, or other defects is not acceptable. Deliver
welding electrodes to site in unbroken packages bearing
manufacturer's name and contents identification.
Verify conditions according to Section 01400. Verify all
field measurements as required. Report any major
discrepancy between the Drawings and field dimensions to'
Architect before fabrication of Work. Exercise caution
to protect concrete floor surfaces and adjacent Work from
damage.
2.01 BASIC MATERIALS:
A. Furnish materials conforming to the following:
1.
Steel
shapes:
2.
Steel
tubing:
3.
Steel
pipe:
4. Bolts and nuts:
5. Electrodes:
6. Primer:
0
ASTM A36.
ASTM A501, or ASTM A36.
ASTM A120 standard weight
for general use;
ASTM A 53 Grade B where used
for structural purposes.
ASTM A307.
AWS D1.1, E70XX Series as .
required for intended
use.
Red lead per Fed Spec
TT- P -86G,j
Type I, II or III; zinc
chromate per Fed Spec
TT -P -645; or alkyd type
per Fed Spec TT- P -636D.
05500
Page 2 of 8
"Embeco ",
7. Non - Shrink grouts Master Builders
W. R. Grace "Vibrofil",
or equal.
L
8. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 hot dip, 2.0 ounce
psf on actual surface
with minimum 1.8 ounce on
'
any specimen.
9. Galvanizing repair All States Galvanizing.
material: Powder, Drygalv by
American Solder
and Flux, or equal hot
applied material or
anodic zinc -rich
galvanizing.
2.02 GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS:
Conform to the approved submittals, reference standards
as applicable to the Work, and the requirements herein.
Fabricate and form the Work to meet actual installation
conditions as verified at the site. Obtain necessary
templates and information and provide all holes and
drilling indicated or required for securing Work of
other trades to metal fabrications.
A. Welding: Conform to AWS D1.1, as modified by refer-
enced AISC Standards, and as indicated or noted on
Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated or specified,
�.
weld joints by shielded electric -arc method. Grind
exposed welds subject to contact to smooth surfaces
free of holes, slag, or other defects, flush with
adjoining surfaces. No finishing treatment is required
for permanently concealed welds and other exposed welds
except as specified herein. Cut out defective welding
with chisel or air arc and replace.
B. Shop Priming: Clean surfaces according to RISC Speci-
fications. Apply shop coat of metal primer to minimum
1.0 mil dry film thickness. Work primer into joints.
Do not prime galvanized items or items embedded in
concrete or masonry.
C. Galvanizing: Galvanize specified items after fabri-
cation is completed. Produce coating free of
roughness, whiskers, unsightly spangles, icicles,
barbs, sage, and other surface blemishes.
D. Miscel_1_aneou8 items: Fabricate items not specifically
mentioned according to the Drawings, approved shop
drawings, and as required to complete the entire work.
05500
Page 3 of 8
E.
F.
• •
Steel Pipe Railings And Stair Handrails:
1. Fabrication: Fabricate steel pipe railings and
stair handrails to design, dimensions, and details
indicated. Provide railings and handrails members
formed of pipe of sizes and wall thickness
indicated, but not less than that required to
support design loading.
Interconnect railing and handrail members by
butt- welding or welding with internal connectors,
at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated.
05500
Page 4 of B
Rs' 1
,
Galvanize exterior items and shop prime interior items
unless otherwise shown or specified.
Lad ders•
!
1. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with
dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as
'
indicated. Comply with the requirements of ANSI
14.3, except as otherwise indicated.
a. Unless otherwise shown, provide 1/2" x 2 -1/2"
continuous structural steel flat bar side
rails with eased edges.
b. Provide 3/4" diameter solid structural steel
bar rungs, spaced 12" o.c.
2. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld
and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
3. Sap4wxt each ladder at top and bottom and at
intermediate points spaced not more than
5' -0" o.c. Use welded or bolted steel brackets,
designed for adequate support and anchorage, and
,
to hold the ladder clear of the wall surface with
a minimum of 7" clearance from wall to centerline
of rungs. Extend rails 42" above top rung, and
return rails to wall or structure unless other
secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent
structure does not extend above the top rung,
goose -neck the extended rails back to the structure
to provide secure ladder access.
4. Provide non -slj,p surface on the top of each rung,
t
either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide
granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a
type of manufactured rung which is filled with
aluminum oxide grout.
Steel Pipe Railings And Stair Handrails:
1. Fabrication: Fabricate steel pipe railings and
stair handrails to design, dimensions, and details
indicated. Provide railings and handrails members
formed of pipe of sizes and wall thickness
indicated, but not less than that required to
support design loading.
Interconnect railing and handrail members by
butt- welding or welding with internal connectors,
at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated.
05500
Page 4 of B
Rs' 1
'
• •
_
At tee and cross intersections provide coped
joints.
At bends interconnect pipe by means of
prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius
bends, as applicable, of radiuses indicated.
At elbow bends provide mitered joints.
Form bends by use of prefabricated elbow
fittings and radius bends or by bending pipe,
at fabricator's option.
Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in
jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive
configuration required= maintain cylindrical
cross - section of pipe throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of pipe.
Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16" thick
steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated
fittings.
2. Brackets. Flanges. Fittings and Anchors: Provide
wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe
and attachment of railings and handrails to other
work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices
for connecting railings and handrails to concrete.
For railing posts set in concrete provide
sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than
6" long and with an inside diameter not less
than 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of
pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to
bottom of sleeve and of width and length not
less than 1" greater than outside diameter of
sleeve.
Provide friction fit, removable covers designed
to keep sleeves clean and hold top edge of
sleeve 1/2" below finished - surface of concrete.
3. Galvanize exterior steel railings, and interior
steel railings where shown, including pipe, fittings,
brackets, fasteners and other ferrous components.
Provide black steel pipe for interior railings not
indicated otherwise.
1 05500
Page 5 of 8
1 69
• • '
G. Steel Framed Stairs: ,
1. general: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and
arrangements indicated; join pieces together by
welding unless otherwise indicated. Provide
complete stair assemblies including metal framing,
hangers, columns, railings, newels, balusters,
struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other
components necessary for the support of stairs and
platforms and as required to anchor and contain the
stairs on the supporting structure.
2. Stair Framing.: Fabricate stringers of structural
steel channels, or plates, or a combination
thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for
exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of
structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous
framing members as indicated. Bolt or weld headers
to strings, newels and framing members to strings
and headers; fabricate and join so that bolts, if ,
used, do not appear on finish surfaces.
3. Metal Risers. Subtreads, and SubRlatforms: Shape
metal for risers and treads to conform to
configuration shown. Provide thicknesses of
structural steel sheet as required to support total
design loading.
Directly weld risers and treads to stringers,
locate welds on side of metal pans to be
concealed.
4. Finish: Shop prime paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
i
3.01 PREPARATION•
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, ,
diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts,
sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having
integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete
or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to project site.
qO
05500
Page 6 of 8
1]
3.02 INSTALLATIONS
A. General:
1. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide
anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to
in -place construction= including, threaded fasteners
for concrete inserts, through- bolts, lag bolts,
wood screws and other connectors as required.
1
1 9/
05500
Page 7 of S
2. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting,
drilling and fitting required for installation of
miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work
accurately in location, alignment and elevation,
plum, level, true and free of rack, measured
from established lines and levels. Provide
temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for
items which are to be built into concrete,
masonry or similar construction.
3. Fit exposed connections accurately together to
form tight hairline joints. Weld connections
which are not to be left as exposed joints, but
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
-
limitations.
Grind exposed joints smooth and touch -up shop paint
coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized
after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or
screwed field connections.
4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures
of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds made, and methods used in
correcting welding work.
B. Grouting: Provide grouting for Work of the Section as
shown, specified, and required. Use non - shrink grout
and conform to manufacturer's directions.
C. Galvanizing �R pair: Wire brush welds and damaged
coating to clean bright metal. Apply one coat of
galvanizing repair paint where surfaces are concealed
or are to be finish painted. Use the specified hot -
applied galvanizing repair compound where surfaces
remain exposed and unpainted.
1
1 9/
05500
Page 7 of S
•
•
D. Shop Prime Coat Repairs Do not apply metal primer in
wet weather unless steel is protected from dampness and
is dry. Clean field welds, field bolts, and all
damaged shop primer after erection and apply a spot
coat of the same primer used for the shop coat.
E. Fasteners: Provide fasteners and connectors of
approved types as required for the installations,
whether or not indicated. Provide galvanized fasteners
for galvanized items and for exterior use.
END OF SECTION 05500
9�
05500
Page 8 of 8
1
r
1
1
i
i
1
i
1
93
• •
Dim I•.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work
not specified as part of other sections and which is
generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated.
Types of work in this section include rough carpentry
for:
1. Wood framing.
2. Wood ground, nailers, blocking and sleepers.
3. Wood furring.
4. Sheathing.
5. Subflooring.
6. Underlayment.
Delivery and Storages Keep materials dry at all times.
Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp
or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air
circulation within stacks.
: •: •MP •
Coordination; Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe
and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location
of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports
to allow proper attachment of other work.
06100
Page 1 of 6
9y
' • •
' 2.01 FLOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS:
A. T:mher Standards: Comply with PS 20.
H. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1.
C. Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood with
type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit
marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent
finish or without finish.
2.02 MATRRTALS:
9S
A. I. h _ G n aj:
1. Nominal sizes are
indicated, except as shown by
detail dimensions.
Provide actual sizes as
required by PS 20,
for moisture content specified
for each use.
a. Provide dressed
lumber, S4S, unless otherwise
specified.
b. Provide seasoned
lumber with 19% maximum
moisture content
at time of dressing.
2. Framing Lumber (2"
through 4" thick):
a. For 2" x 4" stud
framing, provide "Stud" grade
lumber No. 1 grade
for larger pieces, Douglas
Fir.
b. For structural
framing, provide No. 1 grade,
Douglas Fir.
3. Miscellaneous Lumber:
Provide wood for support or attachment of other
work including cant strips, bucks, nails, blocking,
furring, grounds,
stripping and similar members.
I
Provide lumber of
sizes shown or specified, worked
into shapes shown,
and as follows:
'
Moisture content:
15% maximum for lumber items
not specified
to receive wood preservative
treatment.
'
06100
Page 2 of 6
9S
• • ,
a. Grade: Construction Grade light framing size
lumber of Douglas Fir or board size lumber as
required. Provide construction grade boards or ,
No. 2 boards (WWPA) .
b. Concealed Plywood: Where plywood will be
concealed by other work, provide structural I
,
conforming to product standard PS 1 -24. For
plywood sheathing and subflooring, provide with
exterior glue.
B. Miscellaneous Material:
1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type,
material and finish as indicated and as recommended
by applicable standards, complying with applicable
Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws,
'
bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices.
Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the
size and type recommended by the manufacturer for
each use including recommending nails.
2. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt,
non - perforated, ASTM D 226.
,
2.03 WOOD TREATMENT:
,
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber of plywood is
indicated as "Treated ", or is specified herein to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA
'
Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB
standards listed below. Mark each treated item with
the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.
,
1. Pressure -treat above - ground items with water -borne
preservatives complying with AWPB LP -2. .After
treatment, kiln -dry to a maximum moisture content
,
of 158. Treat indicated items and the following:
a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping,
and similar members in connection with roofing,
flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.
b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring,
r
stripping and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
c. Wood framing members less than 18" above grade.
06100
Page 3 of 6
�6
' 06100
Page 4 of 6
97
2.
Complete fabrication of treated items prior to
treatment, where possible. if cut after treatment,
coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same
chemical used for treatment. Inspect each piece of
lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged
'
or defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION=
'
A. Generals
1.
Discard units of material with defects which might
impair quality of work, and units which are too
small to fabricate work with minimum joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
2.
Set carpentry work accurately to required levels
and lines, with members plumb and true and accu-
rately cut and fitted.
3.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by
anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by
recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on
exposed carpentry work and fill holes. Use common
wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use
'
finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners
of size that will not penetrate members where
opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Make tight connections
1
between members. Install fasteners without split-
ting of wood; predrill as required.
4.
Wood Grounds, Nailers. Blocking and Sleepers.-
a. Provide wherever shown and where required for
screening or attachment of other work. Form to
shapes as shown and cut as required for true
line and level of work to be attached. Coordi-
nate location with other work involved.
b. Attach to auhstratga as required to support
applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
' 06100
Page 4 of 6
97
1 0
C/ IF
• • ,
5.Wood Furrina•
a.
Install Dlumb and level with closure strips at
edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
,
for tolerance of finished work.
Firestop furred spaces on walls at each
,
floor level, with wood blocking or incom-
bustible materials, accurately fitted to
close furred spaces.
b.
Susaended Furrina% Provide size and spacing
shown, including hangers and attachment
devices. Level to a tolerance of 1/8" in 101.
6. Wood
Framing. General:
a.
Provide framing members of sizes and on
spacings shown, and frame openings as shown.
Do not splice structural members between
supports.
,
b.
Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with
recommendations of the N.F.P.A.
,
c. Firestoo concealed spaces with wood blocking
not less than 2" thick, if not blocked by other
framing members. Provide blocking at each
building story level and at ends of joist
spans. '
7. Stud Framing:
a.. General: Provide stud framing where as shown
spaced 16" o.c. with long face perpendicular to
direction of wall or partition. Provide single
bottom plate and double -top plates 2" thick by
width of studs; except single top plate may be
used for non -load- bearing partitions. nail or
anchor plates to supporting construction.
Construct corners and intersections with not'
less than 3 studs. Provide miscellaneous
blocking and framing as shown and as required 1
for support of facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items and trim.
Provide continuous horizontal blocking row ,
at mid - height of single -story partitions,
using 2" thick members of same width as ,
wall or partitions.
06100 ,
Page 5 of 6
a. Generals Provide framing of sizes and spacings
shown. Install with crown edge up and support
b. Frame oyeninas with multiple studs and headers.
Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge
and support on jamb studs.
c. For non- bearing nartitions, provide double -jamb
studs and headers not less than 4" deep for
openings 3' and less in width, and not less
than 6" deep for wider openings.
d. For load - bearing_ double -jamb
partitions# provide
studs for openings 6' and less in width, and
'
triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide
headers of depth shown, or if not shown,
'
provide as recommended by N.F.P.A.
B. Joist Framing:
a. Generals Provide framing of sizes and spacings
' 9. Installation of Plywood:
a. Comnly with recommendations of the American
Plywood Association (APA), for the installation
of plywood.
b. Sheathing and Subfloorina: Install as recom-
mended by APA for spacing of supports or types
of substrates involved in the work. Provide
' thickness shown.
END OF SECTION 06100
I
1 99
06100
Page 6 of 6
shown. Install with crown edge up and support
ends of each member with not less than 1 -1/2"
of bearing on wood or metal. Attach to wood
bearing members by toe nailing or metal connec-
torsl frame to wood supporting members with
wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown, with
metal connectors. Frame openings with headers
and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers;
double headers and trimmers where span of
header exceeds 41. Do not notch in middle
third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 -depth of
'
joist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger
than 1/3 -depth of joist or locate closer than
'
2" from top or bottom. Provide solid blocking
(2" thick by depth of joist) at ends of joists
unless nailed to header or band member.
' 9. Installation of Plywood:
a. Comnly with recommendations of the American
Plywood Association (APA), for the installation
of plywood.
b. Sheathing and Subfloorina: Install as recom-
mended by APA for spacing of supports or types
of substrates involved in the work. Provide
' thickness shown.
END OF SECTION 06100
I
1 99
06100
Page 6 of 6
/00
•
WZIOMACOM
�.
•
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
A. Definition: Prefabricated plywood trusses include
planar structural units consisting of metal plate
connected members which are fabricated from dimension
lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to
delivery to job site.
1.03 SUBMITTALS•
A. Product Data: Submit
covering lumber, metal
process, treatment (if
B.
I
I
I
I
I
fabricator's technical data '
plates, hardware, fabrication
any), handling and erection.
Submit certificate, signed by an officer of
firm, indicating that trusses to be supplied
project comply with indicated requirements.
fabricatin)
for
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing species,
sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch,
span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type
of truss required; type, size, material, finish, desig
value, and location of metal connector plates; and
bearing and anchorage details.
C. Engineering Design: It's the fabricator's responsi-
bility to submit design analysis and test reports
indicating loading, section modulus, assumed allowable
stress, stress diagrams and calculations, and similar
information needed for analysis and to ensure that
trusses comply with requirements.
I
06190
Page I of 3'
1 •
•
A. Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage from
bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is
' not designed to resist or endure.
B. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended
on -site storage and to avoid delaying work of other
trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
' 3.01 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:
A. The Trus Joists if stored prior to erection shall be
stored in a vertical position and protected from the
weather. They shall be handled with care so they are
not damaged.
J
' 06190
Page 2 of 3
2.01 MATERIALS:
A.
The plywood web joists are to be factory manufactured
with structural grade plywood, MICRO -LAM or machine
stress rated lumber flanges and utilizing waterproof
'
type glues; such as the TJI joist manufactured by TRUS
JOIST Corporation.
'
B.
The plywood webs are to be of an APA structural ICD
exterior grade with face veneers installed with grain
running in the vertical direction of the joist and butt
jointed to form a continuous web member. The web shall
be pressure formed and fit into a groove in the center
of the wide face of the flange members so as toform a
'
pressured glue joint at that junction.
2.02 FABRICATION:
The
Trus Joists shall be manufactured in a plant approved
for
fabrication by the building code.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
' 3.01 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:
A. The Trus Joists if stored prior to erection shall be
stored in a vertical position and protected from the
weather. They shall be handled with care so they are
not damaged.
J
' 06190
Page 2 of 3
• •
1
END OF SECTION 06190
06190
Page 3 of 3
I7
r�
L�
1
I
I
1
I
1
1
1
B. The Trus Joists are to be erected and installed in
accordance with the plans, the approved Trus Joist
drawings and installation suggestions. Temporary
construction loads which cause member stresses beyond
design limits are not permitted. Erection bracing in
addition to specified bridging is to be provided to
keep the Trus Joists straight and plumb as required
1
to assure adequate lateral support for the individual
Trus Joist and entire system until the sheathing
material has been applied. The contractor will give
notification prior to enclosing the Trus Joists to
provide opportunity for inspection of the installation.
1
END OF SECTION 06190
06190
Page 3 of 3
I7
r�
L�
1
I
I
1
I
1
1
' SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
rPART 1 - GENERAL
r
i
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work
which is exposed to view, is non - structural, and which
is not specified as part of other sections.
B. Tunes of finish carpentry work in this section include:
1. Wood door frames, casings and stops.
' 06200
Page 1 of 4
/oj
C.
Rough carpentry is specified in another Division -6
section.
'
D.
Finish hardware and wood doors are specified in
Division -8 sections.
E.
Architectural woodwork is specified in another
Division -6 section.
1.03 PRODUCT
DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING:
rA.
Protect finish carpentry materials during transit,
delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
'
soiling and deterioration.
B.
Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until
painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations
which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have
been completed in installation areas. If, due to
unforseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials
must be stored in other than installation areas, store
only in areas meeting requirements specified for
installation areas.
' 06200
Page 1 of 4
/oj
• •
A. Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of
temperature and humidity requirements for finish
carpentry installation areas. Do not install finish
carpentry until required temperature and relative
humidity conditions have been stabilized and will be
maintained in installation areas.
1 ..... -T-Re UsToNsionlon
A. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with
applicable grading rules of the respective grading and
inspecting agency for the species and product indicated.
B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1 /ANSI A199.1.
C. Hardwood Lumber Standard: Comply with National
Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) rules.
D. Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific
product comply with specified provision of the following:
Woodwork Institute of California (WIC) "Manual of
Millwork ".
4. Inspect each piece of lumber and plywood or each
unit of finish carpentry after drying; do not use
twisted, warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or
defective wood.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. General:
1. Net sizes are indicated. Provide dressed or worked
and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured
06200
Page 2 of 4
/D y
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped,
bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately
seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum
of optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of
defective manufacturer with respect to surfaces, sizes
or patterns.
B. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with
no distortions. Shim as required using conealed shims.
Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 810" for plumb and
level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in
flush adjoining 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed
adjoining surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish
cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or
blocking built -in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with counter-
sunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required
for a complete installation. Except where prefinished
matching fasteners heads are required, use fine
finishing nails for exposed nailings, countersunk and
06200
Page 3 of 4
to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to
actual sizes and patterns as shown, unless otherwise
'indicated.
2. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide
seasoned (KD) lumber having a moisture content from
time of manufacture until time of installation not
greater than values required by the applicable
grading rules of the respective grading and inspec-
tting
agency for the species and product indicated.
3. Kiln -dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture
content of 158 for plywood, 198 for lumber.
4. Inspect each piece of lumber and plywood or each
unit of finish carpentry after drying; do not use
twisted, warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or
defective wood.
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped,
bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately
seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum
of optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of
defective manufacturer with respect to surfaces, sizes
or patterns.
B. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with
no distortions. Shim as required using conealed shims.
Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 810" for plumb and
level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in
flush adjoining 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed
adjoining surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish
cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or
blocking built -in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with counter-
sunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required
for a complete installation. Except where prefinished
matching fasteners heads are required, use fine
finishing nails for exposed nailings, countersunk and
06200
Page 3 of 4
filled flush with finished surface, and matching final ,
finish where transparent is indicated.
3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work '
wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and
visually; where not possible to repair properly,
replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi - exposed
surfaces. Touch -up shop - applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas. ,
C. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall
advise Contractor of final protection and maintained '
conditions necessary to ensure that work will be
without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 06200
406
�I
I�
[1
06200 '
Page 4 of 4
I •
r
' Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of each type of architectural woodwork is
shown on drawings.
B. Types of architectural woodwork include the following:
1. Low pressure plastic laminate finished casework.
2. High pressure plastic laminate countertops.
C. Wood doors are specified within Division 8.
' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or
specified, comply with specified provisions of the
' following:
1. Woodwork Institute of California (WIC) "Manual of
Millwork ".
B. Quality Marking: Mark each unit of architectural
woodwork with mill's or Fabricator's identification
and grade mark, located on surfaces which will not
be exposed after installation.
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications
' and installation instructions for each item of
factory- fabricated woodwork.
1. Quality Certification: Submit manufacturer's
(Fabricator's) certification, stating that. the
fabricated work meets the woodwork grade (s)
specified.
�I
06400
Page 1 of 5
• •
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage '
and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, '
grinding and similar operations which could damage,
soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in ,
installation areas. If, due to unforseen circum-
stances, woodwork must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas meeting
requirements specified for installation areas.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of
,
temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork
installation areas. Do not install woodwork until
required temperature and relative humidity have been
'
stabilized and will be maintained in installation
areas.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area
'
as required to maintain moisture content of installed
woodwork within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum
moisture content, from date of installation through
'
remainder of construction period. The fabricator of
woodwork shall determine optimum moisture content
and required temperature and humidity condition.
'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,
2.01 BASIC MATERIALS AND FABRICATION METHODS: '
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
following requirements for architectural woodwork
not specifically indicated as prefabricated or pre- '
finished standard products.
B. Low Pressure Plastic Laminate: Shall be Phillips '
Plywood Melamine.
C. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: Shall be Formica.
D. Quality Standards: For following types of architec-
tural woodwork; comply with indicated standards as
applicable: '
06400 ,
Page 2 of 5
. 1. Wood Casework: WIC Section 14.
2. Plastic Laminate Casework: WIC Section 15.
3. Plastic Laminate Countertops: WIC Section 16.
' E. Design and Construction Features: Comply with details
shown for profile and construction of architectural
' woodwork; and, where not otherwise shown, comply with
applicable Quality Standards, with alternate details as
Fabricator's option.
F. Pre -Cut Oyeninas: Fabricate architectural woodwork
with pre -cut openings, where possible, to receive
hardware. Locate openings accurately and use templates
or roughing -in diagrams for proper size and shape.
Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures seal edges of cutouts
' with a water - resistan coating.
G. Measures: Before proceeding with fabrication of
woodwork required to be fitted to other construction,
obtain measurements and verify dimensions and shop
drawing details as required for accurate fit.
' 2.02 INTERIOR ARCBITECTURAL WOODWORK:
A. Plastic Laminate Overlay Casework:
1. Grade: Economy.
2. Construction: Flush (half) overlay.
3. Facing Laminate: Low - pressure plastic
laminate.
' 4. Core Material: Medium density fiberboard.
5. Exposed Edges: Finished same as facing.
' B. Plastic Laminate Countertops:
' 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
separate plastic laminate countertops (installed
on other casework or other support system as
indicated) to comply with requirements for .
casework for plastic laminate finish.
2. Grade: Economy.
' 06400
Page 3 of 5
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory
materials associated with architectural woodwork.
Mr.
1. Drawer Pulls: BBW 9054 -4 ", Stainless
Steel. Mounted horizontal.
2. Drawer Runners: Blum BS 230E550.
3. Adjustable Shelves:
a. Standards - KV 233
Wall Cabinets - 30" long
Base Cabinets - 18" long
b. Brackets - KV 237
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity con-
ditions in installation areas prior to installing.
B. Prior to installation of architectural woodwork,
examine shop fabricated work for completion, and
complete work as required, including back priming
and removal of packing.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with
no distortions. Shim as required using concealed
shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8' -0" for
plumb and level (including countertops); and with
1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces,
1 /8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and re-
finish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built -in or
directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds,
stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed
fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete
06400
Page 4 of 5
//O
' installation. Except where prefinished matching
fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing
' nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled
flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where
transparent finish is indicated.
' 06400
Page 5 of 5
D.
Casework; Install without distortion so that doors
and drawers will fit openings properly and be
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors
'
and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete the installation of hardware
and accessory items as indicated.
E.
Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other
support systems as indicated.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT,
CLEANING. FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible
to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where
not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
'
B.
Clean hardware, lubricate and make final adjustments
for proper operation.
'
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces.
Touch -up shop - applied finishes to restore damaged or
soiled areas.
D.
Complete the finishing work specified as work,of this
section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or
prior to installation of woodwork.
E.
Protection: Installer of architectural woodwork shall
'
advise Contractor of final protection and maintained
conditions necessary to ensure that work will be
without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 06400
1
' 06400
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 07200 - INSULATION '
PART 1 - GENERAL ,
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS; '
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
,
Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings. work of
this section does not include roof insulation or exterior
wall insulation.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses shown are for
'
thermal conductivity (K -value at 75 F or 24 C)
specified for each material. Provide adjusted
thicknesses as directed for equivalent use of material
'
having a different thermal value, provide appropriate
thickness.
B. Fire and Insulation Ratinas: Comply with
'
fire - resistance, flammability and isulation ratings
indicated, and comply with governing regulations as
interpreted by authorities.
'
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
'
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and
installation instructions for each type of insulation
required.
'
1.05
PRODUCT HANDLING:
General protections: Do not allow insulation materials to
, !
become wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for handling, storage and protection during
installation.
'
11
07200 '
Page 1 of 2
,i2- 1
nwnm n nnn�amm�
1 2.01 MATERIALS:
' A. Interior Sound Attenuated Walls: Noise barrier batt
insulation for wood stud construction, 15" x 94" x
3 1/2 ", R -11 value.
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 3.01 INSPECTION:
' Contractor must examine substrate and conditions under
which insulation work is to be performed and must notify
Architect in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do
' not proceed with insulation work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable
to Architect.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
' 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for
particular conditions of installation in each
' case. If printed instructions are not.available
or do not apply to project conditions, consult
manufacturer's technical representative for
specific recommendations before proceeding with
work.
2. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over
1 entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions, and fill voids with insula-
tion.
' 3. Apply a single layer of insulation or required
thickness, unless otherwise shown or required
i to make up total thickness.
B. General Building Insulation;
' Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated,
complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no
specific method is indicated, use mechanical anchorage
to provide permanent placement and support of units.
END OF SECTION 07200
1 07200
Page 2 of 2
• •
SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS ,
PART 1 - GENERAL '
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
'
Drawings and general provisions of Contrct, including
General Conditions and other Division -1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
'
1.02 [DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. This Section contins specifications pertaining to
all weather - sealing and calking throughout the
project unless specified otherwise, and becomes a
,
part of all sections containing reference to this
Section, or where materials of the types specified
in this Section are required by the drawings.
'
B. The work includes calking and sealing of openings
and joints indicated, specified, and required to
make entire building weatherproof and watertight.
'
C. Specific requirements contained in the various
trade sections making reference to this Section
supersede general or conflicting requirements
'
herein.
1.03 GENERAL REOUIREMENTS:
,
A. Warranty :_ Provide written warranty for all '
calking and sealants against all defects of
material for five years and defects of application
for a period of two years after date of
acceptance. All failures that may occur within '
the warranty period, due to defective application
or materials, upon written notification of such
failure, shall be repaired or replaced with proper '
materials and labor as approved by the Architect,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Submit to the Owner samples of the various types '
(and colors where applicable) of materials
specified, prior to delivery of materials
to the job and the portions of the work for which
the materials are intended.
I
07900 ,
//y Page 1 of 5
C. Deliver materials to the job in original unopened
containers bearing manufacturer's name, product
designation and date of manufacture. Products
upon which the shelf date has expired shall not be
permitted on the job.
' D. Install materials specified herein in compliance
with manufacturer's instructions. Send copies. of
manufacturer's instructions to Owner at least 2
weeks before application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Use sealants of the following types. Unless specified
or directed otherwise, use materials to match color of
' adjacent materials. Where adjacent materials on each
side of the joint are different colors, the Architect
will select sealant colors. If the desired.color is
' not available from one manufacturer, select proper
color from another manufacturer.
' A. Joint Conditions;
1. Joints between metal frame and concrete
Sealant ( #2).
2. Expansion and control joints. Sealant ( #3).
' 3. Exterior sills, jambs, and heads of window
frames, door frames, louvres and similar
openings, and where metal, or other materials
abut or join concrete or each other, shall
have sealant applied around their perimeters.
Sealant ( #2).
' 4. wall joints ( #1).
5. Other exterior joints as indicated or shown.
Sealant ( #1) ( #2) ( #3).
B. Sealant-r.•
1. Sealant #2 shall be a three -part polyepoxide
urethane sealant meeting Federal Specification
TT- S- 00227E, Class A, Type II, such as Tremco
Dymeric, as manufactured by Tremco
Incorporated, Cleveland, Ohio, or equal..
11
07900
��S Page 2 of 5
2. Sealant #2 shall be a one -part solvent cure
acrylic sealant meeting Federal Specification
TT -S -230, such as Tremco Mono, as manufactured ,
by Tremco Incorporated, Cleveland, Ohio, or
equal.
3. Sealant Iii shall be a two -part chemically '
curing polyurethane meeting Federal
Specification TT- S- 00227E, Class At Type I,
(Self - Leveling) or Class At Type II (Non -Sag), '
such as THC- 900/901, as manufactured by Tremco
Incorporated, Cleveland, Ohio, or equal.
C. Primer for sealants shall be as recommended by r
sealant manufacturer.
D. Joint filler for sealant shall be a closed cell, '
non - absorbent, non - staining material such as
Ethafoam as manufactured by Dow or equal.
E. Bondbreakers shall be as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
F. Materials shall be delivered to the job in sealed
'
containers with manufacturer's original labels
attached. Materials shall be used according to
manufacturer's printed instructions. Color of all
,
sealants shall be as selected by the Architect
from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
'
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION;
A. Provide sealant manufacturer's inspection of
conditions prior to start of the work and initial
supervision at the start of each application, in
order to insure that any physical conditions which
would result in defective work are properly
'
corrected before materials are applied, that
properly instructed personnel are available to do
the work, and that proper procedures are being
'
followed. Provide such inspection and supervision
by qualified personnel. Report all unsatisfactory
conditions existing at the time of inspection in
'
writing to the General Contractor for correction
before proceeding with the work.
B. Notify the manufacturer or distributor at least 72
'
hours prior to the time inspection is required.
07900 '
��6 Page 3 of 5
' • •
A. Joints and surfaces which are to be calked or
sealed shall be clean, dry and free of dust, loose
mortar and other foreign materials.
' B. Clean Ferrous metals of all rust, mill scale and
coatings by wire brush, grinding or sandblasting.
Remove oil, grease and /or temporary protective
coatings with high performance cleaners, as
approved by sealant manufacturer.
C. Joint dimensions for sealant should be reviewed
and installed in accordance with sealant
manufacturer's printed instructions. In no case
should the sealant application be less than 1/4
inch wide, and 1/4 inch deep, except in specific
metal -to -metal curtain wall applications, and then
as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Joint depthr for Sealants #l, #2 and #3, shall not
exceed its width for joints ranging from 1/4 inch
to 1/2 inch wide. For joints over 1/2 inch wide,
the depth of sealant shall be no more than 1/2 to
5/8 inch.
D. Concrete joint surfaces shall be wire brushed,
then air -blown clean. The joint interface must be
free of form release agents or chemical retarders
' which may interfere iwth sealant adhesion and
performance.
E. Sealants shall not be applied to concrete joints
where a water repellent or concrete preservative
has been applied prior to calking. Waterproofing
treatments should be applied after calking, when
called for.
F. Do not calk joints until they are in compliance
' with requirements of the approved manufacturer of
the materials, the details as shown on the
drawings, and the specific requirements of other
sections of the specification.
3.03 APPLICATION:
' A. Install joint backing with a blunt instrument so
as not to puncture the surface skin. Size of
joint backing should be determined by taking the
' joint width and adding 258 to assure proper
compression of backer cord.
07900
��� Page 4 of * 5
C�
•
B. Apply sealant with a calking gun, using proper
nozzles. Use sufficient pressure to properly fill
the joints with sealant to the back -up material.
C. After joints have been completely filled, they
shall be neatly tooled to eliminate air pockets or
voids, and to provide a smooth, neat appearing
finish in intimate contact with interfaces and
without lapping over onto exposed finished faces.
After tooling, surface of sealant shall be free of
ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded
impurities.
D. Immediately clean adjacent materials which have
been soiled; leave work in a neat, clean
condition.
E. Major authorities recommend a 40OF minimum
application temperature for joint sealing
instllations because of the possibility of
moisture and /or frost contamination on sealing
surfaces. However, it is recognized that
applications must be made at lower temperatures.
When this is necessary, steps must be taken to
assure clean, dry, frost -free surfaces, and must
be approved by the Architect.
Workmanship shall b
accordance with the
compliance with the
manufacturer of the
Contractor shall be
workmanship of jobs
END OF SECTION
a of the highest quality in
best practice and in strict
recommendations of the
materials being used. The
prepared to show evidence of
at least three years old.
07900
��8 Page 5 of 5
n
7
LJ
LJ
•
•
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK;
A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is shown
on drawings and in schedules.
B. Types of door required include the following:
Solid core flush wood doors with paint grade veneer.
C. Factory - fitting to frames (prefitting) and factory-
, preparation for hardware (premarching) for wood doors
is at the option of the Contractor.
1.03 OU 1ITY ASSURANCE.
A. Quality Standards: Provide wood flush doors complying
with the following standards:
ANSI /NWMA I.S.I. "Industry Standard for Wood Flush
Doors" published by National Woodwork Manufacturer's
Association (NWMA).
B. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer
to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and
' construction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
' Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data for
each type of wood doorr including details of core and edge
construction.
L.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect wood doors during transit# storage and handling to
prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with
requirements of referenced ANSI standard and recom-
08210
Page 1 of 4
1/
mendations of NWMA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, '
Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Door ", as well as
with manufacturer's instructions. '
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers
which correlate with designation system used on shop ,
drawings, frames and hardware, using temporary, remov-
able or concealed markings.
1.06 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTY: ,
A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement
on door manufacturer's standard form signed by '
Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to
repair or replace defective doors which have warped
(bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core '
construction in face veneers, or do not conform to
tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWI. Warranty shall
be in effect during following period of time after date
of substantial completion. '
1. Solid Core Flush Interior Doors:
Life of installation. '
B. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement or
refinishing of doors where Contractor's work contri-
buted to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's
warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS:
A. Solid Core Doors for OQacue Finish: Comply with the '
following requirements:
1. Faces: Medium density overlay over standard ,
thickness hardwood face veneers.
2. Grade: Custom ,
3. Construction: Particleboard core, 5 ply.
2.02 PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE: '
A. Prefit and premachine wood doors at factory.
(Contractors Option). '
08210
Page 2 of 4
lo2o
• •
' B. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for pre -
fitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting
' of doors. Comply with final hardware schedules and
door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates
and other essential information required to ensure
' proper fit of doors and hardware.
1. Take accurate field measurements of hardware
mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before proceeding with machining in
factory.
i
3.01 INSPECTION:
A.
Reguire Installer to examine door frames, after their
installation, and doors, prior to their hanging, for
the following purposes:
1. To verify that frames comply with indicated
'
require-
ments for type, size, location, and swing character-
,
istics and have been installed with plumb jambs and
level heads.
2. To verify that doors are free of defects that could
'
cause their rejection.
B.
Obtain Installer's written report listing conditions
detrimental to compliance with requirements of this
'
section.
C.
no not allow Installer to proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION=
'
A.
Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in
installation area prior to hanging.
'
B.
Hardware: For installation see Division -8 "Finish
Hardware" section of these specifications.
'
C.
Manufacturers Instructions; Install wood doors to
comply with manufacturer's instructions and of refer-
enced AWI standard and as indicated.
1
'
08210
Page 3 of 4
08210 '
Page 4 of 4
/ .2:L
• •
!
D.
Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with
uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do
not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by
manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors, if
'
any. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces
after fitting and machining.
'
1. Fitting Clearances: For non -rated doors provide
clearances of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/16" per
leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 118"
from bottom of door to top of decorative floor
finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of
door to top of threshold.
'
2. Bevel non -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge
edges.
'
E.
Prefit Doors: Fit to frames and machine for hardware
to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as
required for fit and uniform clearance at each edge.
'
F.
Job - Site- Finished Doors: See painting section in
Division 9 of these specifications for finishing
'
requirements.
3.03 ADJUST
AND CLEAN:
,
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing
or operate freely, as directed by Owner.
'
B.
Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged
during installation, as directed by Owner.
,
C.
Institute protective measures as recommended and
accepted by door manufacturer to assure that wood doors
will be without damage or deterioration at time of
'
substantial completion.
1
END OF SECTION 08210
1
08210 '
Page 4 of 4
/ .2:L
•\ 1 : 1 • / ;1 • \ �•�•
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General And Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK;
ExtAnt of overhead coiling doors is shown on drawings.
' Provide complete operating door assemblies including door
curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism, hardware,
' operators, and installation accessories.
Field tainting is specified in Division -9.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit
produced by one manufacturer, including hardware,
accessories# mounting and installation components.
Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish
overhead coiling door units,by one manufacturer for
entire project.
1 B. Inaert and Anchorages; Furnish inserts and.anchoring
devices which must be set in concrete or built into
masonry for installation of units. Provide setting
' drawings, templates, instructions and directions for
installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery
with other work to avoid delay.
' See concrete sections of these specifications for
installation of inserts and anchorage devices.
' C. Wind Loadings Design and reinforce overhead coiling
doors to withstand a 20 lb. per sq. ft. wind loading
pressure unless otherwise indicated.
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data,
' roughing -in diagrams, and installation instructions for
' 08330
Page 1 of 5
123
• • '
each type and size of overhead coiling door. Provide ,
operating instructions and maintenance information.
B. ShoR Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special ,
components and installations which are not fully
dimensioned or detailed on manufacturers data sheets.
11
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
'
requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
,
Atlas Door Corp.
The Cookson Co.
'
2.02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION:
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain
of interlocking slates designed to withstand required
wind loading, of continuous length for width of door
without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide
slats of material gage recommended by door manufacturer
for size and type of door required, and as follows:
1. Curtain composed of aluminum slats and end locks as
required by U.L. Specifications. Slat sections
shall be No. 10 G.A. finish shall be baked acrylic
primer, slat No. 9 Design.
'
B. Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after ,
fabrication secured to curtain slats with galvanized
rivets. Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for
curtain alignment and resistance against lateral
movement. '
C. Bottom Bar: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than
1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1 /8" thick, either galvanized or '
stainless steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of
curtain slats.
06330 '
Page 2 of 5
1.2 y
2.03
1 is
F. Weather Seals; Provide vinyl
weatherstripping for exterior
where otherwise indicated. At
thick continuous strip secured
guide.
or neoprene
exposed doors, except
door heads, use 1/8"
to exterior side of jamb
08330
Page 3 of 5
D. Door shall be electrically operated with (model) 5 -
3/4 Cookson Power Operator U.L. Listing in accordance
with U.L. Bulletin 325. Electrical characteristics are
330 Volt, 3 Phase. This unit shall consist of a Heavy
Duty, Hoist -Type Moter, gears designed to AGMA
1
standards, running in multi- temperature lubricant;
mechanical self - adjusting brake; Rotary Limit Switch to
set Open and Close positions; NEMA 1 Motor Controller
with overcurrent protection and one NEMA 1 - 3 position
Pushbutton Station Open -Close -Stop. Each power
operator shall be equipped with an automatic chain
(crank) operator which is operable when the power is
OFF without the use of pull levers or chains. ..
Electrical Contractor shall mount the Controller and /or
Pushbutton Station and shall furnish the disconnect
switch and all conduit wire and wiring in accordance
with the wiring diagram furnished by the door
contractor.
1. Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or
neoprene between angles as a weather seal and
cushion bumper for manually operated doors unless
shown as an overlapping joint.
E. Curtain Jamb Guides; Fabricate curtain jamb guides of
steel angles, or channels and angles with sufficient
depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build -up
units with minimum 3/16" thick steel sections,
galvanized after fabrication. Slot blot holes for
track adjustment.
Secure continuous wall angle to wall by 3/8" minimum
bolts at not more than 30" o.c., unless closer spacing
recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles
above door opening head to support coil brackets,
unless otherwise indicated. Place anchor bolts on
exterior wall guides so they are concealed when door-is
in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides
to prevent over - travel of curtain, and continuous bar
'
for holding windlocks.
2.03
1 is
F. Weather Seals; Provide vinyl
weatherstripping for exterior
where otherwise indicated. At
thick continuous strip secured
guide.
or neoprene
exposed doors, except
door heads, use 1/8"
to exterior side of jamb
08330
Page 3 of 5
2.04
/ .26
• •
A. Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel
helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft
and mounted in a spring barrel and connected to door
curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease - sealed
bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for
rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of
hot - formed structural quality carbon steel, welded or
seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall
thickness to support roll -up of curtain without
distortion of slats and limit barrel deflection to not
more than 0.03" per ft. of span under full load.
Provide spring balance of one or more oil- tempered,
heat - treated steel helical torsion springs. Size
springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with
uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel.
provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of
springs to barrel and shaft.
Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of
case - hardened steel, or required size to hold fixed
spring ends and carry torsional load.
C. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's
standard design, either cast iron or cold - rolled steel
plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain.
D. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and
operating mechanism at opening head, and act as weather
seal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is
attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for
stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface - mounted
hoods, and any portion of between -jamb mounting
projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate
support brackets as required to prevent sag.
Fabricate steel hoods for door of not less than 24
gage hot -dip galvanized steel sheet with G 90 zinc
coating, complying with ASTM A 525. Phosphate
treat before fabrication.
- RITUF
Shop clean and prime ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces,
exposed and unexposed, except faying and lubricated
surfaces, with door manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive
primer.
08330
Page 4 of 5
' • •
1 3.01 INSTALLATION:
' Install door and operating equipment complete with
necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors,
inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with
final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as
specified herein.
Upon completion of installation including work by other
trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily,
�j free from warp, twist of distortion and fitting
weathertight for entire perimeter.
1 3.02 GUARANTEE: Furnish a written guarantee to Owner in
accordance with the Supplementary General Conditions for a
period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 08330
I
I
I
I
I
I
' 08330
Page 5 of 5
• •
SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: '
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
Genreal Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work specified in this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known
commercially which are required for swing, sliding and
folding doors, except special types of unique and
non - matching hardware specified in the same section as the
door and door frame. Types of items in this section
include (but are not necessarily limited to):
1. Hinges
2. Lock cylinders and keys
3. Lock and latch sets
4. Bolts
5. Closers
6. Cabinet hardware
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and
lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from only one
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as
offering products complying with requirements.
B. Schedule Designations: Except as otherwise indicated,
the use of one manufacturer's numeric designation
system in schedules does not imply that another
manufacturer's products will not be acceptable, unless
they are not equal in design, size, weight, finish,
function, or other quality of significance. However,
do not make substitutions after the Owner's acceptance
of hardware suppliers completed hardware schedule.
C. Oualifications: Hardware supplier shall be a direct
factory contract supplier who has in his employment an
experienced hardware consultant who is available at all
reasonable times during the course of the Work for
project hardware consultation to the Owner and
Contractor.
08700 '
Page 1 of 7
is 8
I
11
1
I
LI
i
I
I
I
I
E1
I
I
[1
D. Exit Doors: Openable at all times from the inside
without the use of a key or any special knowledge or
effort.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data
containing drawings or cuts of all hardware items at
same time Hardware Schedule is submitted. Make
submittal in a neat brochure form and include an index
list of all items, with manufacturer's names and
catalog numbers. if proposing a substitute, submit
that product data attached to one showing specified
item and indicated savings to be made.
1. Include a list of all manufacturers used and their
nearest representative with address and phone
number.
C. Hardware Schedule: Submit six copies of Schedule at
earliest possible date prior to delivery of hardware.
Organize Scheudle into "Hardware Sets" with an index of
doors and heading, indicating comlete designations of
every item required for each door or opening. Include
the following information:
1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of
each hardware item.
2. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set cross referenced to
indications on drawings both on floor plans and in
Door Schedule.
5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes,
etc. contained in schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware.
7. Door and frame sizes and materials.
D. Keying Schedules Submit three copies of separate
detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's
final instructions on keying of locks has been
fulfilled.
1.05 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. INdividually package each unit of finish hardware
complete with proper fastening and appurtenances,
clearly marked on the outside to indicate contents and
specific locations in the Work.
08700
Page 2 of 7
/a r
1.06
C.
:7
B. Deliver packaged hardware items at the times and to the
locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed
by the Contractor.
A. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work.
Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on
doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing,
security and similar requirements indicated, as
necessary for proper installation and function,
regardless of omissions or conflicts in the
information on the Contract Documents. Deliver
individually packaged hardware items at the times and
to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as
directed by the Contractor.
B. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each
fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
factory- prepared for the installation of hardware.
Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other
work, to confirm that adequate provisions will be made
for the proper installation of hardware.
1.07 WARRANTY:
A. Provide guarantee from hardware supplier as follows:
1. Closers: Five years, except electronic closers,
two years.
2. All other Hardware. Two years.
A. Approval of manufacturers other than
those listed shall
be in accordance
with Section 01630.
Item:
Manufacturer:
Or Equal:
Hinges
Lawrence
Stanley,,
McKinney
Locks
Corbin
No known
equal
Panics
Von Duprin
No known
equal
Closers
LCN
No known
equal
Kickpl.ates
Builders Brass
Quality
Stops & Holders
Builders Brass
Quality
08700
Page 3 of 7
/30
V • •
' 08700
Page 4 of 7
Item: Manufacturer: Or Equal:
Thresholds Reese Zero
Seals & Bottom Reese Zero
Key Cabinets Lund Tel Kee
'
Automatic Flush
Bolts Door Controls Ives, G.J.
Coordinators Door Controls Ives, G.J.
B.
Furnish all items of hardware required to complete, the
work. Items of hardware not definitely specified shall
be provided of a type of quality suitable to the
service required and comparable to other hardware.
C.
Where the exact types of hardware specified are not
adaptable to the finished shape or size of the members
requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as
nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as
the type specified, subject to Owner's approval.
D.
Carefully inspect project for location and the extent
of the builders hardware required to complete the work.
Where there is a conflict between the Specifications
and the existing hardware, furnish builders hardware to
match exiting.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A.
Locksets: All locksets and latchsets shall be mortise
type. Strikes shall be 16 gauge curved steel, bronze
or brass with 2" deep box construction, and have lips
of sufficient length to clear trim and protect
clothing.
1. All locks shall have minimum 1/2 -inch throw. All
deadbolts shall have 1 -inch minimum throw.
2. Comply with requirements of local security
ordinances.
3. Lock series and design: Corbin L9900 - 789L.
B.
Hinge: Outswinging exterior doors shall have
non - removable (NRP) pin. All hinge open widths shall
be minimum, but of sufficient size to permit door to
swing 180 degrees. Furnish hinges with stainless steel
pins and concealed bearings.
i
1. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 5 -inch height.
Add one for each additional 2 foot height.
2. Exterior hinges with prime finish shall have
Lawrence CB base.
3. Size listed in Hardware Sets indicates height.
' 08700
Page 4 of 7
C. Surface Door Closers: To be of the full rack and
pinion type with removable non - ferrous case and cast
iron body, complete with sex bolts and grommets. Place
closers inside building, stairs, rooms, etc. Closers
shall be non - handed, non - sized, and adjustable.
1. Provide size 2 through 6 unless otherwise specified
at exterior.
2. Provide size 1 through 4 at interior.
3. Flush transom offset brackets shall be used where
parallel arm closers are listed for doors with
fixed panels over.
4. Drop brackets are required at narrow head rails.
D. Screws: All exposed screws shall be Phillips head.
2.03 FINISH:
A. Generally to be BHMA 626 dull chromium.
TUrkmao(OWCOMIN
A. Keying of cylinder locks shall be coordinated with the
Owner. For estimate use masterkeying charge. Keying
system shall be approved by Owner's representative in
writing. Furnish construction key system with keys
which can be rendered inoperative by the turn of the
change key. Stamp all keys "Do Not Duplicate ". Use
all 1/4 bows.
1. Key system is "Corbin ".
A. Hinges:
1. Bottom Hinge: 10- inches from door bottom to bottoa
of hinge.
2. Top Hinge: 5- inches from door top to top of hinge.
3. Center Hinge: Center between top and bottom hinge.
4. Extra Hinge: 6- inches from bottom of top hinge to
top of extra hinge.
B. Lock: 38- inches from bottom of door to center of lever
or knob.
C. Deadlock Strike: 60- inches from floor, centered.
08700
Page 5 of 7
/,7.)—
0
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A.
Install each hardware item per manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Do not install
surface mounted items until finishes have been
completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and
true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substrate as necessary for proper
installation and operation.
3.03 ADJUSTING
AND CLEANING:
A.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and
each door, to ensure proper operation or function of
every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to
operate freely and smoothly.
3.04 SCHEDULE
OF FINISH HARDWARE:
A.
Numeric legend of listed manufacturers:
1) Lawrence 6) Reese Enterprises
3) Von Duprin 7) Glynn Johnson
4) LCN 11) Door Controls
5) Builders Brass 18) Corbin
B.
The items listed in the following "Schedule of Finish
Hardware" shall conform throughout to the requirements
of the foregoing specification. The last column.of
numbers in the Hardware Schedule refers to the
manufacturer abbreviation listed above.
C.
The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which
Hardware Set is used with each door.
SCHEUDLE OF FINISH HARDWARE
HW -1
Each door to have
3
Hinges BB4101 -4 -1/2 in. 1
1
Lock 789L -L9923 18
1
Threshold Standard Building
1 Set Seal 755 Head & Jamb 6
All
doors with Hardware #1 are by building supplier and
Hardware shall be coordinated with them.
08700
Page 6 of 7
HW -2
Each door to have
3 Hinges BB4101 -4 -1/2 in.
1 Lock 789L -L9923
1 Surface Closer 4040 -EDA
1 Threshold Standard Building
1 Set Seal 755 Head & Jamb
Door No. 2 is a building standard door.
HW -3
Each door to have
3 Hinges BB 4101 -4 -1/2 in.
1 Lock 789L -L9520
1 Stop F8063X Riser as Req.
HW -4
Each door to have
1 Cylinder For master keying
Balance of Hardware by Gate Supplier.
END OF SECTION 08700
/3Y
1
18
4
6
1
18
5
08700
Page 7 of 7
•
�. M ,
•
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definitions: "Glass" includes prime glass, processed
glassr and fabricated glass products. "Glazing" in-
cludes glass installation and materials used to
install glass. Types of work in this section include
glass and glazing for:
1. Entrance doors
2. Window wall
3. Interior fixed glass windows
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Prime Glass Manufacturer= One of the following for
each type /color /pattern of glass:
1.04 SUBMITTALS•
product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for
each glazing material and fabricated glass product required
including installation and maintenance instructions. .
08800
Page 1 of 5
1 ,3s
ASG Industries, Inc.
C -E Glass Division
Ford Glass Company
Hordis Bros.
Libbey -Owens -Ford Company
PPG Industries, Inc.
or Equal
B. prime Glans Standard: FS DD -G -451.
1.04 SUBMITTALS•
product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for
each glazing material and fabricated glass product required
including installation and maintenance instructions. .
08800
Page 1 of 5
1 ,3s
2.01
2.02
2.03
/36
C
C]
A. Solar Bronze Float Glass: Type I, Class 1, quality q3,
1/4" thick.
B. dear Float Glass: Type I, Class I, quality q3, 1/4"
thick.
PROCESSED GLASS:
A. Tempered Glass: Provide prime glass of color and
type indicated, which has been heat treated to
strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5
times annealed strength.
A. General: Provide color of exposed sealant /compound
indicated or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, or black
if no color is so selected. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for selection of hardness, depending
upon the location of each application, conditions at
time of installation, and performance requirements as
indicated. Select materials, and variations or modifi-
cations, carefully for compatibility with surfaces
contacted in the installation.
B. 1 -Part Silicone Rubber Glazier Sealant: Elastomeric
silicone sealant complying with FS TT -S- 0015431
Class At non -sag. Provide acid type recommended by
manufacturer where only nonporous bond surfaces
are contacted; provided nonacid type recommended
by manufacturer where one or more porous bond
surfaces are contacted.
C. Oleo- Resinous Glazing Compound: Oil based glazing
compound; nonstaining and nonbleeding; provide
proper type as required for either channel or
face glazing; comply with FS TT -G -410 for face
glazing compound.
D. yin�vl Foam Glazing Tane: Closed cell, flexible,
self - adhesive, non - extruding, polyvinyl chloride
foam tape; recommended by manufacturer for exterior,
exposed, watertight installation of glass, with
only nominal pressure in the glazing channel;
comply with ASTM D 1667.
08800
Page 2 of 5
A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to
receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate.
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric
sealants are used.
I
' 08800
Page 3 of 5
1 �3�
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS
GLAZING MATERIALS=
A.
Cleaners. Primers and Saalerss Type recommended by
sealant or gasket manufacturer.
B.
Sa tting Blocks= Neoprene or EPDM, 70 -90 durometer
hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants
used.
C.
Spacers= Neoprene or EPDM, 40 -50 durometer hardness
with proven compatibility with sealants used.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.01 STANDARDS
AND PERFORMANCE;
A.
Watertight and airtight installation of each glass
product is required, except as otherwise shown.. Each
installation must withstand normal temperature changes,
wind loading, without failure including loss of break-
age of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing
materials and other defects in the work.
B.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and
installation, and subsequent operation of glazed
components of the work. During installation, discard
units with significant edge damage or other imperfec-
tions.
C.
Comely with ombined recommandatinnn and technical
reports by manufacturers of glass and glazing products
as used in each glazing channel, and with recommenda-
tions of Flat Glass Marketing Association "Glazing
Manual," except where more stringent requirements
are indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
FOR GLAZING;
A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to
receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate.
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric
sealants are used.
I
' 08800
Page 3 of 5
1 �3�
• • 1
B. A921y primer or sealant to joint surfaces where
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.03 GLAZING:
A.
Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet,
located 1 /4th of glass width from each corner. Set
blocks in thin course of heel -bead compound, if any.
B.
Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and
spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united
inches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes
are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of
spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape use thickness
slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
C.
Set units of g, ass in each series with uniformity
of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
D.
Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and
compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away
from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets
to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to
eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
E.
Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass
and stops or frames promptly after installation,
and eliminate stains and discolorations.
F.
Where wedge - shaped gaskets are driven into one side of
channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite
side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket
will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to
movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or
by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail
in cured heel bead.
3.04 CURE,
PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
A.
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately
upon installation, by use of crossed streamers
attached to framing and held away from glass.
Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove
non - permanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure
sealants for high early strength and durability.
11
08800
Page 4 of 5
�3� i
•
•
B. Remove and replace glass which is broken# ch.ippedr
cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during
construction period, including natural causes,
accidents and vandalism.
C. Waah and poliah 9iass on both faces not more than
4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of substantial completion
in each area of project. Comply with glass product
manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.
END OF SECTION 08800
1
I
139
08800
Page 5 of 5
• •
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: #
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General And Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: i
A. The extent of window wall work (WW) is indicated by
drawings and provisions of this section.
B. Primary_comnonents of window wall work (work of this
section) include the following, including work
cross - referenced to other specification sections for
requirements:
Glass and glazing work of window wall, and of
window units in window wall system; refer to "Glass
and Glazing" section.
Interior window wall work which basically matches a
exterior work.
Joint sealer work which is
components of window wall
Sealers" section.
associated with
system; refer to "Joint
Anchorages, shims, fasteners, accessories and
support brackets for components of window wall
system.
Door frames and entrance doors.
C. Drawings: Plans, elevations and details.show spacings
of members, and profile and similar dimensional
requirements of window wall work. minor deviations
will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's
standard products when, in Architect's sole judgement,
such deviations do not materially detract from design
concept or intended performances.
08905
Page 1 of 4
I
11
I
I
1
iyo i
Drawinga are based one one manufacturer's standard
window wall system. Another standard system of a
similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable when
differences do not materially detract from design
concept or intended performances, as judges solely by
Architect.
1.03 QUALITY
ASSURANCE:
A.
General:
1. Installer: A firm with not less than 5 years of
successful experience in erection of stock window
wall systems similar to systems required for-this
project.
2. Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of
"Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and
Entrance Guide Specifications Manual" by AAMA.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for
materials and fabrication of window wall work, and
instructions /recommendations for installation and
maintenance. Include certified test reports showing
compliance with requirements where a test method is
indicated.
B.
Shoo Drawings: Submit drawings showing adaptation of
manufacturer's standard system to project; include
typical unit elevations at 1/2" scale and details at 3"
scale, to show dimensioning, member profiles, anchorage
system, interface with building construction, and
glazing. Show section moduli of wind -load- bearing
members, and calculations of stresses and deflections
for performance under design loading. Show clearly on
shop drawings where and how manufacturer's system
deviated from contract drawings and these
specifications.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of type and color finish, on
12" long sections of formed shapes.
D.
Warranty:
'
Provide written warranty, signed by Contractor and
installer, agreeing to repair or replace defective
materials and workmanship of window wall work (see
primary components listing in this section) during
5 -year warranty period. "Defective" is defined to
include abnormal deterioration /aging /weathering, glass
08905
Page 2 of 4
•
breakage, failure of operational.parts to function
normally, deterioration or discoloration of finishes,
and failure of system to meet performance requirements
including structural and infiltration. Warranty and
enforcement shall not deprive Owner of other available
actions, rights or remedies.
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide window wall products of the following
manufacturer:
Carmel Steel Products, Santa Fe Springs, CA
or equal (no known equal).
• - T . f .
1. System Designations:
a. Single story exterior window and door frames:
system 373
2. Finish: Finish shall be Carmel's Spectra -Guard II,
or equal (no known equal) consisting of a triple
protective coating:
1. Door Designation: Series 367 W.S. (Wide Stile).
2. Construction: All stiles and rails shall be 5"
thick. Height of top rail to be 4 ". Height of
bottom rail to be 10 ".
3. Glazing provisions: Glazing materials shall be
extruded polyisobutylene tape 1/16" x 3/8" and
applied to inside face of the fixed stop. The
inside stop shall be snap -on type with an extruded
neoprene compression bulb seal furnished by door
manufacturer.
Weatherstripping on double acting center hung.doors
shall be polypropylene pile furnished by door
manufacturer.
08905
Page 3 of 4
/Y11
B. at time of substantial completion, clean window wall
system thoroughly and polish glass. Demonstrate proper
cleaning methods and materials to Owner's.maintenanc.e
personnel.
END OF SECTION 08905
08905
Page 4 of 4
/y3
4. Finish: Finish shall match window wall system.
Refer to Paragraph 2.02, A, 2.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTaLLATION
/ERECTION:
A.
Qomply with manufacturer's instructions for protection,
handling and installation of fabricated window wall
components, with particular attention and care in
preservation of applied finishes. Discard or remove
and replace damaged members.
B.
grection Tolerances: Install window wall components
plumb, level, accurately aligned and accurately located
in reference to column lines and floor levels.
C.
anchor components securely in place in manner
indicated, shimming and allowing for required movements
and provide separators and isolators to prevent
corrosion and electrolytic deterioration, and to
prevent "freeze -up" of moving joints.
D.
Qlazina: Specified in "Glass and Glazing" sections.
E.
Sealants and Joint Fillers: Specified in "Joint
Sealers" sections.
3.02 CLEANING:
A.
Clean completed system, inside and out, promptly after
erection and installation of glass and sealants (allow
for nominal cure of liquid sealants). Window wall
Installer shall advise Contractor of proper and
adequate protection and cleaning procedures during
remainder of construction period, so that system will
be without damage and deterioration at time of
acceptance.
B. at time of substantial completion, clean window wall
system thoroughly and polish glass. Demonstrate proper
cleaning methods and materials to Owner's.maintenanc.e
personnel.
END OF SECTION 08905
08905
Page 4 of 4
/y3
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
General Requirements sections, apply to work of this
section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Tvoes of work include:
A. Gypsum drywall applied to wood stud framing.
B. Drywall finishing (joint tape- and - compound treatment).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Gypsum Board Standard: GA -216 by Gypsum Association.
B. Metal SuRRort Standard: ASTM C 754.
C. Fire - Resistance Rating: Comply with governing regulations,
provide materials and installations identical with
applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed
by recognized authorities, including UL.
D. Manufacturer:
Obtain
gypsum board products from a
single
manufacturer,
or from manufacturers recommended
by the
prime manufacturer
of gypsum boards.
E. Allowable
Tolerances:
1/16" offsets between planes of
board
faces, and 1/8"
in 8' -0" for plumb, level, warp
and bow.
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver, identify,
store
a_nd protect gypsum drywall
materials
to comply with
referenced standards.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
Environmental
Conditions:
Comply with referenced standards.
LJ
09250
Page 1 of 5
/W I i
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Metal
Sgpyort Materials:
1.
Gold Bond Building Products Div.= National Gypsum
Co.
2.
Milcor Division; Inryco inc.
3.
United States Gypsum Co.
4.
Western Metal Lath Co. or equal.
or equal.
B.
Gypsum
Board and Related Products:
1.
Flintkote Products, Genstar Building Materials Co.
2.
Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum
Co.
3.
United States Gypsum Co.
or equal.
2.02 GYPSUM
BOARD;
A.
Gypsum
Wallboard:
1.
General: Provide gypsum wallboard material,
complying with ASTM C36 of types, edge
configuration, and thickness as indicated and,
where not otherwise indicated, comply.with thickness
requirements of GA -216 for each application and
support spacing. Comply with requirements for
fire - resistance ratings as indicated. Provide
material in sheets of maximum length available
which will minimize end joints.
2.
Types:
a. Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Edges: Tapered.
4.
Thickness: 518".
09250
Rage 2 of 5
/yf
0 0 1
2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard trim
accessories of types indicated for drywall work,
formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated,
with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges
for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment
of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads
and L -type edge trim - beads.
2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
A. General: ASTM C 475; type recommended by the manu-
facturer for the application indicated, except as
otherwise indicated.
B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing type. '
C. Joint Compound: Ready -mixed vinyl -type for interior
use.
Grade: 2 separate grades; one specifically for
bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one
for topping and sanding.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum
drywall work of the type and grade recommended by the
manufacturer of the gypsum board.
B. Gvspsum Board Fasteners: Comply with ASTM C 646.
r
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 METHODS OF GYPSUM DRYWALL APPLICATION:
A. Single -layer Applicationt Install exposed gypsum
board.
1. On partitions /walls apply gypsum board vertically, .
unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet
lengths which will minimize end joints.
A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to
anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten
09250
Page 3 of 5
/$4
gypsum board to the supports. Otherwiser fasten
flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Install metal corner beads at external corners of
drywall work.
C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum
board would otherwise be exposed or semi - exposed.
Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound
except where semi - finishing type is indicated..
Install L- type.trim where work is tightly abutted to
other work. Install U -type trim where edge is
exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant - filled.
3.03 FINISHING OF DRYWALL=
A. Generals Apply treatment at gypsum board joints
(both directions), flanges of trim accessories,
penetrations, fasteners heads, surface defects and
elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration.
Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges,
using type of compound recommended by manufacturer.
1. Apply Joint tans at joints between gypsum boards,
except where a trim accessory is indicated.
2. ARp1x joint compound in 3 coats (not including
prefill of openings in base), and sand between
last 2 coats and after last coat.
3. A uniformly thin layer of joint compound shall be
applied over the joint approximately 4" wide. The
tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded
into the compound leaving sufficient joint compound
under the tape to provide proper bond. Ceiling.and
wall angles and inside corner angles shall be
reinforced with the tape folded to conform to the
angle and embedded into the compound.
4. After compound is thoroughly dry, as per time
specified on compound container, the tape shall be
covered with a coat of joint compound spread over
the tape, approximately 3" on each side of the
taper and feathered out at the edge. After
thoroughly dry, another coat of joint compound
shall be applied with a slight, uniform crown over
the joint. This coat shall be smooth and the edges
feathered approximately 3" beyond the preceding
coat.
09250
Page 4 of 5
T IY7
Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures
for protecting gypsum drywall work from damage and
deterioration during remainder of construction period.
i
END OF SECTION 09250
I
I
A
I
I
I
09250
Page 5 of 5
�y8 %
5.
All inside corners shall be coated with at least
one coat of joint compound with the edges feathered
out.
6.
All nail or screw heads or dimples shall receive
three coats of compound. Apply as each coat is
applied to the joints.
7.
Flanges of wallboard corner beads shall be concealed
by at least two coats of compound. The second coat
shall be feathered out approximately 9" on both
sides of the exposed metal nose.
8.
After each application of compound to joints and
nail heads when dry lightly sand to remove
irregularities. Use caution not to excessively
damage the face paper of the wallboard. All
wallboard and treated areas shall be smooth and
ready for decoration.
3.04 PROTECTION
OF WORK;
Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures
for protecting gypsum drywall work from damage and
deterioration during remainder of construction period.
i
END OF SECTION 09250
I
I
A
I
I
I
09250
Page 5 of 5
�y8 %
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
Extent of resilient tile flooring and accessories is shown
on drawings and in schedules.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Product Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's
technical data and installation instructions for each
type of resilient tile flooring and accessory. .
B. $empies: Submit 3 sets of samples of each type, color,
and finish of resilient flooring and accessory required,
indicating full range of color and pattern variation.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufac-
turer's recommended maintenance practices for each type
of resilient flooring and accessory required.
D. Replacement Material: After completion of work,
deliver to project site replacement materials from same
manufactured lot as materials installed, and as follows:
Tile flooring, not less than one box for each 50
boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, size, and
color installed.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain minimum temperature of 650F (180C) in spaces
to receive resilient flooring for at least 40 hours
prior to installation, during installation, and for not
less than 48 hours after installation. gubsequently,
maintain minimum temperature of 55 F (13 C) in areas
where work is completed.
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other
finishing operations, including painting, have been
09660
Page 1 of 5
/519
completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs and
environmental conditions must be within limits
recommended by manufacturer of products being
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standards.
B. Floor Tile:
1. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile as manufactured by
Rentile Floors, Azrock or equal and complying to
Federal Specification SS- T -312B, Type IV. Floor
tile will be selected by the Architect. l
2. Size: 12" x 12"
3. Gauge: 3/32"
C. Base:
I. Rubber top set cove base complying to Federal
Specification SS- W -40a, Type I. Base will be
selected by the Architect from the Commercial
Series.
2. Sizes: 4"
3. Thickness: 1/8"
E. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as
recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material
and substrate conditions.
F. Concrete Slab Primer: Non - staining type as recommended
by flooring manufacturer.
09660
Page 2 of 5
/SO
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Contractor must examine areas and conditions under which
resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and
must notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental
to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected in manner acceptable to Architect.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and
inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation
indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full
responsibility for completed work.
1. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring
manufacturer for filling small cracks and depres-
sions in subfloors.
2. Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to deter-
mine that concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured
and ready to receive flooring.
3. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by
flooring manufacturer, prior to application of
adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's
directions.
3.03 INSTALLATION;
A. General•
r1. Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict
compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds,
nosings, and edgings. Scribe around obstructions
to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and
straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door
reveals, and into closets and similar openings.
2. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that
are in place or plainly marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on
subfloor. Use chalk or other non - permanent marking
device.
09660
Page 3 of 5
3.04
•
•
casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or
,
areas where base is required. Install base in
lengths as long as practicable, with preformed
corner units, with mitered or coped inside corners.
3. Tightly cement flooring
to subbase
without open
cracks, voids, raising
and puckering
at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader
marks, or other
turer's installation instructions.
surface imperfections.
Band roll
flooring at
A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes,
perimeter of each covered area to
assure adhesion.
B. Tile Floors:
Kraft Paper or other covering.
1. Lay the from center marks established with prin-
cipal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that
tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width.
Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less
than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square
to room axis, unless otherwise shown.
2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile
from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and
packaged. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures.
Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not
acceptable.
Lay tile with grain running in one direction.
C. Accessories: I
1. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters,
casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or
areas where base is required. Install base in
lengths as long as practicable, with preformed
corner units, with mitered or coped inside corners.
Tightly bond base to backing throughout length of
each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal
and vertical surfaces.
2. Apply resilient accessories at stair systems as
indicated and in strict accordance with manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes,
using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring
manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy
Kraft Paper or other covering.
B. Finishing: After completion of project and just prior
to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors
and accessories.
09660
Page 4 of 5
/S.Z '
1 • •
C. Anply polish and buff, with type of polish, number of
coats, and buffing procedures in compliance with
flooring manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 09660
I
I
1
1
1
I
09660
Page 5 of 5
V3
15-Y
• • ,
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: I
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections,
apply to the work specified in this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
OF WORK:
A.
Extent of painting work is shown on drawings and
schedules, and as herein specified.
B.
The work includes painting and finishing of interior
and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout
project, except as otherwise indicated.
Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint
specified are in addition to shop - priming and
surface treatment specified under other sections of
work.
C.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical
and electrical work includes all exposed work in all
occupied areas except as noted on drawings. Work will
include but is not limited to the following:
Piping, pipe hangers, and supports
Ductwork, insulation
Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports
Conduit and fittings
Switch gear
Accessories
D.
"Paint" as used herein means all coating systems
materials, including primers, emulsions, enamel,
stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied mater-
ials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish
coats.
E.
Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are
designated in "schedules ", except where natural finish
of material is specifically noted as a surface not to
be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifi-
cally mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar mater-
ials or areas. If color or finish is not designated,
09900
Page 1 of 9
i
• •
Architect will select these from standard colors
H. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated,
painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or
ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible
areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility
Itunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
I. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized
aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper,
bronze and similar finished materials will not require
finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Qgerating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating
units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve
and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing
devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish
painting, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Do not paint over any code - required labels, such as
Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any
equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical infor-
mation including paint label analysis and application
instructions for each material proposed for use.
B. Samples: Submit samples for Owner's review of color
and texture only. Provide a listing of material and
application for each coat of each finish sample.
09900
Page 2 of 9
�55�
available for materials systems specified.
F. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming
of ferrous metal items is included under various
sections for structural steely miscellaneous metal,
hollow metal work, and similar items.
G. Pre- Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not
include painting when factory- finishing or installer -
finishing is specified for such items as (but not
limited to) pre- engineered building panels (interior
and exterior), acoustic materials, architectural
woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and elec-
trical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear
and distribution cabinets, elevator entrance frames,
doors and equipment.
H. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated,
painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or
ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible
areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility
Itunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
I. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized
aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper,
bronze and similar finished materials will not require
finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Qgerating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating
units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve
and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing
devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish
painting, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Do not paint over any code - required labels, such as
Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any
equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical infor-
mation including paint label analysis and application
instructions for each material proposed for use.
B. Samples: Submit samples for Owner's review of color
and texture only. Provide a listing of material and
application for each coat of each finish sample.
09900
Page 2 of 9
�55�
On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each
color material, with texture to simulate actual
conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by
Architect until acceptable sheen, color, and
texture is achieved.
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened
packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and
label, and following information:
Name or title of material.
Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Manufacturer's name.
Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle
constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Apply water -base paints
only when temperature of
surfaces to be painted
°F
and sur6oundiBg air temperatures
are between 50 (10 C)
and 90 F (32 C), unless
otherwise permitted by
paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
B. Apply solvent- thinned paints
only when temperature of
surfaces to be0painted
and susround�ng air temperatures
are between 45 F (7 C)
and 95 F (35 C), unless
otherwise permitted by
paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when
,
relative humidity exceeds 858; or to damp or wet
surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint
manufacturer's printed
instructions.
D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if
areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and
heated within temperature limits specified by paint
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
09900 ,
Page 3 of 9
/S6
1 • •
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES:
A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings
as regularly manufactured by acceptable pain materials
manufacturers. materials not displaying manufacturer's
identification as a standard, best -grade product will
not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or
materials are not intended to imply that products
of name manufacturers are required to exclusion of
equivalent products of other manufacturers.
B. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer
as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint
manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
I
09900
Page 4 of 9
�/ 5 7
A.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are
indicated in "schedules" of the contract documents.
B.
Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color
chips for surfaces to be painted.
Use representative colors when preparing samples for
review.
C.
Color Pigments: Pure, non - fading, applicable types to
suit substrates and service indicated.
D.
Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are
compatible with prime paints used. Review other
sections of these specifications in which prime paints
are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total
coatings system for various substrates. Upon request
from other trades, furnish information on charac-
teristics of finish materials proposed for use, to
ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide
barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and
reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of
any anticipated problems using specified coating
systems with substrates primed by others.
2.02 MATERIAL
QUALITY:
A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings
as regularly manufactured by acceptable pain materials
manufacturers. materials not displaying manufacturer's
identification as a standard, best -grade product will
not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or
materials are not intended to imply that products
of name manufacturers are required to exclusion of
equivalent products of other manufacturers.
B. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer
as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint
manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
I
09900
Page 4 of 9
�/ 5 7
I
• �.
I
2.03 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (EPS):
Provide the following paint systems for various substrates
as indicated (on the drawings and specified herein).
EPS -1 $, aster: I
1st
Coat
fi
2nd
Coat: Exterior Flat Acrylic Emulsion.
2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5
mils.
EPS -2
Ferrous Metal:
,1st
Coat: Zinc - Yellow -Iron Oxide Primer.
2nd
Coat
fi
3rd
Coat: Exterior Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
(Match as required)
2.04 ,INTERIOR
PAINT SYSTEMS (IPS):
Provide
the following paint systems for various substrates
as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
IPS -1
CGyasum Drywall (DWI. Eggshell:
1st Coat: Latex Primer.
2nd Coat
fi
3rd Coat: Eggshell Alkyd Enamel.
,
IPS -2
Gypsum Drywall (DW). Gloss:
1st Coat: Latex Primer.
2nd Coat
fi
3rd Coat: Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
IPS -3
RQod, Gloss:
1st Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoater.
i
2nd Coat
3rd Coat: Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
11
09900
Page 5 of 9 {
/578 r {
IPS -4 Ferrous Metal:
1st Coat: Red Lead Primer.
2nd Coat
3rd Coat: Match as Required.
L _1
B. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined
surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items
in place and not to be finish - painted, or provide
surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation
and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for
complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces.
Following completion of painting of each space or area,
reinstall removed items.
09900
Page . 6 of 9
/5 9
All 2
coat painted
finish coats
over primer with total dry
film
thickness not
less than 2.5
mils.
L _1
B. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined
surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items
in place and not to be finish - painted, or provide
surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation
and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for
complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces.
Following completion of painting of each space or area,
reinstall removed items.
09900
Page . 6 of 9
/5 9
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A.
Contractor must examine areas and conditions under
which painting work is to be applied and notify
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to
proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Architect.
B.
Starting of painting work will be construed as
Contractors acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within any particular area.
C.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture,
scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental
to formation of a durable paint film.
3.02 SURFACE
PREPARATION:
A.
generals Perform preparation and cleaning procedures
in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions
and as herein specified, for each particular substrate
condition.
L _1
B. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined
surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items
in place and not to be finish - painted, or provide
surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation
and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for
complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces.
Following completion of painting of each space or area,
reinstall removed items.
09900
Page . 6 of 9
/5 9
3.03
3.04
160
• • 1
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered
containers. Maintain containers used in storage,
mixing and application of paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture
of uniform density, and stir as required application.
Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film,
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
APPLICATION:
A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited
for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or
other conditions show through final coat of paint,
until paint film is of uniform finish, color and
appearance. Give special attention to insure that
surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
09900
Page 7 of 9
[I
C. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or
surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to
mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so
that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall
onto wet, newly - painted surfaces.
D. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not
galvanized or shop- coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose
mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or
mechanical cleaning.
Touch -up shop- applied prime coats wherever damaged or
bare, where required by other sections of these specifi-
cations. Clean and touch -up with same type shop
primer.
E. Galvanized & Aluminum: Clean free of oil and surface
contaminants with non - petroleum based solvent.
MATERIALS PREPARATION:
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered
containers. Maintain containers used in storage,
mixing and application of paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture
of uniform density, and stir as required application.
Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film,
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
APPLICATION:
A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited
for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or
other conditions show through final coat of paint,
until paint film is of uniform finish, color and
appearance. Give special attention to insure that
surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
09900
Page 7 of 9
[I
1 • •
I
I
I
I
I
:J
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.05
2. Finish exterior doors
edges same as exterior
indicated.
on tops, bottoms and side
faces, unless otherwise
3. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat.
4. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which
have been shop - primed and touch -up painted, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first -coat material to
surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable
after preparation and before subsequent surface deter-
ioration.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to
permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has
dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
stick under moderate thumb pressure, and application of
another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less
than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to
establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or,
if not indicated, as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
D. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is
required to be painted or finished, and which has not
been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat
with no burn - through or other defects due to insuffi-
cient sealing.
E. Pigmented (Opague) Finishes: Completely cover to
provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish,
color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or
other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
F. ComRlated Work: Match approved samples for color,
texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work
not in compliance with specified requirements.
A. Clean -Up: During progress
discarded paint materials,
end of each work day.
of work, remove from site
rubbish, cans and rags at
09900
Page 8 of 9
B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to
be painted or not, against damage by painting and
finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning,
repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable
to Architect.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect
newly - painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others for
protection of their work, after completion of
painting operations.
2. At the completion of work of other trades, touch -up
and restore all damaged or defaced painted
.surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09900
09900
Page 9 of 9
/6.Z
l+
11
1 is3
SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Provide and install wall cover in toilet room as
scheduled, indicated or specified including, but not
limited to:
1. Wall covering
2. Miscellaneous trim
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Fiberglass Wallboard: Duratuf wall panels as
manufactured by Duratuf Fiberglass, Pre- finished
Wallboard Co., San Jose, Calif. Panels shall be 3/32"
thick.
B. Miscellaneous Trim: Aluminum cap moldings and vertical
divider boards at all edges.
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Duratuf shall be stored in undamaged condition as
packaged by the manufacturer with manufacturer's seals
and labels intact.
B. Care shall be taken preventing damage during delivery,
handling and storage.
09950
Page 1 of 2
3.02 INSTALLATION OF WALL COVERING:
Install where shown on drawings according to manufacturer
recommended procedures using drive rivets and escutcheons
and provide and install all trim at outside and inside
cornersr top and all joints. I
END OF SECTION 09950
iL< y
I
a
I .
I
I
I
I
09950 1
Page 2 of 2
1 !
I
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of wire mesh partitions is shown on
drawings.
B. Lock cylinder
C. Enclosure at vertical lift is part of Section
14430.
1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer: Provide wire mesh partitions as
complete units produced by a single manufacturer,
including necessary mounting accessories,
fittings, and fastenings.
Provide wire mesh partitions by one of the
following:
Acorn Wire and Iron Works, Inc.
King Wire Partitions, Inc.
Superior Wire and Metal Products, Inc.
B. Field Measurements:
Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to
ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for
adjustments and fitting wherever taking of field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
C. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring
devices which must be set in concrete or built
into wall, ceiling or countertop for installation
of mesh partition work. Coordinate delivery of
inserts and anchorages with other work to avoid
delay.
10601
Page 1 of 3
0 • 1
C. Vertical Members: 1 -1/4" x 5/8" 1/8" cold - rolled ,
steel C- Section channels with 1/4" bolt holes
approximately 15" o.c.
D. Horizontal Members: 1" x 1/2" x 1 /8" cold - rolled
steel channels, mortised and tenoned to vertical
members.
E. Horizontal Reinforcing Members: 1" x 1/2" x 1/8"
cold - rolled steel channel with wire woven through,
or two 1" x 3/8" channels bolted or riveted to
each side of mesh, and secured to vertical
members. Provide number of horizontal reinforcing
members to suit panel height as recommended by
partition manufacturer.
F. Tog Capping Bars:
2 -1/4" x 1" cold - rolled steel
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
to top
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical
U =bolts spaced
not more
data and installation insturctions for materials
G. Corner Posts:
required.
1 -1/4" x 1/8" angles with
B.
Shop Drawinas: Submit shop drawings for
to align
with bolt holes in
fabrication and erection of wire mesh partitions.
vertical frame
members,
Include plans, elevations, and large scale details
showing anchorage and accessory items. Provide
,
location template drawings for items supported or
anchored to permanent construction.
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
AND FABRICATION:
A.
General: Do not use components less than sizes
indicated; use large size components as
recommended by partition component manufacturer.
B.
Mesh: 10 gage (0.135 ") crimped steel wire woven
into 1 -1/2" mesh, securely clinched to frame
members.
C. Vertical Members: 1 -1/4" x 5/8" 1/8" cold - rolled ,
steel C- Section channels with 1/4" bolt holes
approximately 15" o.c.
D. Horizontal Members: 1" x 1/2" x 1 /8" cold - rolled
steel channels, mortised and tenoned to vertical
members.
E. Horizontal Reinforcing Members: 1" x 1/2" x 1/8"
cold - rolled steel channel with wire woven through,
or two 1" x 3/8" channels bolted or riveted to
each side of mesh, and secured to vertical
members. Provide number of horizontal reinforcing
members to suit panel height as recommended by
partition manufacturer.
F. Tog Capping Bars:
2 -1/4" x 1" cold - rolled steel
channels, secured
to top
framing channel with 1/4"
U =bolts spaced
not more
than 28" o.c.
G. Corner Posts:
1 -1/4" x
1 -1/4" x 1/8" angles with
1/4" bolt holes
to align
with bolt holes in
vertical frame
members,
and floor plate.
10601
Page 2 of 3
ECG
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. provide all bolts, hardware, and accessories for
complete installation.
B. Erect partitions plumb, rigid, properly aligned,
and securely fastened in place, complying with
drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Provide additional field bracing as shown or
necessary for rigid, secure installation.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Adjust moving components for smooth operation
without binding.
B. Touch -up damaged finish after completion of
installation using field - applied paint to match
color of shop - applied finish.
I
10601
Page 3 of 3
1167
H.
Floor Shoes: Cast iron, sized to suit vertical
framing and to provide approximately 3" clear
space between finished floor and bottom horizontal
frame members. Furnish units with set screw for
leveling adjustment.
I.
Hinged Door: Door frame of 1 -1/4" x 1/2" x 1/8"
channel with 1 -1/4" x 1 /8" flat bar cover plate on
3 sides, and matching 1/8" thick angle strike bar
and cover on lock side. Provide 1 -1/2 pair butt
hinges riveted or welded to door and frame, and
bronze mortise type cylinder lock operated by key
outside with recessed knob inside. Align bottom
of door with bottom of adjacent panels.
J.
Provide cylinders for lock, keyed and masterkeyed
to building system.
K.
Sliding Window: Frame and track per manufacturer
standard. Provide latch device and hold open.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. provide all bolts, hardware, and accessories for
complete installation.
B. Erect partitions plumb, rigid, properly aligned,
and securely fastened in place, complying with
drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Provide additional field bracing as shown or
necessary for rigid, secure installation.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Adjust moving components for smooth operation
without binding.
B. Touch -up damaged finish after completion of
installation using field - applied paint to match
color of shop - applied finish.
I
10601
Page 3 of 3
1167
• •
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES r
PART 1 - GENERAL '
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: ,
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including.
General Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, '
apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of toilet accessory is shown on
drawings and schedules.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations ■
with other work to avoid interference and to assure
proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
B. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for t
each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in
same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Manufacturer: Provide toilet accessories as
manufactured by Bobrick Washroom.Equip., Inc., Parker
Inc. or equal.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and
installation instructions for each toilet accessory.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS: r
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No.
4 finish, 22 gage minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled, commercial quality ASTM A
366, 20 gage minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required
for applied finish.
10800 '
Page 1 of 3
/6� t
I
I
r
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Li
1 /6 y
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60.
D. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electrodeposited
on base metal, ASTM B 4561 Type SC2.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot -dip
galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same
material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where
concealed.
r � p; •
General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of
toilet accessory units are not permitted, except where
otherwise indicated. Wherever locks are required for a
particular type of toilet accessory, provide same keying
throughout project. Furnish two keys for each lock.
Manufacturer: Bobrick, Bradley or approved equal. Refer
to the Drawings for "Toilet Accessory Key ".
A. Surface mounted toilet tissue dispenser - S.S.
B. Grab bar - 48 ", 18 ga. type 304, S.S., concealed
mounting, 1 -1/2" diameter.
C. Grab bar - 36 ", 18 ga. type 304, S.S. concealed
mounting, 1 -1/2" diameter.
D. Surface mounted paper towel dispenser type B -262,
S.S.
E. Recessed medicine cabinet type B -397, S.S.
3.01 INSPECTION:
Contractor must examine substrates, previously installed
inserts and anchorages necessary for mounting of toilet
accessories, and other conditions under which installation
10800
Page 2 of 3
3.02
• •
is to occur, and must notify Architect in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Architect.
Install toilet accessory units in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners which are
appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of
unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in
locations indicated.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN;
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and
verify that mechanisms function smoothly.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing
protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
/7d
10800
Page 3 of 3
1 • •
i
,I
1 /7/
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of loading dock equipment is indicated on
drawings.
B. Types of loading dock equipment include the following:
1. Laminated tread bumpers
2. Mechanical dock leveler
C. Concrete work for dock leveler pits is specified in
Division 3.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Dock Leveler Standard: Comply with applicable
requirements of ANSI MH14.1 for construction and
operation of dock levelers (fixed dockboards) except as
otherwise indicated.
Provide dock leveler as complete units produced by a
single manufacturer, including necessary accessories,
fittings and anchorages.
1.04 SUBMITTALS;
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and
installation instructions for each type of loading dock
equipment, including installation details.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication
and erection of dock levelers. Include plans,
elevations, and large scale details. Show anchorages
and accessory items. Provide location template
drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent
construction.
11160
Page 1 of 5
• • 1,
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance
and service data, including address and telephone
number of nearest authorized service representative.
II
Ll
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
of one of the following:
Manufacturers of Bumpers: '
Blue Giant Equipment Corp.
Durable Mat Company
Equipment Co, of America
Kelley Company, Inc.
The McGuire Co., Inc.
Pawling Rubber Corp.
Manufacturers of Dock Leveler:
Blue Giant Equipment Co.
Kelley Company, Inc.
The McGuire Company, Inc.
Overhead Door Corp.
Rite -Hite Corp.
A. Dock Bumpers•
Laminated Tread Bumpers: Provide dock bumper units of
size indicated, fabricated of multiple plies cut from
fabric - reinforced rubber truck tires to a uniform
thickness. Laminate plies under pressure on 3/4"
diameter steel supporting rods which are welded and
bolted to 1/4" thick structural steel angle closures
with predrilled anchorholes. Size angles to provide
not less than l" of tread plies extending beyond face
of closure angles.
Thickness of Tread Piles: Not less than 4 -1/2 ". ,
B. Dock Levelers:
1. Qgneral: Provide manufacturer's standard dock
levelers of type, function, operation, capacity,
size and construction indicated, complete with
controls, safety devices, and accessories, except
as otherwise indicated.
11160
Page 2 of 5
17-2-
2. T12 : Except as otherwise indicated, provide
recessed hinged lip dock levelers designed for
permanent installation in concrete pits preformed
in edge of loading platform, at locations
indicated.
3. Function: Provide dock leveler units which
compensate for differences in height between truck
bed and loading platform in the following manner.
a. Vertical Travel: Minimum working range for
'
dock leveler ramps of 12" above and 12" below
adjoining platform level, with an operating
range above platform level of sufficient
height to enable lip to extend and clear
truck bed before contact.
b. Automatic Vertical Compensation: Floating
travel of ramp with lip extended and resting
on truck bed, to compensate automatically
for upward or downward movement of truck bed
during unloading and loading.
c. Automatic Lateral Compensation: Tilting of
ramp with lip extended and resting on truck
bed, to compensate automatically for canted
truck beds, of up to 4" over width of ramp.
d. yip Operation: Extension and support,
automatically, of hinged lip on edge of
ramp of manufacturer's standard mechanism
to enable lip to rest on truck bed over
working range of dock leveler yet allow
lip to yield under impact of incoming truck;
with subsequent, automatic retraction of
lip upon truck departure.
Length of Lip Extension: Not less than
'
16" from edge of ramp nor less than 12"
in front of dock bumpers.
4. Operation: Provide manufacturer's standard
1
operating system as follows:
a. Mechanical System: Spring operated raising
and walk -down lowering of unloaded ramp.
Equip units with upward- biased spring
counterbalancing mechanism controlled by
a hold -down device. Raise ramp to top
limit of operating range by operating
recessed control handle in ramp to disengage
11160
Page 3 of 5
1173
• • 1
hold -down device. Lower ramp below plat- '
form level with lip retracted by operating
auxiliary recessed control handle to '
release support legs.
5. Rated Capacity-: Provide dock levelers capable of ,
supporting the following gross moving load.without
permanent deflection or distortion as determined by
actual tests in compliance with ANSI MH14.1 '
requirements for rated capacity of fixed
dockboards:
a. 20,000 lbs.
'
b. Cross Traffic Support: Provide support of
ramp at platform level in stored position
with lip retracted by manufacturer's standard
method as follows:
c. Lip engaged in saddles with auxiliary hinged
safety legs which function to prevent raised
ramp's free -fall past a position slightly
below platform level (1 "- 1'1/2 ") and to
support lowered ramp as well as to stop its
,
free -fall at one or more fixed intermediate
positions below platform level.
d. Lip enaaced in saddles with safety stops
which act to support lowered ramp with
lip retracted at fixed positions below
platform level.
e. Hinged support leas.
Contractor has option of selecting any
method indicated above.
,
6. Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard dock
leveler construction for type and capacity of units
indicated, consisting of frame made of structural
and formed steel shapes; and platform, including
hinged lip, fabricated from non -skid steel plate.
Design and fabricate assembly to withstand
deformation during operating and stored phases of
'
service for use intended. Chamfer lip edge to
minimize obstructing wheels of material handling
vehicles. Include 2 dock bumpers attached to
frame.
1
11160 ,
Page 4 of 5
/ /7y 1
• •
7. Finish and Color: Provide manufacturer's standard
' baked enamel finish system over steel surfaces
wihch have been cleaned and pretreated to obtain
optimum paint bond. Paint toe guards yellow to
comply with ANSI Z53.1 requirements and remainder
of surfaces in manufacturer's standard color unless
othewise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION•
Coordinate and furnish anchorages with templates, diagrams,
and instructions for their installations, for loading dock
equipment indicated to be attached to or recessed into
concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of
these items to project site.
A. INSTALLATION:
1. General: Comply with manufacturer's detailed
instructions in installing loading dock equipment.
' 2. Dock Bumners: Attach dock bumpers to structure to
comply with requirements indicatd for spacing,
arrangement, position relative to top of platform,
and anchorage.
' a. Fielded Attachment: Plug weld anchor holes in
contact with steel inserts and fillet weld at
other locations.
3. Dock Levelers: Coordinate forming of pit to ensure
that recess is adequate to accommodate leveler in
proper relationship to loading platform. Attach
leveler to platform construction to comply with
manufacturer's directions.
. B. Adiust and an:
Make necessary adjustments for safe, efficient
operation of loading dock equipment.
' After installation, restore marred abraded surfaces to
original condition.
END OF SECTION 11160
11160
Page 5 of 5
>46
• •
PART 1 - GENERAL '
1.01 BELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work specified in this '
Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: '
The extent of the Pre- Engineered Building is as shown on
the Drawings. The building is a rigid frame -clear span,
single story with mezzanine at one end. '
A. The intent of these specifications and drawings is to
establish a quality and performance level for
structural design, material, durability and
workmanship.
B. All bidders must conform strictly to these ,
specifications in their bid.
C. The building shall be the design of a manufacturer who '
is regularly engaged in the fabrication of
pre- engineered structures. All materials shall be new,
unused, free from defect and of American manufacture. ,
D. Manufacturer's standard components may be used,
providing components, accessories, and complete
structure conform to Architectural Design Appearance
shown and to specified requirements.
E. Manufacture shall include: mezzanine structure, ,
miscellaneous supports for roll -up doors, and framing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ,
The following standards and criteria (of most recent issue)
shall be used where applicable in the structural design of
the building. Design shall conform to City of Newport.
Beach codes and ordinances and U.B.C.
A. Design Criteria:
Structural Framing: Design primary and secondary
structural members and exterior covering materials for ,
applicable loads and combinations of loads in
accordance with the Metal Building Manufaturer's
Association's (MBMA) "Design Practices Manual ".
13120
Page 1 of 13
r
LJ
L
I
I
1.04
I
1
1 ,>>
Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and
above the weight of the metal building system such as
sprinkler systems and mechanical systems.
Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from
combinations of loads that produce the maximum
allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in
MBMA's "Design Practices Manual ".
C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide pre- engineered
metal buildings as produced by a manufacturer with not
less than 5 years successful experience in the
fabrication of pre- engineered metal buildings of the
type and quality required.
A. Shoo Drawings: Submit complete
showing anchor bolts settings,
roof framing, transverse cross
covering and trim details, and
details to clearly indicated pr
building components.
erection drawings
sidewall, endwall, and
sections, doors,
accessory installation
oper assembly of
13120
Page 2 of 13
1
Structural Steel: For the design of structural steel
members, comply with the requirements of the American
Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC)
"Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" for design
requirements and allowable stresses.
Light Gage Steels For the design of light gage steel
members, comply with the requirements of the American
Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI) "Specification for
the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and
"Design of Light Gage Steel Diaphragms" for design
'
requirements and allowable stresses.
For welded connections, comply with the American
Welding Society's (AWS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas
Welding in Building Construction" for welding
procedures.
B. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary
and collateral loads, are indicated on drawings.
Basic design loads include, in addition to dead load,
live load, wind load and seismic load of building and
mezzanine
'
Auxiliary loads include loads such as overhead roll -up
.
doors and equipment.
LJ
L
I
I
1.04
I
1
1 ,>>
Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and
above the weight of the metal building system such as
sprinkler systems and mechanical systems.
Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from
combinations of loads that produce the maximum
allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in
MBMA's "Design Practices Manual ".
C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide pre- engineered
metal buildings as produced by a manufacturer with not
less than 5 years successful experience in the
fabrication of pre- engineered metal buildings of the
type and quality required.
A. Shoo Drawings: Submit complete
showing anchor bolts settings,
roof framing, transverse cross
covering and trim details, and
details to clearly indicated pr
building components.
erection drawings
sidewall, endwall, and
sections, doors,
accessory installation
oper assembly of
13120
Page 2 of 13
/78
•
•
1
A. Durability of the roof panels due to rupture,
strucutral failure or perforation shall be warranted
for a period of 20 years by the building manufacturer.
B. The exterior color (baked -on or laminated) finish for
the wall panels shall be warranted by the building
manufacturer for twenty (20) years against blistering, ,
13120 1
Page 3 of 13
1
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product
information, specifications and installation
instructions for building components and accessories.
'
C. Certification:
1. All bidders must submit with their bid proposal a
letter from the metal building manufacturer
certifying that the building proposed will be
furnished to meet or exceed all the above design
load criteria and that all structural design will
be in strict conformance with the applicable code
and listed specifications.
'
2. After the awarding of the contract, complete
structural analysis shall be submitted by the metal
building manufacturer to the OWNER or his AGENT
,
upon request for same.
1.05 PERMITS•
Building manufacturer shall prepare engineering
calculations and drawings for the building. He shall
submit them to the Building Department having jurisdiction
,
for plan checking and obtain necessary building permits
prior to fabrication and erection.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver and store prefabricated components, sheets,
panels, and other manufactured items so they will not
be damaged or deformed.
B. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with
,
tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated
covering. Store metal sheets or panels so that water
accumulations will drain freely. Do not store sheets
'
or panels in contact with other materials which might
cause staining.
1.07 WARRANTY:
A. Durability of the roof panels due to rupture,
strucutral failure or perforation shall be warranted
for a period of 20 years by the building manufacturer.
B. The exterior color (baked -on or laminated) finish for
the wall panels shall be warranted by the building
manufacturer for twenty (20) years against blistering, ,
13120 1
Page 3 of 13
1
L]
L_I
i
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
1/7,9
peeling, cracking, flaking, checking and chipping.
Excessive color change and chalking shall be warranted
for twenty (20) years. Color change shall, not exceed 5
N.B.S. units (per ASTM D- 2244.64T) and chalking shall
not be less than a rating of 8 per ASTM D -659.
C. A specimen copy
clearly stating
is valid.
of the warranty must accompany the bid,
the conditions under which the warranty
Subject to compliance with drawings and specifications,
provide the Pre- Engineered Building Systems provided by one
of the following:
Armco Building Systems, Inc.
Inryco, Inc.
Varco- Pruden Buildings
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Rigid Frames: Fabricate rigid frames from hot - rolled
structural steel. Provide built -up "I -beam" shape or
open web type rigid frames consisting of either tapered
or paralled flange beams and tapered columns complete
with attachment plates, bearing plates and splice
members. Factory drill frames for bolted field
assembly.
Provide length of span and spacing of frames as
indicated. Slight variations in length of span and
frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet
manufacturer's standard.
B. End Wall Columns: Provide factory welded, shop painted
endwall columns of built -up "I" shape or cold- formed
sections. Fabricated endwall columns of not less than
14 ga. material.
� � 1 • ♦ • 1 • 4 - 11 •
1. The configuration, thickness and spacing of the
purlins shall be the building manufacturer's
standard. The allowable design capacity of
cold- formed purlin members shall be calculated in
13120
Page 4 of 13
D.
E.
VIV
2. Openings larger than 8 inches, round or square, '
shall be framed with a welded metal base fabricated
from .07" thick (minimum) aluminum. The base and
its appurtenance shall be supported by the roof
purlins and header framing. The base shall have a '
minimum projection of 8 inches above the weather
surface of the roof, and the configuration of the
flanges shall match the roof panel. The
flange -to -panel joint shall be sealed with a
nonhardening sealant and fastened in such a manner
to provide complete support and weathertightness.
Roof Panels• '
1. The exposed metal roof covering shall be either '
24 -gage (minimum) commercially pure aluminum- coated
or zinc - aluminum coated steel panels or 24 -gage
(minimum) enamel- coated galvanized steel panels, ,
and of such configuration to provide the specified
load carrying capabilites and deflection
requirements of this specification. Roof panels
shall be of "standing -seam interlocking" design and
secured to the purlins with a concealed structural
fastening system. The concealed system shall
provide minimal through penetration of the exposed 2
roofing surface and allow the roof covering to move
independently of any differential thermal movement
by the structural framing system. Except at the
concealed fastener, there shall be no thermal
13120 ,
Page 5 of 13
accordance with the provisions of the AISI
Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel
Structural Members. The manufacturer shall certify
'
that the purlin bracing system provided conforms'to
Section 5.2 of the AISI Specification, 1980
Edition.
2. The deflection of the purlin or secondary member
shall not exceed L /180 of its span when supporting
the applicable vertical live loads previously
,
prescribed and any collateral loads required.
Roof Jacks and Curbs;
1. Openings 8 inches or smaller may be flashed and
sealed to the roof panel by jacks, providing
complete structural support and weathertightness
are maintained. Material shall be either of metal
with a protective metallic coating or of an EPDM
material with an aluminum sealing ring base.
2. Openings larger than 8 inches, round or square, '
shall be framed with a welded metal base fabricated
from .07" thick (minimum) aluminum. The base and
its appurtenance shall be supported by the roof
purlins and header framing. The base shall have a '
minimum projection of 8 inches above the weather
surface of the roof, and the configuration of the
flanges shall match the roof panel. The
flange -to -panel joint shall be sealed with a
nonhardening sealant and fastened in such a manner
to provide complete support and weathertightness.
Roof Panels• '
1. The exposed metal roof covering shall be either '
24 -gage (minimum) commercially pure aluminum- coated
or zinc - aluminum coated steel panels or 24 -gage
(minimum) enamel- coated galvanized steel panels, ,
and of such configuration to provide the specified
load carrying capabilites and deflection
requirements of this specification. Roof panels
shall be of "standing -seam interlocking" design and
secured to the purlins with a concealed structural
fastening system. The concealed system shall
provide minimal through penetration of the exposed 2
roofing surface and allow the roof covering to move
independently of any differential thermal movement
by the structural framing system. Except at the
concealed fastener, there shall be no thermal
13120 ,
Page 5 of 13
2. The covering width and configuration of the panel
shall be the building manufacturer's standard
provided all design criteria including deflection
is met or exceeded. Side seams shall be
interlocking, concealed or tongue- and - groove. Lap
seams are not acceptable.
' 3. The wall panel shall be fastened to its supports
with clips, screws or bolts located on the inside
of the panel or concealed in the joint, thus
eliminating exposed primary fasteners.
13120
��� Page 6 of 13
• •
contact of the roof panels with the supporting
'
purlin. The standing seams shall have a
factory - applied, nonhardening sealant, and the
seams shall be continuously locked or crimped
together by mechanical means during erection. Roof
'
panels with lap -type side (longitudinal) joints and
exposed structural fasteners shall not be
considered acceptable. Color coated metal panels
shall carry a fire hazard rating equal to a Class 1
material as classified by Factory Mutual System.
2. Roof panels shall be fastened to the purlins or
secondary support members with a concealed clip or
backing device of steel having a protective
metallic coating. Through penetration of the
roofing surface by exposed fasteners shall occur
only at terminal locations of the roof panels.
Such fasteners shall be stainless steel or aluminum
screws, bolts or rivets, with weather -seal washers.
Carbon steel shank fasteners with vinyl or
stainless steel- capped beads shall be acceptable,
also.
3. Deflection of the roof panel shall not exceed L /180
of its span when supporting the applicable vertical
live loads.
F. Wall Panels;
1. Metal curtain wall panels shall be exterior type to
which the thermal qualities and interior finished
will be field applied. The metal faces shall be of
aluminum or zinc - coated steel and shall be supplied
with a factory applied color coating. The color
finish applied to the exterior (exposed) surface of
the panel shall be of such composition as to
provide 20 years of film and color life. Color
shall be selected from those standards with the
building manufacturer.
2. The covering width and configuration of the panel
shall be the building manufacturer's standard
provided all design criteria including deflection
is met or exceeded. Side seams shall be
interlocking, concealed or tongue- and - groove. Lap
seams are not acceptable.
' 3. The wall panel shall be fastened to its supports
with clips, screws or bolts located on the inside
of the panel or concealed in the joint, thus
eliminating exposed primary fasteners.
13120
��� Page 6 of 13
G.
A.
I.
Fez
• • r
4. The top, bottom and intermediate panel closures
flashings, fascias, gutters and trim shall be the
building manufacturer's standard, compatible with
the material furnished as wall panels.
5.
Exterior wall panels shall be 1 1/2" deep concealed
'
fastener profile with 12" wide flush face, include
one minor rib 6" on center. Panels shall be ASC
Pacific (Rl) -12 or approved equal.
'
6.
Color coated metal panels shall carry a fire hazard
rating equal to Class I material as Classified by
Factory Mutual System. Color shall be from
'
manufacturer's standards, PVF, Kynar colors as
Interior
selected by Architect.
Liner:
,
1.
Panels shall have factory caulked side joints,
1 1/2" deep with minor rib at 8" on center on a 24"
wide flat surface as manufactured by "ASC" (L -24)
or approved equal.
,
2.
A .6 mil interior finish coat over a .2 mil primer,
color to be off - white.
Girts:
,
1. The girt's configuration and thickness shall be the ,
building manufacturer's standard provided all
design criteria, including deflection and girt
spacing, is met. '
2. Based on a simple span, the deflection of the girts
(supporting the wall covering) shall be
proportioned with due regard to that produced by
the previously prescribed design (wind) load and
its effect on the type of interior finish specified
hereafter. '
Paints:
Shot Primer for Ferrous Metal: Provide manufacturer's r
standard, fast - curing, lead -free, "universal" primer,
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric
corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems
indicated and for capability to provide a sound
foundation for field - applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure. Comply with the performance requirements of
FS TT -P -645.
13120
Page 7 of 13 '
J. Roof
Insulation:
1.
Providing an overall tested heat transfer (U) value
'
of not more than 0.13, the insulation system shall
be applied under the exposed metal roofing panels.
The insulation blanket type, of required thickness
and density, should be placed over the roof support
member between support members and roof panels.
The vapor membrane shall always be placed nearest
the interior of the building. All joints shall be
lapped, taped or folded and stapled in accordance
'
with the building manufacturer's standard. The
vapor membrane shall have a perm rating of not more
than 0.02.
2.
A thermal spacer (break) shall separate the roof
support member from the roof panel, except at each
concealed structural fastener. The spacer shall be
of material having a density of not less than 2 pcf
and, if of a combustible material, shall be
classified (ASTM E -84) as having a flame spread
rating no greater than 25.
3.
Roof insulation shall be flexible, noncombustible
r
fiberglass blankets with a vapor resistant
membrane. The vapor resistant membrane shall be
laminated to the insulation as a composite unit.
The insulation and vapor membrane shall carry an
Underwiiters Laboratories Inc. (U.L. Label) fire
hazard classification indicating a flame spread
rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating
r
of 450 or less, as a tested assembly.
K. Wall
Insulation:
1.
The wall insulation shall be batts, blankets and /or
rigid material of required thickness and density to
provide an overall tested heat transfer U value not
exceeding 0.13. Wall insulation need not be faced
with a vapor barrier where interior finish material
is of steel or aluminum - coated or uncoated.
2.
Fire hazard ratings of the insulation, its vapor
barrier (if any) and the interior finish material
'
shall be considered noncombustible or shall carry
an Underwriters Laboratories Inc. U.L.)
classification indicating a flame spread rating of
25 or less, or a Factory Mutual System
r
classification as a Class 1 material. Ratings
shall apply to each individual component if field
assembled, or to the composite interior unit if
supplied factory assembled.
13120
Page 8 of 13
/83
/8y
L. Pedestrian Doors: '
1. The standard of quality adopted for swing doors and '
frames shall be that established by the Steel Door
Institute and that set forth as a minimum by the
U.S. Department of Commerce Standard PS 4 -66,
relative to the manufacture of 1 3/4- inch -thick
flush steel doors.
2.
There shall be included all required hardware and
'
accessories conforming to the schedule shown on the
drawings in addition to the necessary framing and
fasteners required to properly install and to
'
replace structurally the wall panels and /or framing
displaced, and as detailed.
,
3.
All door leaves, frames, astragals and louvers
specified shall be manufactured from zinc - coated
steel. The door leaves, frames, louvers and
astragals shall be bonderized and given a baked -on
prime coat of paint, shop applied.
4.
Field cutting or burning of openings and /or wall
framing shall not be permitted.
M. Roll-Up
Doors:
1.
Overhead roll -up doors are specified in Section
08330. Provide framing and supports required for
proper installation of roll -up doors.
,
N. Skylights:
'
1.
Flush -faced composite unit consisting of a
protective coated steel panel in conjunction with a
fiberglass reinforced plastic (FGRP) panel. Steel
panel is perforated with a formed sheet of clear
0.04" thick (FGRP) laminated to the steel.
Skylight is to be compatible with and replaces a
steel roof panel where indicated on drawings.
'
O. Louvers:
1. All framed louvers for wall and /or gable
installation shall be of fixed type and size shown
on the drawings. There shall be included all
necessary framing, hardware and fasteners to
properly install and to replace structurally the
wall and /or gable panels and /or framing displaced. '
13120
Page 9 of 13
r
' 1. Form gutters in sections not less than 8 feet in
length, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes and
other special pieces as required. Provide
expansion -type slip joint at center of run. Join
sections with rivited or soldered sealed joints.
Provide ball strainers at each outlet. Inspect
gutter to assure installation is water tight and
drains properly.
2. Downspouts shall be concealed within the building
and empty as indicated on drawings. Form in
sections approximately 10 feed long with not less
than 1 1/2" telescoping joints. Securely anchor
downspout in place. Include complete with
elbows, and offsets.
' R. Accessories:
Furnish and install accessories as necessary to
complete installation of all building components and to
assure weather -tight construction. Accessories shall
be manufacturer's standard formed of the same material
and finish as building components including but not
limited to:
13120
Page 10 of 13
/g s
1
2.
The louver components shall be zinc - coated steel
with a 1.25 -ounce (ordered weight) zinc coating.
3.
All applicable components of the basic louver shall
be cleanedr phosphate treated, given one shop coat
of metal primer and adequately oven or air dried
under proper controls.
'
P. Gravity
Ridge Ventilators:
1.
All gravity ridge ventilators shall be adjustable,
12" throat x 20' -0" long as shown on drawings.
Ventilator shall have a vertical lift damper
capable of being manually opened to and maintained
in any desired position between fully open and
fully closed. The standard of quality for the
ventilator shall be established by a reputable and
recognized manufacturer for ridge ventilators of
this type.
2.
There shall be included all hardware and
accessories confirming to the manufacturer's
standards in addition to the necessary flashings
and fasteners to properly install the ventilator
into the roof opening.
Q. Gutters
and Downspouts:
' 1. Form gutters in sections not less than 8 feet in
length, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes and
other special pieces as required. Provide
expansion -type slip joint at center of run. Join
sections with rivited or soldered sealed joints.
Provide ball strainers at each outlet. Inspect
gutter to assure installation is water tight and
drains properly.
2. Downspouts shall be concealed within the building
and empty as indicated on drawings. Form in
sections approximately 10 feed long with not less
than 1 1/2" telescoping joints. Securely anchor
downspout in place. Include complete with
elbows, and offsets.
' R. Accessories:
Furnish and install accessories as necessary to
complete installation of all building components and to
assure weather -tight construction. Accessories shall
be manufacturer's standard formed of the same material
and finish as building components including but not
limited to:
13120
Page 10 of 13
/g s
• •
n
Flashing
Closures and Fillers
Sealants
Metal Expansion Joints
Ridge Covers
Base Flashing
Fascias and Caps
Soffits
Bolts, Screws and Fasteners I
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.01 GENERAL:
Erection of metal building, accessories, insulation, doors
shall be performed by one of the following:
1. Authorized systems contractors or builders of the
manufacturer.
2. Building manufacturer's crews. ,
3. Other erectors authorized by the manufacturer as
trained and qualified to erect that manufacturer's '
product. In this case, the manufacturer shall inspect
the work and certify its correctness.
3.02 ERECTION• r
A. Frame: '
1. Framina: Erect structural framing true to line,
level and plumb, rigid and secure. Level base
plates to a true even plane with full bearing to
supporting structures, set with double- nutted
anchor bolts. Use a non - shrinking grout to obtain
uniform bearing and to maintain a level base line ,
elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than 7
days after placement.
2. Purlins and Girts: Provide rake or gable purlins
with tight fitting closure channels and fascias.
Locate and space wall girts to suite door and
window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins
and girts to structural framing and hold rigidly to
a straight line by sag rods.
3. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in
both roof and sidewalls as required.
13120
Page 11 of 13
/ 6'6
D. Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames straight,
plumb and level. Securely anchor frames to building
structure. Set units with 1/8" maximum clearance
between door and frame at jambs and head, and 3/4" max.
' between door and floor. Adjust hardware for.proepr
operation.
I
13120
Page 12 of 13
r ,8�
1
B. Roofing and Siding:
1. General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so that
prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped
joints. Apply panels and associated items for neat
and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or
application not true to line. Protect factory
finishes from damage. Provide weatherseal under
ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and
rake with rubberr neoprene or other closures to
exclude weather.
'
2. Standing Seam Roof Panel System: Fasten roof
panels to purlins with manufacturer's standard
concealed clip in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3. Wall Sheets: Apply elastomeric sealant
continuously between metal base channel (sill
angle) and concrete and elsewhere as necessary for
waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant and
back -up in accordance with the sealant
manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Thermal Insulation: Install insulation in
'
accordance with manufacturer's published directions
and concurrently with installation of roof panels.
Install blankets straight and true in one -piece
lengths with both sets of tabs sealed to provide a
complete vapor barrier. Install retainer strips at
each longitudinal joint, straight and taut, nesting
with roof rib to hold insulation in place.
C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts,
ventilators, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for
positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise
operation.
D. Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames straight,
plumb and level. Securely anchor frames to building
structure. Set units with 1/8" maximum clearance
between door and frame at jambs and head, and 3/4" max.
' between door and floor. Adjust hardware for.proepr
operation.
I
13120
Page 12 of 13
r ,8�
• • '
E. Field Paintina:
Apply finish coating to factory- primed items as '
follows. Finish colors as indicated or, if not
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standards.
Hollow metal doors and frames. ,
1. Cleaning and Touch -Up: Prior to application of
finish coats, clean component surfaces of matter
which could preclude paint bond. Touch -up ,
abrasions, marks, skips or other defects to
shop - primed surfaces with same type material as
shop primer. ,
F. Dissimilar Materials: Where aluminum surfaces come in
contact with ferrous metal or other incompatible ,
materials, keep aluminum surfaces from direct contact
by applications to the other material as follows:
1. One coat of zinc chromate primer, FS TT -P -645,
followed by two coats of aluminum paint, SSPC -Paint
101.
2. In lieu of 2 coats of aluminum paint, apply one '
coat of high -build bituminous paint, SSPC -Paint 12,
applied to a thickness of 1/16" over zinc chromate '
primer.
3. Backpaint the
aluminum surface
where it is
impractical to
paint the other
surface.
'
END OF SECTION 13120 ,
13120.
Page 13 of 13
IM
CI
1
I
SECTION 14430 - VERTICAL LIFT
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
' Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Divison -1
Specification section, apply to work of this section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of vertical lift equipment is indicated on
drawings, including wire mesh landing enclosure.
B. Concrete work for vertical lift pit is specified in
Division 3.
C. Electrical wirina and connections for vertical lift
form are specified in Division 16.
D. Work to be Done by Installer:
1. Install vertical lift complete with the above
exceptions.
2. All wiring for lift, controls and enclosure.
1.03
QUALITY
ASSURANCE:
A.
Vertical Lift Standard: Comply with applicable
requirements of ANI B.20.1 1989 and OSHA codes for
vertical material handling equipment.
B.
Manufacturer: Provide vertical lift as manufactured by
Southworth Incorporated.
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and
installation instructions for vertical lift equipment,
including installation details.
'
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication
and erection of vertical lift. Include plans,
elevations, and large scale details. Show anchor-
ages and accessory items. Procide location template
drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent
construction. Furnish roughing -in drawings for
electrical service well in advance of concrete work.
14430
Page 1 of 5
/99
1910
• •
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance
and service data, including, address and telephone '
number of nearest authorized service representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,
2.01 VERTICAL
LIFT:
A.
General: Provide Eagle 300 vertical conveyor.
B.
Capacity: 1000 Lbs.
'
C.
Travel: 10' -0"
.3'
'
D.
pecks -0" wide x 3' -0" long. Construction of fully
wall thickness, with four (4) anchor plates for lagging
electrically welded structural steel of substantial
channels to be of minimum four inch (4 ") channel
dimension to accommodate rated load. Frame to be of
(7.25 #) welded to angled cross members to form a truss
one - quarter inch (1/4 ") Wall Steel tubing and
'
corners are to be rounded to eliminate sharp edges.
reinforced with steel cross members. Deck material (or
Upper frame, to match lower frame, having bolted
diamond) hot rolled steel plate of three - sixteenths
smooth travel of deck. Two (2) fixed maximum over
inch (3/16 ") thickness. Eighty -four inch (84 ") high
,
back plate of minimum ten (10) gauge smooth hot rolled
,
14430
steel electrically welded to three inches (3" channel
Page 2 of 5
frame. Four (4) side deflection rollers (sealed
bearing mounted), one on each outside corner of back
plate, to resist platform tilting should load be
off - center. Deck carriage to travel on four (4) taper
guide wheels machined to ±.005 inches tolerance for
,
smooth travel within upright channels. Each roller to
have two (2) replaceable bearing and mounted on smooth
machined one -inch (1 ") steel axies.
'
E. ,Speed: 33 feet per minute.
,
F. Frame: Lower base to be constructed of fully
electrically welded structural steel of substantial
dimension to accommodate rated capacity with ample
safety factor. Base legs to be of capped structural
'
steel tubing having minimum of one - quarter inch (1/4 ")
wall thickness, with four (4) anchor plates for lagging
to floor, designed to be self- supporting. Upright
channels to be of minimum four inch (4 ") channel
(7.25 #) welded to angled cross members to form a truss
to increase strength and to resist frame twisting. All
corners are to be rounded to eliminate sharp edges.
Upper frame, to match lower frame, having bolted
recessed splice point to allow proper alignment and
smooth travel of deck. Two (2) fixed maximum over
,
travel safety stops to prevent carriage overtravel.
,
14430
Page 2 of 5
G.
Posi -Stop Deck Break: Two (2) complete assemblies,
each consisting of heat treated, hardened steel cams
mounted on lubricated bearings to prevent freezing.
Cams are actuated via spring tension to prevent deck
free fall should chains lacken or break.
H.
Electric /Hydraulic Power System: Specifically designed
standard power unit with 3.2 hp TENV motor directly
coupled to an external shaftless pump. Pump has
built -in check valve, relief valve, and lowering valve.
A separate emergency lowering valve is also
incorporated into the standard unit. TEFC motor
'
directly coupled to a submerged gear pump of rated
capacity. Entire system to include: oversized
'
reservior with filler /breather, and drain, clean -out
suction filter, and valve block. Valve block is zero
leakage module with input strainer, preset overload
relief valve, check valve, 110 volt lowering solenoid
'
having manual bypass (should power failure occur),
pressure strainer, and adjustable lowering controls.
Zero liakage valve block to allow accurate deck
indexing and /or prevention of loaded deck downdrift.
J.
Hydraulic Cylinder: Single acting, full bore
t
displacement. Casing of DOM tubing. Inner rod of
chrome plated steel, with adequately spaced rod
stabilizing rings and nonmetallic wear ring. Gland
coupling to have bleed port allowing expulsion of air
from cylinder and machined to accommodate gland nut.
Gland nut to be easily removed to accommodate
maintenance of sealing packings. Gland nut to have '
external threads with internal sealing and wiping
rings, rated at five thousand (5000) PSI. Design of
cylinder to allow easy and complete removal of entire
'
rod by removal of gland nut, without resultant damage
to cylinder. Chain anchor bolts machined from hardened
steel with two (2) lock nuts affixed and additional
lock pin to prevent accidental nut back off.
Equalizing head plate assembly to balance load of chain
'
pressure via separate chain rollers having.two. (2).
sealed bearings each. Roller chain to have a minimum
safety factor of four to one (4 :1).
K.
Electrical Controls: Push- button actuators, momentary
contact, or deadman control. Balance of entire system
'
to be factory -wired in accordance with NES Code. NEMA
one (1) rated panel. (Other ratings available.)
Enclosure panel to contain wired motor starters, input
and /or step -down transformers, relays, heaters,
'
terminal strips for control logic, and fuse blocks.
Adjustable limit switches to control platform indexing.
'
14430
Page 3 of 5
/9:1
L. Safety Features: Complete factory tested units. Three
(3) maximum travel safety stops to limit deck travel. ,
Two (2) lubricated spring loaded POSI -Stop deck brake
devices. Rounded corners. Unit factory- wired.
M. Hydraulic System. Overload safety relief valves. '
Adjustable speed control. Check valve. Chain
adjusters with lock pins.
N. Finish: Steel surfaces to be first wire brushed and
cleaned with solvent to remove all oils and dirt. Two
(2) coats of enamel. Finish to be of professional
appearance and resistant to oils, moisture, most
chemicals, and normal abuse.
P. Factory Tested: Each unit to be fully factory- tested '
under design load. Each unit to have a complete
detailed installation, operation, and parts manual
furnished. '
Q. Warranty: Provide full one (1) year warranty from
defects in materials and /or workmanship. ,
n
�I
3.01 PREPARATION•
Coordinate and furnish anchorages with templates, diagrams,
and instructions for their installations, for vertical lift
platform equipment indicated to be attached to or recessed
into concrete construciton. Coordinate delivery of these
'
items to project site.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
,
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's detailed
instructions in installing vertical lift equipment.
'
B. Vertical Lift: Coordinate forming of pit to ensure
that recess is adequate to acommodate platform. Attach
vertical lift to pit construction to comply with
,
manufacturer's directions.
C. Field Quality Control: Upon completion of installation
'
conduct tests to ensure proper construction and
operation of vertical lift.
14430 '
Page 4 of 5 '
1
1
1
i
1
' /93
•
•
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Make necessary adjustments for safe, efficient operation of
vertical lift equipment. After installation, restore
marred abraded surfaces to original condition.
END OF SECTION 14430
14430
Page 5 of 5
/9y
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish all labor, materials, services, testing, trans-
portation and equipment necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the completion of all plumbing indicated on
the drawings and specified herein. The work included
consists of the following major items and all work inci-
dental thereto.
A. General plumbing installation.
B. General plumbing materials.
C. Plumbing fixtures and equipment.
D. Water, waste and vent piping systems.
L. ;excavation and backfilling for all underground
lines.
F. Access panels, yard boxes and accessories completely
installed.
G. Gas piping system.
H. Tests.
1.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Drawings:
1. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it
is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories which may be required. The
Contractor shall carefully investigate the condi-
tions surrounding the installation of his work
furnishing the necessary fitting, valves, traps,
etc., which may be required to complete the
installation.
15400
Page 1 of 14
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
/9y
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish all labor, materials, services, testing, trans-
portation and equipment necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the completion of all plumbing indicated on
the drawings and specified herein. The work included
consists of the following major items and all work inci-
dental thereto.
A. General plumbing installation.
B. General plumbing materials.
C. Plumbing fixtures and equipment.
D. Water, waste and vent piping systems.
L. ;excavation and backfilling for all underground
lines.
F. Access panels, yard boxes and accessories completely
installed.
G. Gas piping system.
H. Tests.
1.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Drawings:
1. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it
is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories which may be required. The
Contractor shall carefully investigate the condi-
tions surrounding the installation of his work
furnishing the necessary fitting, valves, traps,
etc., which may be required to complete the
installation.
15400
Page 1 of 14
I/Qt Page 2 of 13
'
2. The general arrangement indicated on the drawings
shall be followed as closely as possible. In
'
the event a field condition arises which makes
it impossible or impractical to install the
work as indicated on the drawings, the Contractor
shall submit in writing the proposed "departure"
to the Architect for his approval. Only when
notified to do so in writing by the Architect
shall the Contractor proceed with the installation
'
of the departure.
3. In case of difference in the specifications or
drawings, or between the specifications and the
drawings, the Contractor shall consult the
Architect for directions.
B.
Code Requirements: All materials and equipment for
the plumbing system shall comply with and be installed
in accordance with all the requirements of all legally
'
constituted public authorities having jurisdiction,
including all County and local ordinances, the Safety
Orders of the State Industrial Accident Commission, and
the rules and regulations of the National Fire Protection
Association.
C.
Meter Permits and Inspections: This Contractor must
obtain and pay all fees for permits, licenses, inspections,
etc., which are required by all legally constituted
authorities, and make all necessary arrangements with
utility companies for meter installation and sewer
connections. This Contractor shall prepare plumbing
riser diagrams as necessary for securing permits.
'
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A.
As -Built Drawings: This Contractor shall obtain from
the Architect, and keep up -to -date, two (2) sets of
accurately dimensioned blueline prints showing all
work which is installed differently than shown on the
'
drawings. This shall include locations, depth of
buried piping, clean -outs, shut -off valves, sewer
invert elevations, tees, etc.
B.
Submittal of Materials, Fixtures and Equipment: As soon
as possible and within thirty (30) days after award of
the contract, and before their purchase, the Contractor
shall submit five (5) bound booklets in index form
containing a complete list of materials, fixtures, equipment
etc., he is to furnish for the installation. The list shall
also include the manufacturer's names, addressed, catalog
numbers, trade names, etc., of the materials, fixtures and
equipment he is to furnish. All equipment and materials
'
shall be submitted at one time.
I/Qt Page 2 of 13
/c/4
1.05 GUARANTEES: ,
Contractor - furnished equipment, fixtures and work shall
be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date '
of acceptance against defective materials and workmanship.
Such defects discovered during the period shall be
promptly corrected at no expense to the Owner. ,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING: ,
A. Sewer Piping: Piping within building - service weight
cast iron (spun -cast) No -Hub soil pipe and fittings
'
to conform to C.I.S.P. Institute Standard 201 -72.
'
Rich or approved equal, with DuPont Neoprene gasket
and 300 Series stainless steel clamp and shield
assemblies. Option: Vent piping above floor may
,
consist of above specified material in place of steel
pipe as specified herein. Piping from 5'0" outside
building - vitrified clay pipe shall be extra strength
,
Bell and Spigot pipe conforming to ASTM C- 425 -71,
Interpace "Speedseal" or Pacific Clay Products "Wedge -
lock".
'
B. Sanitary Vent Piping: 1 -1/2" inch and smaller -
Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with screwed drain
age pattern fittings. 2 inch and larger - shall be
'
as specified for sewer pipe. ABS plastic conforming
to all local codes may be used if permitted by local
authorities and Architect.
,
C. Domestic water: Water piping shall be Type "K" hard
drawn under building and underground with wrought
copper fittings, up to and including the maximum
'
standard manufactured sizes, brazed with Silfos or
Aircosil 15. Option: PVC plastic pipe conforming
to all local codes may be used from meter to 5 feet
'
from building if permitted by local authorities and
Architect. Water piping shall be Type L hard drawn
copper above floor, inside building with fittings and
,
joints soldered with 95 -5 Tin Antimony solder and non-
corrosive flux. Copper to female iron pipe size drop ear
fittings shall be provided on all concealed pipe outlets.
All water connection nipples shall be 85% red brass.
All individual fixtures shall be provided with line
size stops on hot and cold water supplies.
'
D. Indirect Wastes: Shall be DWV copper with DWV
drainage type fittings, or hard drawn Type "M"
copper with long radius fittings. Option: PVC
'
or ABS plastic pipe may be used if permitted by
local authorities. Joints for copper pipe shall
be made up with 50 -50 solder and non - corrosive flux.
'
Page 3 of 13
,
' • •
1
I
91
Cl
i '
197
2.02 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES:
Valves shall be Crane as listed, or comparable models of
Wallworth, Lunkenheimer, Jenkins, Powell or Kennedy.
A. Size 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Crane No. 438, all
bronze non - rising stem, 125 pound steam working
pressure, screwed, malleable iron or aluminum hand -
wheels. Crane No. 1320 all bronze non - rising stem,
125 pound steam working pressure, solder joints,
malleable iron or aluminum handwheel; make up with
95 -5 tin antimony solder and non - corrosive flux.
B, Glove Valves: Sizes 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Crane
No. 7 with No. 1 disc, all bronze, 150 pound steam
working pressure screwed, malleable iron or aluminum
handwheel. Crane No. 1310 all bronze 200 psi at
200 degrees F. solder joint malleable iron or
aluminum handwheel; make up with 95 -5 tin antimony
solder and non - corrosive flux.
C. Check Valves: size 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Crane
No. 34 of 1303, all bronze construction or equal by
Miller Valve Co., or William- Hager.
D. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves:
Watts Regulator Company (sized for total BTUH input)
or approved equal on storage tanks and /or water heaters.
E. Pressure Reducing Valves: Where water pressure is in
excess of 80 psi a Wilkins 500 YS or approved equal
pressure reducing valve complete with shut -off valve
and local code required fittings, valves, drains and
appurtenances shall be installed unless otherwise
noted on drawings.
F. Unions: For Steel Pipe - Grinnell, Stockham or
approved equal, 250 lb. class, galvanized or black
to match piping in which installed. For copper pipe
1/2 inch to 2 inch - Nibco 733, or Mueller; sizes
2 -1/2 inch or up - Nibco No. 740 or Mueller.
Page 4 of 13
E. Gas Piping: Schedule 40 Black Steel - 2" and
smaller
screwed;
2 -1/2" and larger, welded.
Fittings
2" and
smaller, 150# malleable iron
screwed;
2 -1/2"
and larger, standard weight
'
seamless
steel,
welding type.
1
I
91
Cl
i '
197
2.02 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES:
Valves shall be Crane as listed, or comparable models of
Wallworth, Lunkenheimer, Jenkins, Powell or Kennedy.
A. Size 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Crane No. 438, all
bronze non - rising stem, 125 pound steam working
pressure, screwed, malleable iron or aluminum hand -
wheels. Crane No. 1320 all bronze non - rising stem,
125 pound steam working pressure, solder joints,
malleable iron or aluminum handwheel; make up with
95 -5 tin antimony solder and non - corrosive flux.
B, Glove Valves: Sizes 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Crane
No. 7 with No. 1 disc, all bronze, 150 pound steam
working pressure screwed, malleable iron or aluminum
handwheel. Crane No. 1310 all bronze 200 psi at
200 degrees F. solder joint malleable iron or
aluminum handwheel; make up with 95 -5 tin antimony
solder and non - corrosive flux.
C. Check Valves: size 2 -1/2 inches and Smaller: Crane
No. 34 of 1303, all bronze construction or equal by
Miller Valve Co., or William- Hager.
D. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves:
Watts Regulator Company (sized for total BTUH input)
or approved equal on storage tanks and /or water heaters.
E. Pressure Reducing Valves: Where water pressure is in
excess of 80 psi a Wilkins 500 YS or approved equal
pressure reducing valve complete with shut -off valve
and local code required fittings, valves, drains and
appurtenances shall be installed unless otherwise
noted on drawings.
F. Unions: For Steel Pipe - Grinnell, Stockham or
approved equal, 250 lb. class, galvanized or black
to match piping in which installed. For copper pipe
1/2 inch to 2 inch - Nibco 733, or Mueller; sizes
2 -1/2 inch or up - Nibco No. 740 or Mueller.
Page 4 of 13
2.03
• •
'
G. Hose Bibbs: inside Acorn 9120 Series polished chrome
plated with loose key stop. Install 18 inches above
supports unless otherwise indicated on the drawings
finished floor, or as noted on drawings. Outside
shall
free standing hose bibbs shall be Acorn 9120 rough
,
brass .installed on 8 inch high, 3/4 inch brass pipe
Split rang hangers Grinnell No. 104 or Fee & Mason No.
risers set in concrete or suitable anchoring device,
or as noted on drawings.
,
it. stops shall be line size with IPS screwed connection.
American Standard, Crane or Kohler.
B.
1. Gas Valves: 3/4" and smaller: Walworth No. 597
brass lever handle w /check. 1" thru 2 ": Walworth
239 or approved equal.
No. 555 wrench operated, flange. 2 -1/2" and
'
larger: Walworth No. 655F wrench operated, flange.
'
PIPE
SUPPORTS:
,
Pipe
supports unless otherwise indicated on the drawings
shall
be as follows:
A.
Split rang hangers Grinnell No. 104 or Fee & Mason No.
199.
B.
Clevis type hangers Grinnel No. 260, Fee & Mason No.
239 or approved equal.
C.
Piping 2 -1/2 inches and larger within wood construction
'
above ceiling. Support with wrought straps, Grinnell
No. 262 or 263, Fee & Mason No. 180 or approved equal.
Pipe 2 inches and smaller, use Grinnell No. 231,
'
Fee & Mason No. 327 or approved equal.
D.
Piping below wood construction under ceiling: Support
with above specified hangers with rods attached to
1/2 inch angle iron clips. One leg of the clip nailed
to side of joists with at least two (2) nails.
E.
Piping under concrete construction - support with
above specified clevis hangers with rods attached
1/2 inch angle iron clips. one leg of the clip shall
'
be anchored to concrete with cinch anchors.
F.
Hanger rods shall conform to the following table:
Pipe size 2" and smaller 3/8 in. rods
Pipe size 2 -1/2" and 3" 1/2 in. rods
Pipe size 4" 5/8 in, rods
'
Page 5 of 14
G.
Isolate all pipe hangers and piping supports for hot
and cold water piping with Semco "Trisolators ", Series
No. 11 "Prisolators" or approved equal.
tr.
Branches in wood stud walls shall be secured with
straps nailed to studs. In steel stud construction,
'
bolt straps to steel angles welded to studs.
I.
Isolate water piping from studs with felt pads.
'
J.
Provide sway bracing at every fifth (5th) hanger or
support.
K.
Clamps of heavy duty steel shall be provided on vertical
pipes at every floor.
'
L.
Branches over six (6) feet long shall have separate hangers.
M.
Hanger spacing and location shall conform to Uniform
Plumbing Code requirements.
N.
Provide dialectric couplings between all piping and
equipment of dissimilar metals.
2.04
MISCELLANEOUS:
A.
Cleanouts: J.R. Smith, Zurn or Josam. Wall Cleanouts -
J.R. Smith #4422, prime coated for plaster walls where
concealed. J.R. Smith #4553 stainless steel for
'
masonry walls, dry walls, and ceramic tile walls where
visible. Floor Cleanouts - J.R. Smith #4023, bronze
plug and non -skid nickel- bronze for finished floor;
and J.R. Smith #4223 plug and X -X -H secured non -skid
cast iron top for unfinished floors. Cleanouts to
Grade: J.R. Smith #4283 or J.R. Smith #4288 in yard
box as specified in J.4.
B.
Flashings - Roof: Semco, one - piece, 4 pound series
with reinforcing steel bolt 1100 -5 with vandalproof
'
hood or approved equal, counterflashed with cast iron
counterflashing sleeve.
C.
Escutcheons: Steel flange with locking device and
C.P. finish, Beaton Cadwell No. 10 or approved equal
by Grinnell.
'
D.
Yard Boxes: Service shut -off valves on water, gas
and cleanouts to grade shall be Brooks Products Inc.
or approved equal precast concrete yard box with name
'
of service permanently and clearly marked on cast iron
cover. Concrete box and cover shall be traffic grade
in all areas subject to vehicular traffic. Installation
shall be made in such a manner so as not to cause any
'
stress on piping or tilting, settlement or movement
J
of yard box.
i
/�/ %
Page 6 of 13
• •
,
E. Access Panels: J.R. Smith, Zurn or Karp. Provide
12" x 12" panels for concealed valves, primers and
other equipment unless otherwise specified or indicated.
Wall Panels: J.R. Smith #4762 with Allen key latch
stainless steel finish for all walls. Ceiling Panels:
Smith #4760 with Allen key latch, prime coated steel
finish.
.
F. Backflow Preventers: Where required shall be Cla Val,
Beeco or as approved by local governing agencies,
complete with gate valves, testing cocks and nipples.
2.05 PIPE INSULATION:
A. Hot Water Pipe, Fittings and Valves: Insulate all
'
hot water supply and return pipe, fittings and valves
except exposed connections to plumbing fixtures,
flanges and unions with Johns - Manville "Flame- Safe"
'
one -piece construction, preformed fiberglass pipe
insulation or approved equal, with a "K" factor of
.22 maximum at 75 Deg F mean temperature. Factory applied
jackets shall be GVB -Glass Cloth Vapor Barrier for
exposed piping and VB -Vapor Barrier for concealed
piping. Thickness of insulation shall be 3/4" for
1/2" and 3/4 ", 1" for 1" through 4" pipe and 1 -1/2"
for 5" and over piping. Pipe insulation shall be
installed as follows:
GBV (exposed Jacket to be secured by applying a brush
coat of fire retardant adhesive (Benjamin- Foster
65 -20 or equal) on the longitudinal lap and butt strips.
,
VP (concealed) Jacket to be secured with 9/6" coated
flair type straps on 4" centers.
'
Fittings and valve insulation shall be proper factory
precut Johns - Manville "UniFit" premolded one -piece
PVC insulated fitting covers or equal installed as
follows:
The ends of the UNI -FIT insulation shall be tucked '
snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges
adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked in
fully insulating the pipe fitting. The one -piece
PVC fitting cover is then secured by stapling, tack
fastening, banding or taping the ends to the adjacent
pipe covering. Tape shall extend over the adjacent
pipe insulation, and have an overlap on itself at least
2" on the downward side.
Page 7 of 13 ,
I
I
r
I
•
2.06 PLUMBING FIXTURES:
•
A. Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome plated,
unless otherwise specified. All fixtures shall have
individual line size stops on hot and cold water
supplies at fixtures.
B. Drainage products and carriers for wall mounted fixtures,
Smith, Josam, Zurn unless otherwise noted on drawings.
C. Plumbing fixtures by American Standard, or approved
equal.
0. Flush Valves by Sloan, Delaney or Watrous, first
class quality.
E. Fill all joints between plumbing fixtures and wall,
floor or cabinets with Flexalon -E, non - hardening rubber
caulking and sealings material as manufactured by
Leo Potter & Co., Dow - Corning 780 Sealant, or
Sonolastic, manufactured by Sonneborn Building
Products Company.
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES:
A. Pumps shall be of the capacity, voltage, type, size
and manufacture as shown on the drawings or approved
equal. Pumps shall be fitted as recommended by
manufacturer in his latest catalog or specification
brochure.
B. Water heaters shall be of the type, capacity, manufacture
and size as shown on the drawings. All water heaters
shall bear the stamp of approval of all applicable
approving agencies such as U.L., A.S.M.E., A.G.A., etc.
Tanks shall be glass lined or equal. All controls
shall be 1008 safety type. Combination temperature-
pressure relief valve shall be installed on all water
heaters. All water heaters shall comply with recommen-
dations of manufacturer in his latest catalog or specifica:-
tions brochure.
C. Other items shall be as shown on drawings and shall
comply with local codes and standards.
Page 8 of 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP:
•
A. General Plumbing Installation: Installation methods
and procedures outlined are general and any specific
method and procedure that is specified under "Materials"
shall take precedence over those specified herein.
B. Locations and Accessibility: Install equipment for
ease of maintenance and repair. If changes in the
indicated locations or arrangements are required,
they shall be made without additional charges, provided
the charge is ordered before the work is installed and
no extra labor or materials are required.
C. Openings: Furnish information to the other trades
on size and locations of openings which are required
in walls, slabs, etc., for conduit, piping and
equipment at the proper times. Any additional openings
or changes to existing ones shall be provided as
outlined under "Cutting and Patching ".
D. Cutting and Patching: Do all drilling, cutting and
patching of the general construction work, rough
finish and trim which may be required for the
installation of the work. All patching shall be of
the same materials, workmanship and finish as the
original work and accurately match the surrounding
work in both appearance and its original strength.
E. Closin -In of Unins ected work: Do not allow or cause
any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until it
has been inspected, tested and approved by the Owner's
representative. Should any of his work be enclosed
or covered up before such inspection and test, he shall
at his own expense uncover the work and, after it
has been inspected, tested and approved, make all
repair with such materials as may be necessary to
restore all his work and that of the other trades to
its original and proper condition.
3.02 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL:
Do all necessary trench excavation, shoring, backfilling
and compaction required for the proper laying of the pipe
lines.
A. Bottom of the Trenches: Cut to grade and excavate
bell holes to insure the pipes bearing for their entire
length upon the outside periphery of the lower third
Page 9 of 13
' • •
I
A. Rough -in shall proceed as rapidly as the general con-
struction will permit and shall be complete and tested
before any finished work is started. All work shall be
fitted to the available space and shall be accurately
roughed in.
Page 10 of 13
�3
B.
Backfill and Compaction: Backfill all pipe trenches
with imported sand (see also backfill requirements for
buried steel pipe). Backfill shall consist of sand
two inches below pipe to not less than 6 inches above
pipe. Balance of trench shall be filled with approved,
clean material, placed in conformity with applicable
divisions of the specifications. No backfilling shall
be performed until installation is approved by the
Owner's Representative. Compact backfill in accordance
with Earthwork Section of these specifications.
C.
Water pipe with rubber ring type joints shall have
30 inches of cover. All other pipe shall have not
less than 18 inches of cover, unless otherwise
noted on drawings, or dictated by climatic conditions.
D.
Trenches: No less than 12 inches wider than the
greatest diameter of the pipe.
E.
Install all piping promptly after excavation or
cutting for same has been done, so as to keep the
excavations open as short a time as possible.
F.
Existing underground or buried piping, such as
sewers, gas, water, electrical conduit, etc., active
or abandoned, whether shown on the drawings or not,
that is encountered in the prosecution of the work
shall be properly shored and protected from any
damage whatsoever.
G.
Abandoned or inactive piping encountered shall be
left intact and undamaged or relocated and reconnected
to the existing system as directed by the Owner's
1
Representative.
N.
Any damage resulting from the Contractor's operations
shall be repaired by him at his own expense.
I.
Excavation, backfilling and repaving in connection with
the work in public streets, under public sidewalks
or elsewhere in public property shall be done as
required by or under the supervision of the proper
1
authorities.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION:
I
A. Rough -in shall proceed as rapidly as the general con-
struction will permit and shall be complete and tested
before any finished work is started. All work shall be
fitted to the available space and shall be accurately
roughed in.
Page 10 of 13
�3
• • 1
L. All piping shall be concealed in finished portion of ,
the building except where otherwise indicated, or
unless otherwise directed at the time the work is done.
All piping shall be installed to clear beams, etc.,
even if drawings do not indicate same. The Contractor
shall constantly check the work of the other trades
so as to prevent interference with this installation.
I
2GL/ Page 11 of 13 1
B.
Construct pipe lines using full length sections of
pipe. No short sections shall be used except where
run required less than one full length of pipe.
C.
All pipe shall be of USA manufacture new, straight
and true and shall be installed parallel to the
framing of the building. Piping shall be installed
in such a manner as to permit expansion and contrac-
tion and prevent strain on the equipment and /or piping.
D.
Joints shall be smooth and unobstructed inside.
Thoroughly ream cut pipe ends to remove all burrs.
E.
All screwed joints shall be made tight with tongs
and wrenches. Any leaky connections shall be re -made
with new materials. The use of thread cement or
caulking to make joints tight is prohibited.
F.
All changes of direction shall be made with fittings.
Bending or mitered bends are prohibited.
,
G.
The ends of the openings in all pipe and fittings
shall be capped or plugged immediately to exclude all
dirt until fixtures are installed and /or final
connections are made.
H.
All pipe runs and connections shall be carefully made
,
to insure unrestricted flow, eliminate air pockets
and permit complete drainage of the system.
I.
Horizontal sanitary and drain piping shall be installed
to a uniform grade of not less than 1/4 inch per foot,
unless otherwise indicated or directed by local codes.
J.
water piping shall be graded and valved so as to pro-
vide for the complete control and drainage of the system.
K.
All vent piping shall be graded for proper venti-
lation to allow piping to free itself quickly of all
condensation or water. Vents shall be ganged
wherever possible.
L. All piping shall be concealed in finished portion of ,
the building except where otherwise indicated, or
unless otherwise directed at the time the work is done.
All piping shall be installed to clear beams, etc.,
even if drawings do not indicate same. The Contractor
shall constantly check the work of the other trades
so as to prevent interference with this installation.
I
2GL/ Page 11 of 13 1
i
3.04
I
I
• •
M. Unions shall be installed on one side of all screwed
shut -off valves; at both sides of screwed automatic
valves and on all by- passes; at all equipment connections
and elsewhere as indicated or required for ease of
installation and /or dismantling unless flanges are
indicated. Under no circumstances will unions be permitted
to be installed in attics or concealed spaces.
N. Sleeves: Provide No. 25 gauge galvanized steel or iron where
pipes pass through concrete floor slabs above the ground
floor. Pipes through ground floor slabs shall be isolated
with Kraft paper, plastic tape, or similar materials unless
conduit is specified or indicated. Sleeves for pipes through
exterior walls shall be standard weight galvanized pipe.
Pack space between pipe and sleeve with oakum and hot tar so
as to be absolutely water- tight. Sleeves in firewalls .
shall be packed with asbestos rope.
O. Pipe Joints - Screwed Joints: Compound applied to the
maile thread only. Welded Joints: By qualified
welders in accordance with the latest applicable AWS
Standard. Sanitary System (HUbless): Cast iron no -hub
joints with DuPont Neoprene gasket and stainless steel
clamp and shield assemblies. storm System shall be
the same as for sanitary system. Soldered Joints: 95 -5
tin antimony solder. Joint evenly heated for good solder
flow and wiped clean of excess solder and paste. Vitrified
Clay Pipe Joints: Hell and spigot with compression type
neoprene gasket.
P. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Where pipes pierce
finished surfaces, C.P. brass split flanges with
set screw lock shall be provided.
Q. Roof Flashings: Extend pipe seven (7) inches above
finished roof line, except where specifically required
to exceed this dimension by the applicable plumbing
code.
INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A. Each fixtures shall be installed at the exact height
and location shown on the architectural drawings.
B. Fixtures, supplies, trap and trap outlet shall be
set square with the wall, in line with fixture
outlets without any offsets, angles or bends. Fixture
connections shall be properly aligned to prevent strain
on equipment or fixtures.
C. Each fixture shall be set level and in continuous
contact with the floor or wall. Fixtures in batteries
shall be set on one line at equal spacing and shall
have uniform appearance.
Page 12 of 13
I
0206;
3.05 YARD BOXES:
A. Boxes shall be set flush with the finished surface
or grade.
B. Yard boxes shall not be located in concrete walks or
covered passages.
3.06 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION:
A. Cleaning and Flushing: All equipment and materials
shall be thoroughly cleaned. surfaces to be painted
D. The joint between the fixtures and the walls or
floors shall be adequately grouted with polysulfied
,
cement to be smooth, even and watertight.
E. Watertight joints for drainage connections to all
fixtures shall be made in accordance with local
plumbing codes.
'
F. Exposed, plated, polished or enameled connections
from fixtures shall be assembled with special care to
,
show no tool marks or threads.
3.05 YARD BOXES:
A. Boxes shall be set flush with the finished surface
or grade.
B. Yard boxes shall not be located in concrete walks or
covered passages.
3.06 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION:
A. Cleaning and Flushing: All equipment and materials
shall be thoroughly cleaned. surfaces to be painted
shall be left smooth and clean, ready for painting.
S. Each unit of water supply and distribution system
,
shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water at as
high velocities attainable.
C. All piping, valves, traps, water heaters, etc., shall
be thoroughly flushed, cleaned and /or blown out
until free of scale, silt, sand, sediment, pipe dope
and foreign matter of any kind.
D. Damage by Leaks: Contractor shall be responsible for
all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks
or breaks in piping, equipment or fixtures furnished and/
or installed for a period of one (1) year from the date
of acceptance of the work by the Owner.
E. water Hammer Arrestor: Shall be installed at each
group of flush valve fixtures and at all quick closing
valves.
,
3.07 STERILIZATION Of' DOMESTIC WATER LINES:
Shut off at meter, open all hot and cold fixtures slightly,
introduce solution of one gallon of five percent (5 %) sodium
hypochlorite (Purex, Chlorox) to 500 gallons of water into
system at sterilization valve. Close each fixture when
I
Page 13 of 14 1
chlorine residual appears, as determined by orthofolidine
test. When all fixtures show chlorine residual, close all
fixtures and sterilization valve and allow solution to
remain in system for 24 hours. After 24 hours, flush system
so that chlorine residual does not exceed 0.5 ppm at
any point. Also, flush through sterilization valve and
then close valve and plug or install short nipple and cap.
The Architect shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to
beginning the sterilization procedure.
3.08 TESTING AND ADJUSTING:
A. Testing requirements of servicing utilities shall be
included.
B. Testing shall be conducted under the direction of the
Architect.
C. Piping: Each piping system shall be tested as specified
below in sections or upon completion of systems, or both.
However, piping shall not be concealed until it has
been tested, inspected and approved. Test time will
be accrued only while full head pressure is permissible.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
remove during test anything on system that will not
withstand pipe test pressure called for below, and
replace on completionof testing. All equipment
damage resulting form negligence is the responsibility
of the Contractor.
D. Special Note: Testing of systems such as soil, waste
and vent which may be covered by local, state or
national codes, shall be tested as herein noted or
in accordance with applicable codes, whichever is the
most rigid.
System Medium Pressure Duration Tolerance
Soil, water Water Top of 2 hours No joint
highest sweat
Water Lines Water 150 psi 2 hours None, except
temp. change
Gas Piping Air 150 psi 2 hours None.
END OF SECTION -
1
1-20? Page 14 of 14.
0
•
SECTION 15800 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division -1
specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances
and necessary incidentals for the complete installation
of all ventilation and air conditioning as shown on
the drawings and as specified herein.
1. Packaged heat pump unit and ductwork.
2. Ventilation fan and ductwork.
3. Unit Heater.
4. Electric controls for control of space
temperatures.
H. Related work Include in this Section:
1. Furnishing electrical devices necessary for
mechanical work, except disconnects unless
indicated otherwise.
2. Low voltage wiring for mechanical
controls including final connections as indicated
on wiring diagrams.
3. Conduit for low voltage wiring for
mechanical controls as indicated on wiring diagrams.
4. Responsibility for obtaining clarification of
discrepancies between mechanical and electrical
work from Architect prior to proceeding with the
work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. In addition to the requirements of all governing
codes, ordinances and agencies, conform to the
requirements of the following codes and standards:
a. state of California Administrative Code.
�Q
I
I
i
I
1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Health and Safety Code, State of California.
C. Uniform Mechanical Code.
d. National Board of Fire Underwriters Publications:
1. Pamphlet #70 - National Electrical Code.
2. Pamphlet #90A - Air Conditioning Systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings:
Within 35 days after award of contract, and before any
of the materials of this section are delivered to the
job site, submit complete shop drawings to the Architect
in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300 of
the specifications.
Show all details of all duct work, piping and equipment
pads.
B. Product Data:
Maintain throughout the progress of the work project
record drawings in accordance with Section 01720 and
submit to the Architect in compliance with the above
section.
D. Operating Manuals and Maintenance Manuals:
Submit four (4) copies of all operating instructions
and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01700.
I
I
IC,)oC/
1. submit six (6) copies of all manufacturer's product
data in accordance with requirements of Section 01300
simultaneously with all shop drawing submittals.
2. Product data to include all air conditioning equipment,
hangers, fans and other standard items as required
to complement shop drawings for a submittal indicating
all products to be used on this work.
3. Manufacturers and suppliers of equipment shall provide
all data necessary for compliance with the State of
California energy conservation standards. Compliance
certification for all equipment shall be included
in equipment submittals.
C. Record Drawings:
Maintain throughout the progress of the work project
record drawings in accordance with Section 01720 and
submit to the Architect in compliance with the above
section.
D. Operating Manuals and Maintenance Manuals:
Submit four (4) copies of all operating instructions
and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01700.
I
I
IC,)oC/
a? /O
E. Guarantees:
In addition to equipment warranties, furnish a written
guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship
for one year. Guarantee shall include repair of damage
to, or replacement of, any part of equipment or premises
caused by leaks or breaks in pipe or equipment provided
under this section.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Protection:
Take all precautions necessary to protect the materials
of this section before, during, and after installation.
B. Replacements:
In the event of damage, immediately repair all damaged
and defective work to the approval of the Architect,
at no additional cost to the owner.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Examination of site:
Examine the site and include in bid proposal all conditions
under which work is to be performed.
1.07 MISCELLANEOUS: ,
A. Permits and Fees:
Arrange, apply and pay for all necessary permits, ,
inspections, examinations and fees or charges require
by public authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Locations and Accessibility:
Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding
peculiarities and limitations of space available
for installation of work under this section. Valves,
motors, controls and other devices requiring service,
maintenance and adjustment shall be placed in fully
accessible positions and locations. Provide access
doors where required in ductwork and /or construction
whether specially detailed or not, and render all such
devices accessible.
5
11
I
L
E1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
to //
• •
C. Scaffolding:
Furnish all scaffolding, rigging and hoisting as required
for the proper execution of the work.
D. Drawings:
Drawings indicate desired location and arrangement of
piping, ductwork, equipment, and other items, and are
to be followed as closely as possible. All offsets
and interferences may not be shown because of the
scale of the drawings. Assume the responsibility for
coordinating the work with all other trades. Work
specified and not clearly defined by the drawings shall
be installed and arranged in a manner satisfactory to
Architect. In the event changes in indicated locations
and arrangements are deemed necessary by Architect, they
shall be made by this contractor without additional
charges provided the change is ordered before work is
installed and no extra materials are required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PACKAGED HEAT PUMP UNIT:
A. Furnish and install a single heat pump unit by
"Payne" or equal. Complete with automatic controls in
accordance with capacities indicated on Drawings. The
equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled,
precharged, piped and wired internally ready for field
connections. In addition, manufacturer shall test
operate system at the factory before shipment.
B. The cooling coils shall be non - ferrous construction with
aluminum fins mechanically bonded to durable copper
tubes. Coils shall be pressure lead tested. The
compressor shall be resiliently mounted, have overload
protection, internal pressure relief, low
ambient lockout control and crankcase heater. The
refrigeration system shall have expansion valve,
suction and discharge line service gage ports, liquid
line strainer, low pressure switch and full
refrigerant charge.
C. The cabinet shall be of galvanized steel with a baked -on
outdoor enamel paint finish. Base section and cabinet
panels where conditioned air is handled shall be fully
insulated to prevent sweating and minimize sound.
Lifting lugs shall be provided for easy rigging. Openings
shall be provided for power connection entry. All
components, wiring and inspection areas shall be
completely accessible through removable panels.
D. Air Movers: Single centrifugal conditioned air blowers
shall be direct driven by a single, one shafted, 3
speed motor. Blowers shall be statically and dynamically
balanced.
E. Propeller type condenser fan shall discharge vertically
and be direct driven. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed
with ball bearings, permanently lubricated, inherently
protected and equipped with rain shield. Fan shall have
a safety guard.
F. Air Filters: Cleanable filters furnished shall have not
less than the free area as indicated on drawings.
G. Vibration Isolators: Spring isolator M.W. SAUSSE type
RMSP -EQ with seismic restraint.
2.02 TOILET EXHAUST FAN:
A. Fans shall be centrifugal, direct drive type, ceiling
mounted in a heavy gauge aluminum fan housing. Tradewind
or equal.
B. size and capacities as scheduled on the drawings.
C. Fans shall bear the AMCA certified performance seal.
D. Fans shall be supplied with back draft dampers.
2.03 UNIT HEATER:
A. Gas fired, propeller fan unit heater, sterling, model
and rating indicated on drawings, factory assembled
and tested, AGA certified.
B. Heat exchanger made of aluminized steel.
C. Spark ignition control. The pilot burner to be ignited
only during each cycle of operation.
D. 24 volt control system with built -in thermostat.
2.04 INSULATION:
A. Safety: All insulation products used, including tapes,
adhesives and cements shall have fire and smoke hazard
ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E 784, NFPA 255, and
and UL 723, not exceeding: flame spread- 25 and smoke
developed - 50.
C�21�2_
B. Concealed Ducts: All supply and return ductwork shall
be insulated with 1 -1/2" thick Owens /Corning fiberglass
type ED -150 faced duct with vapor barrier wrap or equal.
Minimum R -value shall be 4.0.
2.06 FLEXIBLE: AIR DUCTS:
Shall be factory pre - insulated, composed of corrosion - resistant metal
support spiral, an airtight coated fabric liner and covered with
1" fiberglass blanket sheathed in a vinyl vapor barrier cover.
Duct shall comply with NFPA 90A and be listed as a Class 1 connector,
UL Standard 181. Low pressure duct connections shall have minimum
working pressure rating of 2 -1/2" W.G. Maximum length 7 feet.
I
I
U ?i3
2.05 LOW
VELOCITY SHEET METAL DUCTWORK;
A.
All ductwork and plenums shall be considered low velocity
for packaged air conditioning equipment, and toilet
exhaust systems, and shall be fabricated from galvanized
steel as indicated. Metal gages, construction hangers,
supports, braving and installation in accordance with
the latest edition of the SMACNA low velocity duct manual.
B.
Square elbows shall be used except where shown otherwise.
Equipment with turning vanes of the double vane type as
shown in Plate 22 of the duct manual.
C.
Duct dimensions are net inside.
D.
Tape all transverse joints of supply and return ducts with
4 oz. duct canvas, 6" wide, saturated in arabol lagging
adhesive or use duct sealant applied in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation.
E.
Flexible duct connections to air conditioning units, and fans
shall be neoprene coated glass fibercloth, approximately
6" wide held in place with securely bolted angle iron or straps.
Ventglas or equal.
F.
Volume dampers shall be constructed of 18 gage galvanized
metal with Ventlok hardware of equal complete with end
bearings and locking quadrant.
G.
Volume extractors for branch take offs shall be Titus model AG -45
or approved equal for duct take off 12" and smaller and
Model AG -255 or approved equal for ducts larger than 12 ".
2.06 FLEXIBLE: AIR DUCTS:
Shall be factory pre - insulated, composed of corrosion - resistant metal
support spiral, an airtight coated fabric liner and covered with
1" fiberglass blanket sheathed in a vinyl vapor barrier cover.
Duct shall comply with NFPA 90A and be listed as a Class 1 connector,
UL Standard 181. Low pressure duct connections shall have minimum
working pressure rating of 2 -1/2" W.G. Maximum length 7 feet.
I
I
U ?i3
2.07 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS:
All outlets shall provide the required air flow and spread with no
drafts or excessive air movement within the occupied areas. Any
accessories required to effect these conditions shall be
provided and installed by the Contractor. Equipment specified
as indicated on drawings is the product of amemostat. Alternate
equipment submitted for review shall be presented with
engineering data to verify that the alternate product is equal
to the specified equipment in regard to the size, quality
of construction, aspiration, throw, pressure drop and sound
level.
A.
Ceiling diffusers shall be perforated 24" x 24" lay -in
panel on inverted tile ceiling, using a modular type
diffuser. Anemostat Model FRED.
B.
Return registers located in inverted tile ceiling shall
shall be anemostat model PDLP 24 x 24 panels in accordance
with neck size specified on drawings.
C.
Exhaust registers located in gypsum board ceilings shall
be anemostat model GC50.
2.08 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS:
A.
Temperature controls for area to be of the electric type
and shall include temperature control, relays, temperature
control panels and other devices necessary for the proper
operation of the temperature control system.
B.
sequence of Operation: Time clock located as noted shall
start the heat pump system. See drawings for controls.
C.
Space thermostat shall modulate the unit compressor to control
space temperature. Provide automatic changeover room
thermostats furnished by control manufacturer.
D.
Calibration and final adjustments: Installation and
calibration of complete system shall be performed by
temperature control manufacturer. Calibrate all devices,
make all final settings and test out control system under
actual operating conditions for satisfactory operation.
E.
Submittals: Submit shop drawings of the proposed temperature
r
control system. List of materials being furnished and a
detailed description of the control sequence. Provide
manufacturer's literature on the operation and maintenance
,
of the control system including control diagram, control
sequence, parts list, and an instruction sheet for each
control device installed.
'
I
any
i
F. GUARANTEE: PROVIDE A ONE YEAR FREE SERVICE AND GUARANTEE PERIOD,
AND ONE YEAR AFTER OCCUPANCY.
G. MANUFACTURER: CONTROLS SHALL BE HONEYWELL OR EQUAL.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. DUCT WORK: ALL DUCT WORK SHALL BE ERECTED TRUE TO THE DIMENSIONS
INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. THE DUCTS SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED TO
THE BUILDING AND SHALL BE SO INSTALLED AS TO BE COMPLETELY FREE FROM
VIBRATION UNDER ALL CONDITIONS OF OPERATION AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SMACNA DUCT MANUAL. PROVIDE LATERAL SUPPORT FOR DUCT RISERS AT NO
LESS THAN 10 FEET ON CENTERS.
B. CONTRACTOR REQUESTED DEVIATION FROM THE DRAWINGS, SHALL BE DESCRIBED
IN SHOP DRAWINGS OF PROPOSED CHANGE, SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW. ALL CHANGES
IN SIZE SHALL BE MADE ON THE BASIS OF THE NEW SIZE HAVING THE SAME
FRICTION LOSS AS THE INDICATED SIZE. ANY REVISIONS SHALL BE MADE
WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST, TO THE OWNER.
3.02 _AIR SIDE TEST AND BALANCE_ (TO BE PERFORMED AFTER ALL AIR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEMS ARE COMPLETE) .
A. AFTER INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE, THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM SHALL HE
PUT IN FULL OPERATION AND THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM BALANCED.
1 B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SET ALL DAMPERS SO THAT THE VOLUME OF AIR INDICATED
ON THE DRAWINGS IS BEING DELIVERED AT THE OPENINGS. HE SHALL ADJUST
AND READJUST THIS PART OF THE WORK UNTIL THE OPERATION COMPLIES WITH,
THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL AIR VOLUMES ARE ADJUSTED
TO WITHIN 5% AS DRAWN. MARK PERMANE14T POSITION OF DAMPERS AFTER BALANCE
HAS BEEN COMPLETED. ALSO MART: WITH A CURVED ARROW DIRECTIOIJ TO OPEN
AND INDICATE WITH A SLASH MARK THE FULLY CLOSED POSITION.
C. MARL ANY CHANGES Iiv TjiE PULLEYS, BELTS OR DAMPERS OR THE ADDITION OF
DAMPERS AS MAY BE FOUND NECESSARY TO ACHIEVE CORRECT BALANCE.
D. MAKE A COMPLETE WRITTEN DETAILED REPORT OF EACH TEST TO THE ARCHITECT.
I[JCLUDING AIR VOLUME READINGS AT ALL SUPPLY, RETURI4 AND EXHAUST FANS
AND AIR OPENINGS, THE TOTAL STATIC RESISTANCE OF THE FANS, AMPERES
AND BRAKE HP READINGS OF TalE MOTORS, FAN AND MOTOR PULLEY SIZES AIGD
SPLI: DS.
E. ADJUST AIJD READJUST THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM SO THAT ALL THERMO-
STATS ARE MAINTAIWING THE REQUIRED TEMPERATURES IN ALL PORTIONS OF THE
6UILDING SO EQUIPPED.
F. ALL TESTS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE PRESENCE OF THE AUTHORIZED REPRE-
SENTATIVL: OF THE OWNER.
3.03 PAINTING
* l A. ALL DUCT WORK VISIBLE THROUGH REGISTER, GRILLE, AND DIFFUSER OPENINGS
• • 1
t
SHALL BE GIVEN TWO COATS OF FLAT BLACK PAINT.
B. ALL FERROUS METAL SHALL BE GIVEN ONE SHOP COAT OF RED LEAD OR
OTHER APPROVED RUST RESISTAI4T PAINT. WHERE ZINC COATED METAL IS
AS A GUIDE.
FURNISHED, IT SHALL NOT BE SHOP PRIMED, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY CALLED
1.
FOR, BUT ALL ABRADED PLACES AND WELDS SHALL BE TOUCHED UP WITH
GALVALLOY OR EQUAL.
MANUFACTUREE's CUTS AND RATING TABLES, INCLUDING BROCHURES
C. ALL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND SWITCHES SHALL BE LABELED BY MEANS OF
- PLASTIC NAMEPLATES TO SHOW FUNCTION. LETTERING 014 NAMEPLATES
NOT LESS THAN 3/16" HIGH.
OILING, LUBRICATION AND GREASING DATA.
D. IN ADDITION TO SIGNS DESCRIBED ABOVE, EACH MAJOR COMPONENT OF
,
EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE MANUFACTURER "S NAME, ADDRESS AND CATALOG
NUMBER ON A PLATE SECURELY ATTACHED TO SUCH AN ITEM.
AIR FLOW DATA ON ALL FANS.
3.04 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND SERVICE MANUALS
6.
A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE OWNER WITH TWO SETS OF OPERATING
PROCEEDURES AND SERVICE MANUALS FOR THE AIR CO14DITIONING EQUIPMENT
INCLUDING "AS- BUILT" CONTROL DIAGRAM AND PARTS MANUAL. THESE MANUALS
SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW IMMEADIATELY ON COMPLETIO14 OF THE WORK.
FAILURE TO SUBMIT FOR REVIEW WILL DELAY FINAL INSPECTION A14D ACCEPTA24CE
OF THE WORK.
B. THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TOGETHER WITH ANY OTHER NECESSARY PERTINENT
DATA SHALL BE INCLUDED. THIS LIST MAY NOT BE COMPLETE AND IS TO
USED ONLY
AS A GUIDE.
1.
PART NUMBERS OF ALL REPLACEABLE ITEMS.
2.
MANUFACTUREE's CUTS AND RATING TABLES, INCLUDING BROCHURES
ON ALL EQUIPMENT LISTED UNDER : "APPROVALS REQUIRED ".
3.
OILING, LUBRICATION AND GREASING DATA.
4.
COMPLETE ELECTRICAL LOAD DATA FROM OPERATING TEST.
5.
AIR FLOW DATA ON ALL FANS.
6.
BELT SIZES, TYPES AND LENGTHS.
7.
SERIAL NUMBERS OF ALL PRINCIPAL PIECES OF EQUIPMENT.
8.
COMPANY's NAMES, ADDRESSES, AND PHONE NUMBERS OF ALL
SUPPLIERS AND /OR MANUFACTURERS.
9.
CONTROL DIAGRAM AND OPERATION SEQUENCE TOGETHER WITH
LABELING OF CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS TO MATCH DIAGRAM.
10.
AIR BALANCE REPORT.
11.
WRITTEN GUARANTEE.
3.05 OPERATION TEST
AT COMPLETION, CONTRACTOR SHALL OPERATE THE SYSTEM FOR TWO FULL DAYS ,
TO DEMONSTRATE FULFILLMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT.
DURING THIS TIME, ALL NECESSARY .ADJUSTMENTS SHALL BE MADE TO THE EQUIP-
MENT AND CONTROLS SO THAT THE SYSTEM IS OPERATING PROPERLY. THE ENTIRE
SYSTEM IS TO BE LEFT IN PERFECT OPERATING CONDITION ACCEPTABLE TO THE
OWNER.
3.06 SERVICE I
NINETY DAYS FREE SERVICE SHALL BE PROVIDED AFTER CERTIFICATION OF
.2/6 1
i
i
i
1%
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, INCLUDING CHANGING OF PRE- FILTERS. THIS
SERVICE SHALL START THE OPERATION TEST AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK.
SHOULD THE SYSTEM BE STARTED IN THE WINTER MONTHS, THIS CONTRACTOR
SHALL RETURN AT THE FIRST COOLING SEASON AND MAKE THE NECESSARY
ADJUSTMENTS TO PROVIDE UNINTERUPTED OPERATION FOR THE BALANCE OF
THE COOLING SEASON. .
END OF SECTION
o? /B
i
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART I: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION. Division 16 includes everything necessary for
and in dental to executing and completing electrical work,
except as hereinafter excluded.
1.02 WORK IN DIVISION 16. Principal items include:
A. Power connections to existing main service and metering
equipment, and feeders for light and power systems to
tenant space as shown on plans.
B. Panelboards and branch circuit
power systems with connection
panels.
wiring for lighting and
to new and existing
C. Lighting fixtures, lamps, outlets, wiring devices, con-
nection of all equipment furnished by others except as
specifically excluded.
D. Conduit only for telephone system, computer cable
system, cotrolled access system and fire -life safety
system.
E. Conduit and wiring, including final connections, of air
conditioning control system.
1.03 RELATED WORK NOT IN DIVISION 16.
A. Concrete work, unless otherwise specified; however, fur-
nish templates and anchor bolts required for installa-
tion of electrical equipment. Refer to Division 3 for
information on placing inserts and sleeves in forms.
B. Telephone conduit.
C. Automatic temperature control apparatus such as pressure
solenoid valves, pneumatic- electric switches, electronic
recording and controlling instruments, etc., for hea-
ting, ventilating, and climate control equipment.
D. Painting, unless otherwise specified.
1.04 PERMITS AND FEES. Secure and pay for all necessary permits,
inspections, examinations, and fees or charges necessary for
execution and completion of electrical work. Arrange for
power and telephone utility services and connections. verify
Electrical 16000
Page 1
I
I
I
I
1.1
I
I
L;
I
I
1
0
•
for clarification. Do
applicable.
service locations and conform
to the requirements of
the power
t.
and telephone companies
and p X all service and excess
cable
be construed
charges. Provide trenching, ducts, pul boxes,
vaults,
pre urinary and secondary
cabling, etc. as required.
1.05 REGULATIONS AND CODES.
All work and materials shall
conform
to t e a test ition of
amendments thereto of the
following
Codes where specified.
National Electrical Code, 1981 Edition.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
Requirements of the serving utility companies.
Requirements of Federal, State, or City agencies
having jurisdiction.
1.06 KNOWLEDGE. It is anticipated and required that the Elec-
tric� al Subcontractor be thoroughly familiar with local elec-
trical codes and regulations. Every attempt has been made to
eliminate unnecessary redundancy and duplication of
requirements for materials and installation methods already
contained in existing codes and regulations.
1.07 CONFLICTS. When Drawings or Specifications call for
matemate —riaZs or work different than, but not in conflict with,
requirements of governing codes provide and install these
materials or work. If there are any apparent conflicts between
Drawings and Specifications and prevailing Codes and
1.09 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
A. Architectural and Structural Drawin s take precedence
over Electrical Drawings. Mec anica and Plumbing Dra-
wings contain information pertinent to the electrical
installation. The electrical installation shall conform
to the applicable requirements of all the drawings, and
the electrical work shall be coordinated with that of
all other trades.
B. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in many respects.
Sizes and locations of equipment and wiring are shown to
Electrical 16000
Page 2.
iq
regulations,
ask Architect and Engineer
for clarification. Do
applicable.
not proceed
with any related work until
such clarification has
established
been made.
Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications is to
be construed
to permit work in violation
of governing codes.
1.08 LISTING AND
APPROVAL. All materials
installed on this pro-
ject shall
be listed or approved by
Underwriter's Labora-
1.09 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
A. Architectural and Structural Drawin s take precedence
over Electrical Drawings. Mec anica and Plumbing Dra-
wings contain information pertinent to the electrical
installation. The electrical installation shall conform
to the applicable requirements of all the drawings, and
the electrical work shall be coordinated with that of
all other trades.
B. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in many respects.
Sizes and locations of equipment and wiring are shown to
Electrical 16000
Page 2.
iq
tories, Inc. (UL)
and shall bear the label thereof where
applicable.
Under certain
conditions, such as when UL has not
established
testing
procedures, no listing or approval is
available.
authorities
In these
and from
cases, obtain prior approval from local
Architect and Engineer.
1.09 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
A. Architectural and Structural Drawin s take precedence
over Electrical Drawings. Mec anica and Plumbing Dra-
wings contain information pertinent to the electrical
installation. The electrical installation shall conform
to the applicable requirements of all the drawings, and
the electrical work shall be coordinated with that of
all other trades.
B. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in many respects.
Sizes and locations of equipment and wiring are shown to
Electrical 16000
Page 2.
iq
• • 1
scale where possible but may be distorted for clarity on
the Drawings to show all necessary bends, offsets, pull
boxes and obstructions. Contractor shall install the
Work to conform to the structure, preserve headroom and
keep openings and passageways clear.
C.
SHOP DRAWINGS. Provide equipment and materials
conforming to Drawings and Specificatins. Manufacturers
,
Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Architect and
Engineer as a service to the Contractor to assist him in
obtaining equipment which is in compliance with Drawings
and Specifications. However, Shop Drawings will not be
accepted for review by the Architect and Engineer until
the Contractor has reviewed them and is satisfied that
the equipment he is proposing to furnish will be in
compliance with these Specifications and Drawings.
D.
Submittal. Within 14 days after award of Contract, sub-
mit S op Drawings for the following items:
1. Switchgear, including service equipment, sub -
distribution swtichboards and panelboards, lighting
■
and power panelboards, and other related items of
equipment.
2. Wiring devices and plates.
3. Lighting fixtures, including installation details.
M
E.
Information to Manufacturers. Furnish to the various
equipment manufacturers cop es of Drawings and Specifa-
cations relating to their products.
F.
As built Drawings. Keep an accurate dimensioned record
on reproducable transparencies of as -built locations,
and of work which is installed differently from that
shown. Refer to Section 01700.
G.
Locations and Accessibility. Contractor shall fully
inform himse regar ing peculiarities and limitations
of spaces available for installation of work and mate-
rials furnished and installed under this Division. Dra-
wings indicate location and arrangement of conduit,
equipment, and other items, and are to be followed as
closely as possible. Work specified and not clearly
defined by Drawings shall be installed and arranged in a
manner satisfactory to the Architect. In event changes
in indicated locations and arrangements are deemed nece-
ssary, by the Architect, they shall be made by Contrac-
tor without additional charge provided that change is
ordered before Work is installed and no extra material
or labor are required.
1.10 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND PREMISES. Clean equip-
ment
an materia s thorough y. Leave sur aces to be painted
Electrical 16000
Page 3
aav
1 •
smooth and clean, ready for painter. Clean entire premises of
unused materials, rubbish, debris, and dirt created by work
under this Division.
1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. Fully instruct and
emonstrate to the Owner's operating personnel the perfor-
mance, operation and maintenance of equipment. The item
allowed for said instruction shall be allowed for each Con-
tractor as part of these Contract Documents.
1.12 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT. Upon completion of electrical work,
adjustand test circuits, outlets, switches, lights, motors,
and other electrical items to insure proper operation of
electrical equipment. Check service voltages under maximum
load. Items, fixtures, and parts in need of correction and
discovered during such testing shall be immediately repaired
or replaced with new equipment, and that part of the system
shall be retested. Such replacement or repair shall be done at
no additional cost to Owner. All exterior adjustable lighting
fixtures shall be aimed after dark= if required, in the
1 presence of, and at a time convenient to the Architect /
Engineer.
' 1.13 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE. After all requirements of
drawings and Spec cat ons have been completed,
representative of Owner, Architect, and Engineer will review
the Work. Contractor shall provide competent personnel to
demonstrate the operation of any item or system involved prior
to requesting Architect's /Engineer's inspection for
certification of substantial completion, complete the
following and list known exceptions in writing:
A. Obtain final inspections and approvals from all
governmental jurisdictions as required for the project.
B. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, warranties,
and similar final record information.
C. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials,
and similar physical items to Owner.
D. Complete start -up, testing and demonstration of systems
to the satisfaction of the Architect that the entire
installation is complete, properly adjusted and is in
proper operating condition.
E. Complete final cleaning up requirements.
1 F. Lens and diffusers shall be completely cleaned of all
dust, dirt, and fingerprints after the installation of
the light fixtures, ceiling, painting, lamps, and prior
to occupancy of the facility by the Owner.
I
Electrical 16000
Page 4
a��
1.14 WARRANTY. Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a written
warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one
(1) year, including repair of damage of any part of premises
or other equipment caused by equipment furnished and installed
under this Division.
1.15 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS AND "APPROVED EQUALS ":
A. Equipment and wiring shown on Plans is for materials as
specified. Should equipment of other manufacturers be
approved and used, the Contractor shall make all changes
in other equipment, conduit, wiring, or location of
equipment, as approved by the Owner without charge to
the Owner.
B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to show that
all products proposed for substitution are equal to the
item specified, by submitting sufficient information to
permit a comparative check. Five (5) copies of a com-
plete materials list with brochures showing all equip-
ment shall be indexed with job title, material must be
submitted within 10 days after award of contract. Pro-
posed substitutions submitted after 10 days will not be
accepted. Submitting a catalog number and manufacturer's
name and stating that the item will be furnished to meet
specifications, will not be acceptable. The following
items by make and number, where applicable, must be
listed in the submittal: underground conduit, rigid
galvanized steel conduit, cable, wire, pull boxes, fix-
tures, lamps, control equipment, outlets, boxes, etc. If
requested by the Engineer, the contractor shall submit
for inspection, samples of both the specified and pro-
posed items electricaly wired at 120V with plug.
C. The term "or approved equal" shall mean the product or
ma- terial used shall have equivalent or more value to
the City based on the value of the item set forth in the
specifications or plans, and then only after a submittal
in writing, by the Contractor and written approval re-
ceived. If, after installation substituted equipment is
found not to be equal to material specified, it shall be
replaced with approved material at no cost to the Owner.
The Engineer reserves the right to charge the Contractor
$100.00 /hour for review of substitution.
1.16 PERMITS AND FEES. Secure and pay for all necessary permits,
inspections, examinations, and fees or charges necessary for
execution and completion of electrical work. Arrange for power
and telephone utility services and connections (including
coordination for obtaining services by the required dates of
construction completion) and pay any required fees of charges.
Electrical 16000
��� Page 5
�i
PART II: GENERAL MATERIALS
2.01
DESCRIPTION. Materials specified herein are general in
nature only, and are not necessarily complete. All material
specified may not be required.
2.02
APPROVED PRODUCT (MANUFACTURERS)
Furnish and install only materials indicated and specified.
Substitutions are not permitted.
A. Wiring Devices and Plates. Sierra Electric Corp., unless
otherwise specified.
B. Lamps. Sylvania, Westinghouse and General Electric, or
as indicated on Drawings.
C. Ballasts. Universal or approved equal.
D. Panelboards and Switchboards (Switchgear). Square D.
Sylvania (Zinsco)j General Electric, Cutler - Hammer, RSE
'
Co.
E. Safety Switches and Motor Starters. Same as Panelboards
and Switchboards.
"R"
F. Fuses shall be class Type as indicated on Drawing,
as manufactured by Bussmann. No substitutions allowed.
Furnish to Owner two extra fuses of each size a._nUtype
used in main switchboard in a metal hinges type box,
size as required. All mount box in electrical room. All
fuses shall be JNN /JJS type as required by plans.
G. Dimmers. Prescolite.
H. Flexible wiring. Walkerflex, Daybright or Wiremold.
I. Transformers. General Electric, Gould, Westinghouse,
Sylvania or Square D.
J. Controlled Access Systems. Secom.
K. Fire Life /Safety. Honeywell.
L. Enclosed Raceway. 3M- Modular Distribution Systems.
2.03
FINISHES.
A. Metal Surfaces shall be cleaned by means of a process
equivalent to "Parkerizing" and given a rust inhibiting
coat, such as zinc chromate, prior to application of
finish paint.
Electrical 16000
Page 6
U�?3
B. Surface- Mounted Equipment, such as panelboards, switch-
boards, motor control centers, gutters, pull and jun-
ction boxes and cabinets for control, and signal sys-
tems, including telephone, and like items shall have a
nameplate showing pertinent information. Nameplates
shall be engraved, laminated bake -lite or aluminum, with
white letters on black background. Attach with 6 x, 32
self- tapping machine screws. Card golders, plastic tape
or other means of attachment are not acceptable. Do not
use abbreviations.
2.04 WIRE
AND CABLE CONDUCTORS shall be copper No. 12 AWG minimum
unless specifically no otherwise on Drawings. Conductors
No.
10 AWG copper and smaller shall be solid and No. 8 AWG
copper and larger shall be stranded. Type of wire shall be as
follows:
A.
Type TW, 600 Volt insulation shall be used for No. AWG
copper and smaller.
B.
Type THW, 600 Volt insulation shall be used for sizes
No. 2 AWG copper and larger for panel feeders.
C.
Type THWN, 600 Volt insulation shall be used for all
underground (wet location) circuits.
D.
Type THHN, 600 Volt insulation shall be used for all
branch circuit conductors installed in conduit outside
of air conditioned spaces and other hot locations.
E.
Cable Markers.
1. Lettering is to be black on a white background.
2. Lettering is to be typed.
3. Lettering shall be on either: a white tape that is
applied directly to the cable and then covered with
a clear heat - shrinkable material or typed directly
on heat - shrinkable material.
2.05 Receptacles for 20 ampere branch circuits shall be speci- '
fication grade duplex type, Sierra "Sierraplex "/1800 Series;
15 ampere, 125 volt. 1
2.06 Coverplates shall be as required for devices to be covered.
A. Coverplates for outlets exposed to weather shall be
Sierra "WP" Series.
I
Electrical 16000
��y Page 7
1 2.08 PANELBOARDS
C.
Coverplates. In utility areas such as laundry
buildings, pool equipment, elevator equipment,
electrical rooms, etc. use stainless steel. In all
B., Wiring
Devices.
in utility areas such as janitors
closets.
toilet
rooms, storage rooms and the like, use
ivory.
In all other areas, use color as selected by the
Architect.
1
1 2.08 PANELBOARDS
C.
Coverplates. In utility areas such as laundry
buildings, pool equipment, elevator equipment,
electrical rooms, etc. use stainless steel. In all
other areas, ivory, plastic, or as selected by the
Architect.
D.
Engraving. Outlets other than standard 120 volt single
phase receptacles and switches for general lighting
shall have a coverplate or nameplate engraved with logi-
1
cal information for the device concerned.
2.07 MANUAL WALL DIMMERS
residential builduings and living units service strictly
A.
Dimmers to solid state, remotely controlled semi-
living areas may be plug -in type.
conductor type for dimming of 120V or 277V fluorescent
Buss Size shall be as indicated. Where not shown, size
lamps, and shall be UL listed.
the s to equal ampacity of feeder switch or circuit
B.
Manual dimmers shall be 277V for fluorescent, and 115V
breaker. In no case shall buss ampacity be less than 100
amperes.
for incandescent and have adequate capacity to dim up to
20 F40 lamps or 1800 watts, respectively.
Finish. Where panels are mounted flush with wall, the
C.
Dimming system components shall be UL listed.
1 2.08 PANELBOARDS
Electrical 16000
Page 8
i U ;)
A.
General Construction. Panels shall have hinged doors,
not ocka e. W ere such panells are flush mounted,
fronts and doors shall be of concealed construction
with no visible hinages or mounting hardware.
B.
Panels shall contain therma - magnetic trip, bolt -on type,
QB circuit breakers rated for 120/208 volts, 60 cycle,
AC (10,000 A.I.C. rating). Ampere rating and number of
1
poles are shown on panel schedules. All panels inside
residential builduings and living units service strictly
living areas may be plug -in type.
C.
Buss Size shall be as indicated. Where not shown, size
the s to equal ampacity of feeder switch or circuit
breaker. In no case shall buss ampacity be less than 100
amperes.
D.
Finish. Where panels are mounted flush with wall, the
1
rr nd door shall be given a primer coat, to be finis-
ti a
hed painted by others. Where panels are surface mounted,
all exposed surfaces shall be finished as specified
previously.
Electrical 16000
Page 8
i U ;)
2.10 FUSED AND NON -FUSED SWITCHES.
I
A. Switches shall be heavy duty type, horsepower- rated.
Pr�3e a padlocking device so switches may be locked in
either "on" or "off" position,
Electrical 16000
�a F, Page 9
E.
Name late! Panel nameplates shall show panel name,
.
volt p ase and number of wire. Example:
PANEL 2A
120/208 V
3 0, 4W
F.
Circuit Direc to Each circuit shall be identified by a
on
—ca-a- mounte inside of panel door with following
information neatly typed.
Number and type of outlets on circuit.
Load in volt -amps per phase.
Location of outlets.
2.09 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS. Unless otherwise specified, motor
shall
e magnetic, ful voltage, non - reversible type, with
coil
voltage as shown on wiring diagram or as indicated.
A.
indicated in Size "l ".
Size. As but no case smaller than
B.
Enclosure. Where not installed in a switchboard or motor
control center, install starters in NEMA 1 enclosure. If
installed outdoors or exposed to weather or moisture,
enclosure shall be NEMA 3R.
C.
Overload Relays. Quantity: Provide one for each phase,
three phase loads. They shall be of a bi- metallic type
with externally operable reset button.
D.
Size Heaters for current rating of motor to be con-
trolled. Do not install heater units until nameplate
rating of motor has been verified by visual inspection
of motor actually installed.
E.
Auxiliary Relays shall be provided in each starter com-
partment and wired as shown on Drawings.
F.
Pilot Devices. Starters shall have a "hand- off -auto" se-
lector switch, spring return to "off" from the "hand"
position only, and a red pilot light. Mount these
devices in the compartment cover, not on wiring.gutter
cover and not between units when a motor control center.
Connect as shown on Drawings.
G.
Auxiliary Contacts. Provide a minimum of one spare auxi-
liary contact on each starter.
2.10 FUSED AND NON -FUSED SWITCHES.
I
A. Switches shall be heavy duty type, horsepower- rated.
Pr�3e a padlocking device so switches may be locked in
either "on" or "off" position,
Electrical 16000
�a F, Page 9
1 • 0
P
B. Enclosure. Where installed indoors in dry locations,
inst' —T switches in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Where installed
out -doors or exposed to weather or moisture, install
switches in a NEMA 3R enclosure.
C. Interlock. Provide a mechanical interlock so that cover
oswi£cTi mechanism cannot be opened or removed when
switch is in the "on' position. However, provide a
"defect" device which may be operated by authorized
personnel to allow inspection of switch while it is in
the "on' position.
( 2.11 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS. Units shall consist of a fused
switch and magnetic motor starter factory mounted in a common
door. Line side of motor shall be factory wired to load side
of breaker or switch.
2.12 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS. Units shall consist of a tumbler type
switch with therms overload trip, interchangeable heater
unit, and pilot light.
2.13 SIZE HEATERS for current rating of motor to be controlled. Do
not instalr heater units until nameplate rating of motor has
been verified by visual inspection of motor actually installed.
A. Enclosure. Use NEMA Type 1 enclosure, or flush mounted
as indicated.
2.14 CONDUIT. Conduit shall be as permitted or required by Code,
except:
1 A. Flexible Aluminum Conduit shall not be used.
B. Sealt its Flexible Conduit shall be used for final con -
nections to motors or other types of vibration producing
equipment. Use lengths not less than one(1) foot but not
greater than the three(3) feet.
Electrical 16000
a�7 Page 10
C.
Rigid Non - Metallic Conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC,
minimum. Where bends terminate above grade or floor or
in areas where subject to physical damage during or
after construction, use rigid steel factory ells.
D.
Running Threads shall not be used.
2.15 FIRE
ALARM SYSTEM
A.
The site's existing system shall be extended as
indicaterd on electrical Drawings.
B.
The City to install new system. Coordinate with the
City fire alarm manufacturer for power and wiring
requirements.
Electrical 16000
a�7 Page 10
2.16 INTERCOM SYSTEM
A. Provide intercom system as noted on plans.
2.17 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER I
A. Furnish and install, as indicated on the electrical
plans; Sorgel dry -type transformers as manufactured by
the Square D Company, or approved equal.
B.
Single phase transformers shall be 480 volt primary and
120/240 volt secondary. Three phase transformers shall
be 480 volt delta primary and 208Y/120 volt delta
secondary. Transformers 25 RVA and larger shall have a
minimum of 4 -2 1 /2S full capacity primary taps. Exact
,
voltages and taps to be as designated on the plans or
the transformer schedule.
C.
Transformers 15 RVA and above shall be 150oC temperature
rise above 40oC ambient. All insulating materials to be
in accordance with NEMA ST20 -1972 standards for a 220oC
UL component recognized insulation system.
D.
Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound
construction and shall be impregnated with non -
hygroscopic, thereto- setting varnish.
E.
All cores to be constructed of high grade, non -aging
silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low
hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux
densities are to be kept well below the saturation
,
point. The core laminations shall be clamped together
with structural steel angles. The completed core and
coil shall then be bolted to the base of the enclosure
but isolated therefrom by means of rubber, vibration -
absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal -to -metal con-
tact between the core and coil and the enclosure. On
transformers 500, RVA and smaller, the vibration isola-
ting system shall be designed to provide a permanent
fastening of the core and coil to the enclosure. Sound
isolating systems requiring the complete removal of all
fastening devices will not be acceptable.
F.
Transformers 15 RVA and larger shall be in a heavy gauge
sheet steel, ventilated enclosure. The ventilating ope-
nings shall be designed to prevent accidental access to
live parts in accordance with UL, NEMA, and National
Electrical Code standards for ventilated enclosures.
Single phase transformers 15 RVA through 167 RVA and
three phase transformers through 112.5 RVA shall be
designed so they can be either floor or wall mounted.
Larger transformers shall be designed only for floor
mounting.
Electrical 16000
���5
Page 11
G. The entire transformer enclosure shall be degreased,
cleaned, phosphatized, primed, and finished with a grey,
baked enamel.
H. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure
shall not exceed 50oC rise above a 40oC ambient.
I. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to
the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor
sized in accordance with applicable NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI
standards.
J. Sound levels shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer not
to exceed the following:
15 to 50 KVA -45DB; 51 to 150 KVA -50DB;
151 to 300KVA -55DB; 301 to 500 KVA -60DB
K. The transformers shall be listed by Underwriters' Labo-
ratory for the specified temperature rise.
1 PART III: LIGHTING FIXTURES
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide light fixtures complete including lamps,
ballasts, sockets, housings, ceiling trim rings for
special ceilings, brackets, diffusers /lenses and outlet
boxes.
B. The catalog numbers included in the description of the
various types of lighting fixtures shall be basically
considered to establish the type or class of the fixture
with a particualr manufacturer only. The fixture length,
number of lamps,. component materials, accessories,
mounting type and all other features required to fulfill
the total description of the fixture based on all
drawing and specification information shall be complied
with regardless of whether or not the catalog number
specifically includes these features. If any conflict
exists between the catalog number and the description,
the Contractor shall either resolve the conflict with
the Architect prior to submittal of his bid or furnish
the fixture to meet the intent as later interpreted by
the Architect without change in contract price.
C. Lighting fixtures shall be of types as indicated in
fixture schedule on drawings.
Electrical 16000
�/ Page 12
3.02
3.03
o23a
D. All fixtures to match building standards.
E. All fixtures of one type shall be of one manufacturer
and of identical finish and appearance, unless indicated
otherwise on drawings.
BALLASTS
A.
Fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with ETL approved
C.B.M. certified high power factor ballasts with lowest
sound rating available. Fluorescent fixtures shall be
designed to accommodate T -12, 430 m.a. lamps except
where specified otherwise. Ballasts shall have Class "P"
protection. Fluorescent ballasts shall be full light
,
output rated, with specified lamps and shall have the
following characteristics:
Rapid Start (F40T12 RS)
Lamp Wattage. Average Input Watts
Two - 40W (Standard) 86
Two - 34/35W (Energy Saver 460MA) 77
One - 40W (Standard) 50
One - 34/35W (Energy Saver 460MA) 43
Two - 110W (Standard) Highoutput 255
Two - 11OW (Energy Saver) Highoutput 237
Two - 95W (Energy Saver) Highoutput 213
B.
Each ballast shall be independently fused within ballast
compartment. Provide a label next to ballast cover
reading: "Ballast if fused, check fuse prior to
relamping ". Provide an additional quantity of 108 spare
fuses and deliver to Owner.
LAMPS
A.
Lamps shall be new, of wattage indicated and shall be as
manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse (W&K
trademark), Norelco or Sylvania. Each fixture or
lighting outlet shall be supplied with the proper lamp.
B.
General purpose incandescent lamps shall be inside
frosted, medium base for 200 watts and smaller.
C.
Reflector lamps shall be PAR -30 or R40 ar required,
unless otherwise specified in fixture schedule.
Electrical 16000
Page 13
a
I
I
I
E.
u
I
I
I
I
1
i
3/
2. F40/T12 /RS 34/35 Cool White 2775 20,000
3. F40 /T12/RS 40 Cool White 3150 20,000
(To be used in fixtures with fluorescent dimming)
4. F40 /T12/RS -U 34/35 Lite White 2800. 18,000
5. F40/T12 /RS -U 40 Cool White 3050 18,000
(To be used in fixtures with fluorescent dimming)
6. F96 /TR /RS 95 Lite White 8800 12,000
High Output
7. Other types as noted on drawings.
High pressure sodium lamps shall be clear unless noted
otherwise on drawings..
3.04 LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Lighting fixtures shall have all parts and fittings
necessary to complete and properly install the fixture.
All fixtures shall be equipped with lamps of size and
type specified.
B. Fixtures shall be wired from outlet boxes supplied with
fixture to socket, with t14 AWG Underwriters'Type "AF" or
"CF" fixture wire.
C. Surface and /or wall mounted lightin fixtures shall not
have any exposed chase nipples or conduit knockouts
visible to view within fixture housing. Lighting
fixtures mounted in continuous rows shall have chase
nipples or conduit knockouts between lighting fixture
housing, but shall not have visible chase
nipples /conduit knockouts on the visible ends of the
continuous row of lighting fixtures.
D. Where fixture color is indicated to be selected by the
Architect, provide two color ship samples for review.
Electrical 16000
Page 14
D. Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type, lite
white, bi -pin,
rapid - start, T -12, 480, 35 -watt, 430
m.a., except as
"Watt
specified differently, General Electric
-Miser II"
or Sylvania "Super Saver ii". Lamps
shall have the following characteristics:
Average
Initial Lamp
Lamp Type
Watts Color Lummens Life Hrs
1. F40/T12/RS
34/35 Lite White 2925 20,000
a
I
I
I
E.
u
I
I
I
I
1
i
3/
2. F40/T12 /RS 34/35 Cool White 2775 20,000
3. F40 /T12/RS 40 Cool White 3150 20,000
(To be used in fixtures with fluorescent dimming)
4. F40 /T12/RS -U 34/35 Lite White 2800. 18,000
5. F40/T12 /RS -U 40 Cool White 3050 18,000
(To be used in fixtures with fluorescent dimming)
6. F96 /TR /RS 95 Lite White 8800 12,000
High Output
7. Other types as noted on drawings.
High pressure sodium lamps shall be clear unless noted
otherwise on drawings..
3.04 LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Lighting fixtures shall have all parts and fittings
necessary to complete and properly install the fixture.
All fixtures shall be equipped with lamps of size and
type specified.
B. Fixtures shall be wired from outlet boxes supplied with
fixture to socket, with t14 AWG Underwriters'Type "AF" or
"CF" fixture wire.
C. Surface and /or wall mounted lightin fixtures shall not
have any exposed chase nipples or conduit knockouts
visible to view within fixture housing. Lighting
fixtures mounted in continuous rows shall have chase
nipples or conduit knockouts between lighting fixture
housing, but shall not have visible chase
nipples /conduit knockouts on the visible ends of the
continuous row of lighting fixtures.
D. Where fixture color is indicated to be selected by the
Architect, provide two color ship samples for review.
Electrical 16000
Page 14
3.05
3.06
a 3�
• • 1
E.
Recessed fixtures where noted to have attached junction
,
box shall have a junction box permanently attached to
the plaster ring so that it is accessible when the
fixture is removed. Conncetion between fixture and
pullbox to have flexible conduit and 2 #14 AWG "AF"
wires. The flexible conduit to be sufficient length so
that when the fixture is dropped, the pullbox is readily
accessible.
F.
Recessed fixtures must all have Underwriters's Laborato-
ry approval for recessed installation with plaster frame
and attached pull box. Lamp enclosure, reflectors and
finish wiring shall not be installed until plastering is
completed. Finish trim shall not be installed until
finish painting of the adjacent surface is completed.
G.
The fixture to bear Underwriter's label of approval for
the wattage indicated.
H.
Light fixtures installed outdoors in damp or wet loca-
tions shall be U.L. labeled for said location.
LENS
AND DIFFUSERS
A.
Whenever this specification calls for acrylic, acrylic
plastic or plexiglas for the diffusers or lighting
fixtures, these diffusers shall be manufactured by Rohm
and Haas Company, called Plexiglas G, Prudential or
equal. Diffusers shall be formed from cast sheet having
a minimum unpenetrated thickness of 0.125" and, in any
event, shall be of sufficient thickness and or proper
construction and camber to prevent the diffusers from
having any noticeable sag over the entire normal life of
the installation. Diffusers shall be formed from cast
sheet by a vacuum and /or pressure technique.
LIGHT FIXTURE MOUNTING HARDWARE
A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify actual
ceiling construction type as defined on the
architectural drawings and furnish all lighting fixtures
with the correct mounting devices and proper operating
voltage whether or not such variations are indicated by
fixture catalog number. The Contractor shall verify
depth of all recessed lighting fixtures with architectu-
ral drawings prior to ordering fixtures. Any discrepan-
cies that would cause recessed lighting fixtures not to
fit into ceiling shall be reported to the Architect
prior to ordering of the fixture.
Electrical 16000
Page 15
`, • •
H. Recessed fluorescent fixture mounted flush in "lay -in"
T -bar or concealed spline ceilings shall be provided
C. Fluorescent fixtures surface mounted to a suspended
1 "tee" ceiling shall be installed with a one and one -half
inch steel channel or angle which spans across and above
the main runners. The channel or angle member.shall be
with two
clips on each end of the
fixture and connected
to the
ceiling cross runners.
Provide two 12 -gauge
fixture
hanger wires attached to
structural members and
connect
shall set
to diagonal corners of
level and flush with ceiling
the fixture. Fixture
grid system.
C. Fluorescent fixtures surface mounted to a suspended
1 "tee" ceiling shall be installed with a one and one -half
inch steel channel or angle which spans across and above
the main runners. The channel or angle member.shall be
1 D. Pendant mounting fixtures shall be supplied with swivel
hangers. Fixtures shall swing in any direction a minimum
of 435 degrees of gravity, position. Fixtures shall have
special stem lengths to give the mounting height indica-
ted on the drawings. Stem to be 1 -piece without
coupling, and to be finished the same color as the
canopy and the fixture, unless otherwise noted. The Con-
tractor shall check all lock -nuts and set screws to
rigidly secure the socket to the stem, and the stem to
the outlet box. Fixtures to be plumb and vertical. Where
obsturctions occur restricting 45 degrees swing of
fixtures, the fixtures shall be guy wired to prevent
fixtures from striking obstructions. method of guying
shall be approved by the Architect and Electrical
Engineer. Swinging fixtures shall have a safety .cable
attached to the structure and the fixture at each
support capable of supporting four times the vertical
load.
E. Suspended fixtures weighing in excess of 50 pounds shall
be supported independently of the fixture outlet box.
Provide "air craft" hanger cable for suspended fixtures
route cable concealed or in pendant where possible. Each
cable shall support four times the weight of the
fixture. Securely attach the cable to the building
structure.
F. on acoustical tile ceilings, fixture outlets shall be
accurately located in the center, at the intersection of
the four corners or at the center of the joints of two
Itiles.
Electrical 16000
U33Page 16
provided with threaded studs
for attaching
to the
fixture housing through the lay
-in tile. Two
members
shall be installed per four foot
fixture. Two
12 -gauge
hanger wires shall be provided
per member, attached 6"
from each end of the member
and anchored
to the
structure above.
1 D. Pendant mounting fixtures shall be supplied with swivel
hangers. Fixtures shall swing in any direction a minimum
of 435 degrees of gravity, position. Fixtures shall have
special stem lengths to give the mounting height indica-
ted on the drawings. Stem to be 1 -piece without
coupling, and to be finished the same color as the
canopy and the fixture, unless otherwise noted. The Con-
tractor shall check all lock -nuts and set screws to
rigidly secure the socket to the stem, and the stem to
the outlet box. Fixtures to be plumb and vertical. Where
obsturctions occur restricting 45 degrees swing of
fixtures, the fixtures shall be guy wired to prevent
fixtures from striking obstructions. method of guying
shall be approved by the Architect and Electrical
Engineer. Swinging fixtures shall have a safety .cable
attached to the structure and the fixture at each
support capable of supporting four times the vertical
load.
E. Suspended fixtures weighing in excess of 50 pounds shall
be supported independently of the fixture outlet box.
Provide "air craft" hanger cable for suspended fixtures
route cable concealed or in pendant where possible. Each
cable shall support four times the weight of the
fixture. Securely attach the cable to the building
structure.
F. on acoustical tile ceilings, fixture outlets shall be
accurately located in the center, at the intersection of
the four corners or at the center of the joints of two
Itiles.
Electrical 16000
U33Page 16
• •
'
G. Surface mounted fixtures installed on drywall or plaster
ceilings and weighing less than 50 pounds may be suppor-
ted from outlet box. Provide structural supports above
drywall or plaster ceilings for installation of fixtures
weighing more than 50 pounds and secure .fixture to
structural supports. The use of toggle bolts is
prohibited.
3.07 The electrical Contractor shall aim the exterior adjustable
lighing fixtures after dark in the presence of, and at a time
convenient to the Architect.
3.08 RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES IN FIRE -RATED CEILINGS
Lighting fixtures recessed in ceiling or wall which has a fire
resistive rating of 1 hour or more enclosed in a box which has
a fire rating equal to that of the ceiling or wall. The space
from the fixture to the enclosure to be a minimum of 3 ". And
'
the light fixture shall be provided with High temperature high
efficiency lamp ballasts.
3.09 LAMPS FOR DIMMING SYSTEMS
A. Fluorescent and H.I.D. lamps controlled by dimming
equipment shall be operated (aged) for 100 continuous
hours without interruption, at 1008 outpur prior to
occupancy of the building be the Owner.
B. Energy saving fluorescent lamps shall not be used in
dimming systems.
C. Provide proper type and quantity of conductors within
conduit system for proper operation of dimming 'system,
whether or not shown on drawings.
3.10 BALLASTS - REMOTE (IF INDICATED ON PLANS)
A. Ballasts remote from the lighting fixture, mounted as
shown on the drawings and designed for remote operation.
Additional wiring and conduit shall be provided whether
,
shown on the drawing or not, between lighting fixture
and remote ballasts with required quantity of "THHN"
wire to operate said fixture(s).
,
PART IV: GENERAL INSTALLATION
4.01 DESCRIPTION. Installation requirements specified herein are_
general n nature and are not necessarily complete. All in
,
stallation requirements listed may not be used.
a3y
Electrical 16000
Page 17
U •
4.02 COORDINATION WITH E UIPME T OF OTHER TRADES. Where electrical
equipment s no to e a scent to or within 5 feet of work of
other trades, such as thermostats, control switches, and fire
hose cabinets, coordinate work so that completed installations
present a symmetrical appearance and so that equipment will
Iline up horizontal and vertical planes.
4.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS. Provide inserts, hangers and supports
required or supporting switches, conduits, junction and pull
boxes, fixtures and similar materials and equipment. Conduit
1" size or smaller, located above suspended ceilings, may be
fastened to ceiling furring or support wires in an approved
manner.
4.04 LIGHTING FIXTURES (see Part III)
4.05 Pull Wires. Provide a 1/8" size polypropylene pull wire in all
empty co uits, including those for signal and telephone sys-
tems. Identify conduits at exposed ends with tags. Tags shall
identify location of other end of conduit.
4.06 Joints and Connections. Cut conduit squarely and ream ends to
remove burrs. Close open ends of conduit, unless in a closed
box or cabinet, with approved conduit caps or closures as soon
as installed and keep closed until ready to pull in conductors.
4.07 Terminate Conduits of 1 -1/4" size and larger with insulated
bushings, with grounding lugs where required, O.Z. Type BLG,
or equal.
' 4.08 Run Ex osed Conduit parallel or perpendicular to building
structure. Bens or conduits used for telephone systems shall
be long radius.
4.09 Fl�as�hi_n�s. Where conduits extend through roof, provide
lasf Hangs as required by Division 7.
4.10 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Splices, Joints and Taps.
1. For wire in sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller, use.Ideal
"Wire -Nuts" or 3M "Scotchlocks ".
2. For Copper Wire in sizes No. 6 AWG and larger, use
Sundry split -bolt type connectors.
3. Make Splices, joints and taps, and connections to
motors and related equipment with approved solder -
less lugs sized for the wire or conductor size
involved.
Electrical 16000
IL Page 18
B. Tagging. Identify power and lighting feeders with per-
manent tags at panels, pull boxes, and points where
conduit run is broken.
C. Branch Circuit and Feeder Wirin for all systems shall
be continuous from switch to terminal or farthest out-
let. No joint shall be made except in pull junction or
outlet boxes, or in panel or switchboard gutters.
D. Installation. Thoroughly clean conduit and wire -ways and
ensure a parts are perfectly dry before pulling wires.
Do not install permanent wiring, without special permis-
sion from Architect, until plastering is done and dirt
removed. Wire shall be neatly arranged and laced together.
4.11 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING METHODS
A. Fluorescent Fixtures shall not be used as a raceway for
branch circuit conductors except where installed end -to-
end to form a continuous assembly.
B. Wall Outlets shall not be wired back -to -back. Boxes on
opposite sides of a common wall be separated horizontal-
ly by a space of at least 6 ".
4.12 WALL OUTLETS
A. Wall Mounted Switches and Receptacles. Set devices flush
with wall in outlet box with suitable plaster ring.
Install receptacles vertically at +12" from finish floor
to centerline of device. Install switches as +48 ".
B. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlets. Install 4" square outlet
box with single gang plaster ring set flush in wall at
+12" from finish floor to centerline of outlet. Where
outlets are for future use, provide a blank coverplate.
C. Wall outlets mounted in fire rated and /or party walls to
be approved for such installation. No plastic boxes
allowed except when approved by Codes and Building
Department.
4.13 FUSES. Do not install fuses supplying motors until the actual
nameprate data is determined by visual inspection of the
motors actually installed. Contractor to coordinate with motor
manufacturer and fuse manufacturer exact fuse type to be in-
stalled.
4.14 PRECAUTION. At all times during construction, use only those
fuse types and sizes irdicated.
4.15 PANELBOARDS. install wall mounted panelboards at 6 -feet from
top of panelbox to finish floor, except as otherwise required.
Electrical 16000
.,236 Page 19
l
i
•
•
4.16 SPARE CONDUITS. Where panelboards are installed flush with
wallet exte empty conduit from panelboards to an accessible
space above and below, or as indicated. Provide a minimum of
one 3/4" conduit for every three single pole spare circuit
breakers or spare spaces, but in any case not less than two
3/4" conduits for each panel.
END OF ELECTRICAL SECTION 16000
Electrical 16000
Page 20
n
I
I
n
�
� � �
1
!�
1
I=
��
�-
�:
1
1.
1'
II
�:
r :z:
August 8, 1986
TO: CITY CLERK
FROM: Public Works Department
SUBJECT: WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT
CORPORATION YARD, C -2478
Attached are four copies of the subject contract documents.
Please have executed on behalf of the City, retain your copy and the
insurance certificates, and return the remaining copies to this
department.
Kenneth L. Perry
i Project Engineer
KLP:em
Att:
•
BY THE CITY COUNC Suly 14, 1986
CITY OF NEVYPORT BEACHITY COUNCIL AGENDA
ITEM N0. F -3(a)
TO: CITY COUNCIL Jill 14 1986
• FROM: Public Works Department APPROVED
SUBJECT: WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT THE CORPORATION YARD
(CONTRACT NO. 2478)
RECOMMENDATION:
Award Contract No. 2478 to Now Construction Corporation, of
Santa Fe Springs, in the amount of $769,469, and authorize the Mayor
and the City Clerk to execute the contract.
DISCUSSION:
At 11:00 A.M. on June 11, 1986, the City Clerk opened and read two
bids for the project. A third bid, received late, was not opened.
Bidder Total Bid
1. Now Construction Corporation, $769,469.00
Santa Fe Springs
2. Martin J. Jaska, Inc. $847,095.05
• Montclair
The low bid is 14.2% over the revised Architect's and Engineer's esti-
mate of $653,765. Funds are appropriated for the project in the 1986 -87 budget
and carry - overs.
The contractor is properly licensed and appears to be well qualified.
He has submitted a list of over 250 jobs which he has completed in the last five
years. A check with his references indicates that his firm gets repeat business
from his corporate clients.
This project includes construction of a steel warehouse building with
9,600 square feet of area on the first floor, plus a 2,400 square -foot mezzanine
for records storage; enclosing a portion of Building "G" for the temporary con-
duct of the warehouse function during construction; demolition of the old ware-
house building; construction of a roof over the wash rack to prevent rainfall
runoff from entering the sanitary sewer system; and constructing permanent pave-
ment in the lower parking lot.
The plans for the warehouse were prepared by Ficker & Ruffing,
Architects. The plans for the wash rack roof were prepared by Robinson - Thompson
• Associates. The plan for the permanent pavement was prepared by the Public Works
Department.
The estimated date of completion is February 28, 1987.
The location of the work is shown on the attached sketch.
i
enja n B. Nolan
Public Works Director
KLP:jd
Att.
I. . . .......... ...... .... ......... . ........ . ... . . . OM&LI hD . . . ..... ..... .. DI.......
CHKD.§Y .... .... ....... nATM 0 --- ---- - ------------- -- it JOS P40.
•
•
0
ILI
'D
7
0
W
Q)
lWl)L)5TK(AL Wk��
MAZY LOWROO Or WAM40U5E F(AICT100
bco 4::Iar
Wo
W WAUft r
7 4
C'M bouQuAg,
FZCWCM LwE
F-17T-1
L4 k-li
Li
cxtSi
K'Ll
COp'pop-amow Yt-\Zp
69Z SUPER W, AVE,
Vi a
Authorized 10 Publish Advertisements of nds including public
notices by Decree of the Superior Co of Orange County,
California. Number A -6214. dated 29 September. 1961. and
A- 24831, dated n June. 1963
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
County of Orange > «. �� •a•« �� «w
Or mu
io pc1 W
«in cowmn �11n
I am a Citizen of the United States and a resident of
the County aforesaid, I am over the age of eighteen
years, and not a party to or interested in the below
entitled matter I am a principal clerk of the Orange
Coast DAILY PILOT, with which is combined the
NEWS - PRESS. a newspaper of general circulation,
printed and published in the City of Costa Mesa,
County of Orange. State of California, and that a
Notice of INVITING BIDS
of which copy attached hereto is a true and complete
copy, was printed and published in the Costa Mesa,
Newport Beach, Huntington Beach, Fountain Valley,
Irvine, the South Coast communities and Laguna
Beach issues of said newspaper for 1 time
consecutive weeks to wit the issue(s) of
May 15
6
198-
198_
198_
198 -
198—
I declare, under penalty of perjury, that the
foregoing is true and correct.
Executed on May 19 egg 6
at"C'o,sta Mesa, California.
Signature
0
ow
+aN be
tlka
of
be Opened ww
kftw
or's Estimate:
d by the City'
s 12th dayot May,
C tiI1Ma. Chy
n,
PROOF OF PUBLICATIONS
. • May 12, 1986
CITY COUNCIL AGENDA
ITEM NO. F -16
BY THE Cff, COUKIL
CITY OF N 61 PORT BEACH
TO: CITY COUNCIL
•
FROM: Public Works Department MAY 12 1986
APPROVED
SUBJECT: WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER AND PAVEMENT AT THE RPW7TUIFYARD
(CONTRACT NO. 2478)
RECOMMENDATIONS:
1. Approve the plans and specifications.
2. Authorize the City Clerk to to be opened
at 11:00 A.M. on
The 1985 -86 budget contains appropriations for several projects at the
Corporation Yard which have been combined into one construction contract:
replacing the existing warehouse with a new warehouse and records storage facil-
ity; constructing a roof over the wash rack; and constructing permanent pave-
ment.
• The new warehouse building is of steel construction with 12,160 square
feet of floor area, including a 2,400- square -foot mezzanine for records storage.
The entire building is insulated, but only the office area and records storage
area are heated.
$633,765.00
Project
Source of Funds
Appropriation
1.
Construct warehouse and records
General Fund
$385,000.00
storage facility
Water Fund
175,000.00
2.
Construct roof over wash rack
General Fund
32,305.00
3.
Construct Phase I and II
improvements
General Fund
75,804.00
4.
Grade and pave additional areas
General Fund
98,080.00
Subtotal
$766,189.00
The project budget is as follows:
is
1. Construction contract
Staking
$ 3,000.00
Demolition
45,600.00
Rearrange utilities
21,500.00
Construct warehouse
451,310.00
Construct roof over
wash rack 32,305.00
Construct pavement
80,500.00
$633,765.00
May 12, 1986 0
Subject: Warehouse, Psh Rack Cover and Pavement at Ah Corporation Yard
(Contract No. 2478)
Page 2
(from page 1) $633,756.00
2. Miscellaneous, printing, testing,
contract administration 10,000.00
3. Costs for moving and operating
warehouse function in temporary
facilities 30,000.00
Subtotal 673,765.00
6. Contingencies (6 %) 39,704.75
Total $713,469.75
Unencumbered Funds remaining in appropriations
as of April 4, 1986.
1.
Construct
warehouse General Fund
$354,688.98
Water Fund
175,000.00
2.
Construct
roof over washrack
32,305.00
• 3.
Phase I and II improvements
53,395.77
4.
Grade and
pave additional areas
98,080.00
Total
$713,469.75
If
bid prices
are high, the proposal provides that
the mezzanine floor
may be deleted
from the
award of contract (at an estimated
saving of $48,000).
If additional
savings are needed, the amount of permanent
pavement may be
decreased. If
bid prices are favorable, the staff would
recommend increasing
the amount of
permanent
pavement constructed.
The plans for the warehouse were prepared by Ficker & Ruffing,
Architects. The plans for the wash rack roof were prepared by Robinson - Thompson
Associates. The plan for the permanent pavement was prepared by the Public
Works Department.
The estimated date of completion is February 28, 1987.
The location of the work is shown on the attached sketch. A set of
• plans will be on display in the Council's Conference Room.
Benjamin B. Nolan
Public Works Director
KLP:jd
Att
0
lU
Id
9
•
3
DATE CT GHKETNO.-.--CF
JOB 140.
jWDL)5TK(At. WA-(
Up, 11
Ww tVAUk
Ct" bouODA94 so
Fea,SV Ll&g--L
UC5eL F-1771
(fcRR:)R.a7(ow Y/-\Zp
59 Z '5QFCRJM AVC,
T-T
SINS
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
• June 4, 1986
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD
CONTRACT NO. 2478
ADDENDUM NO. 1
BIDDERS shall propose to complete Contract No. 2478 in accordance with the
Contract documents as modified by this Addendum No. 1.
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section 13120
a. Paragraph 2.01 shall be amended by adding the words "or equal" after the
list of manufacturers of Pre - Engineered Building Systems.
b. The last sentence of Paragraph F1 shall be changed to: "Two colors
shall be selected from those that are standard with the building
manufacturer."
DRAWINGS
Drawing No. M- 5253 -S, Sheet 2 of 3
1. An asphalt concrete join strip 2 feet in width, consisting of 3 inches
of asphalt concrete over 6 inches of imported aggregate base over com-
pacted native material, shall be constructed between the Portland cement
concrete curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and slabs surrounding the new ware-
house building and the existing asphalt concrete pavement; and between
the portland cement concrete drain gutter and the existing asphalt
concrete pavement.
2. Add one thrust block where the new 2 -inch copper water line joins
existing and 4 -inch ACP water line northeasterly of the fire service
vault.
3. The drain gutter easterly of the northeast corner of the warehouse
building shall be 4' -0" in width. The cost of the drain gutter and the
asphalt concrete join strips shall be included in the lump sum price
to be paid for constructing the warehouse building.
Drawing No. B- 5114 -S
Sheet A2
1. Note No. 6 shall be changed to: "Existing A.C. pavement outside of new
warehouse building and surrounding curbs, gutters, sidewalks, slabs, and
drain gutter, but within the line designated project limit line of Sheet
A2 shall be protected."
2. Note No. 7 shall be changed to "Protect existing water valve box."
3. Note No. 10 shall be changed to: "Existing utility lines to be aban-
doned are shown on Drawing No. M- 5253 -S, Sheet 2, and said abandonment
shall be done by the Contractor as part of this Contract 2478."
y �C -2478 Addendum No. 1, `e 2
0
4. Note No. 11 shall be changed to: "New underground utility lines to be
constructed in order to clear the site of the new warehouse building
shall be constructed by the Contractor as part of this Contract 2478."
Sheet A3
1. Portland cement concrete sidewalk shall be 4 inches thick.
2. The two portland cement concrete driveway approaches at the south wall
shall be 6 inches thick.
3. The curb to the south of the warehouse shall have a zero curb face;
therefore, the two roof drains at the south wall shall discharge onto
the sidewalk.
Sheets S1 to S4
Note on Sheets S1 to S4 saying "By Others" refers to design of the struc-
tural members by the designer of the pre- engineered building. The General
Contractor is responsible for designing and furnishing the pre- engineered
metal building plus the steel beams and columns for the mezzanine.
Sheet D2
Details 8 and 12 have been deleted.
per City Standard Drawing 182 -L. The
Drawing M- 5253 -S, Sheet 3.
Sheet P2
The curb and gutter sections shall be
cross gutter detail is shown on
The water service to the new warehouse shall be connected to the new 2 -inch
copper domestic water line to be constructed by the Contractor under Bid
Item No. 4 of the Proposal.
Sheet E1
1. Note No. 3 shall be changed to: "Protect existing 1" conduit with 2 #6
copper wires to provide electrical service for Building "G" and the
gasoline station."
2. Note No. 4 shall be changed to: "Abandon 1" conduit."
3. The following shall be added to Note No. 6: "Construct No. 3J pullbox
for reconnecting existing electrical line to Building "G" and gas sta-
tion to existing line from main panel in automotive maintenance shop."
Please si n and date this Addendum and attach it to our Pro osal. Your
roposa wi not a considered complete unless the Addendum is signed, dated,
and attached.
Kennethray 4 O
Project Engineer
Bidder
Authorized Signature /Title
• June 4, 1986
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD
CONTRACT NO. 2478
ADDENDUM NO. 1
BIDDERS shall propose to complete Contract No. 2478 in accordance with the
Contract documents as modified by this Addendum No. 1.
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section 13120
a. Paragraph 2.01 shall be amended by adding the words "or equal" after the
list of manufacturers of Pre - Engineered Building Systems.
b. The last sentence of Paragraph F1 shall be changed to: "Two colors
shall be selected from those that are standard with the building
manufacturer."
DRAWINGS
Drawing No. M- 5253 -S, Sheet 2 of 3
1. An asphalt concrete join strip 2 feet in width, consisting of 3 inches
of asphalt concrete over 6 inches of imported aggregate base over com-
pacted native material, shall be constructed between the Portland cement
concrete curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and slabs surrounding the new ware-
house building and the existing asphalt concrete pavement; and between
the portland cement concrete drain gutter and the existing asphalt
concrete pavement.
2. Add one thrust block where the new 2 -inch copper water line joins
existing and 4 -inch ACP water line northeasterly of the fire service
vault.
3. The drain gutter easterly of the northeast corner of the warehouse
building shall be 4' -0" in width. The cost of the drain gutter and the
asphalt concrete join strips shall be included in the lump sum price
to be paid for constructing the warehouse building.
Drawing No. B- 5114 -S
Sheet A2
1. Note No. 6 shall be changed to: "Existing A.C. pavement outside of new
warehouse building and surrounding curbs, gutters, sidewalks, slabs, and
drain gutter, but within the line designated project limit line of Sheet
A2 shall be protected."
2. Note No. 7 shall be changed to "Protect existing water valve box."
3. Note No. 10 shall be changed to: "Existing utility lines to be aban-
doned are shown on Drawing No. M- 5253 -S, Sheet 2, and said abandonment
shall be done by the Contractor as part of this Contract 2478."
{ C -2478 Addendum No. 1, W 2 •
4. Note No. 11 shall be changed to: "New underground utility lines to be
constructed in order to clear the site of the new warehouse building
shall be constructed by the Contractor as part of this Contract 2478."
Sheet A3
1. Portland cement concrete sidewalk shall be 4 inches thick.
2. The two portland cement concrete driveway approaches at the south wall
shall be 6 inches thick.
3. The curb to the south of the warehouse shall have a zero curb face;
therefore, the two roof drains at the south wall shall discharge onto
the sidewalk.
Sheets S1 to S4
Note on Sheets S1 to S4 sayin
tural members by the designer
Contractor is responsible for
metal building plus the steel
Sheet D2
3 "By Others" refers to design of the struc-
of the pre- engineered building. The General
designing and furnishing the pre- engineered
beams and columns for the mezzanine.
Details 8 and 12 have been deleted. The curb and gutter sections shall be
per City Standard Drawing 182 -L. The cross gutter detail is shown on
Drawing M- 5253 -S, Sheet 3.
fhcnf D9
The water service to the new warehouse shall be connected to the new 2 -inch
copper domestic water line to be constructed by the Contractor under Bid
Item No. 4 of the Proposal.
Sheet E1
1. Note No. 3 shall be changed to: "Protect existing 1" conduit with 2 #6
copper wires to provide electrical service for Building "G" and the
gasoline station."
2. Note No. 4 shall be changed to: "Abandon 1" conduit."
3. The following shall be added to Note No. 6: "Construct No. 31 pullbox
for reconnecting existing electrical line to Building "G" and gas sta-
tion to existing line from main panel in automotive maintenance shop."
Please sign and date this Addendum and attach it to Your Proposal. Your
Proposal will not be considered complete unless the Addendum is signed, dated,
and attached. -�-w
�
Kenneth rrY � O
Project Engineer
Authorized Signature /Title
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH to June 5, 1986
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD
CONTRACT NO. 2478
ADDENDUM NO. 2
BIDDERS shall propose to complete Contract No. 2478 in accordance with the
Contract documents as modified by this Addendum No. 2.
ARCHITECTURAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 08700
Page 7
of Section 08700 of
the Architectural Specifications
shall be
amended to read
as follows:
HW -2
Each
door " -t6 hate'-"
3
Hinges
BB4104 -4 -1/2 in.
1
1
Lock
789L -L9923
18
1
Surface Closer
4040 -EDA
4
1
Threshold
Standard Building
1 Set
Seal
755 Head & Jamb
6
Door No. 2 is a building standard door.
HW -3
Each door to have
3 Hinges BB4101 -4 -1/2
1. Lock 789L -L9520
1 Stop F8063X Riser as Req.
3 Hinges
1 Lock
1 Stop
1 Cylinder
HW -4
Each door to have
BB4101 -4 -1/2 in.
789L -L9923
F8063X Riser as Req.
HW -5
Each door to have
For master keying
Balance of Hardware by Gate Supplier.
END OF SECTION 08700
1
18
5
1
18
5
Please sign and date this Addendum and attach it to your Proposal. Your
Proposal will not be considered complete unless the Addendum is signed, dated,
and attached.
Date:
Kenneth L. Perry Bidder
Project Engineer
Authorized Signature /Title
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH June 5, 1986
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
WAREHOUSE, WASH RACK COVER, AND PAVEMENT AT CORPORATION YARD
CONTRACT NO. 2478
ADDENDUM NO. 2
BIDDERS shall propose to complete Contract No. 2478 in accordance with the
Contract documents as modified by this Addendum No. 2.
ARCHITECTURAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 08700
Page 7
of Section 08700
of
the Architectural Specifications
shall be
amended to read
as follows:
HW -2
Each
door to have
3
Hinges
BB4104 -4 -1/2 in.
1
1
Lock
789L -L9923
18
1
Surface Closer
4040 -EDA
4
1
Threshold
Standard Building
1 Set
Seal
755 Head & Jamb
6
' Door No.
2 is a building
standard
door.
HW -3
Each
door to have
3
Hinges
B84101 -4 -1/2
1
1.
Lock
789L -L9520
18
1
Stop
F8063X Riser as Req.
5
HW -4
Each
door to have
3
Hinges
BB4101 -4 -1/2 in.
1
1
Lock
789L -L9923
18
1
Stop
F8063X Riser as Req.
5
HW -5
Each
door to have
1
Cylinder
For master keying
Balance of Hardware by Gate Supplier.
END OF SECTION 08700
Please sign and date this Addendum and attach it to your Proposal. Your
Proposal will not be considered complete unless the Addendum is signed, dated,
and attached.
Date:
Kenneth L. Perry Bidder
Project Engineer
Authorized Signature /Title